Mitsubishi PUHY P72 Introduction1 User Manual To The 4e424e6c 585f 4429 A7f9 0d15620fc7c9

User Manual: Mitsubishi PUHY-P72 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 326

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Safety Precautions
Before installing the unit, thoroughly read the following safety precautions.
Observe these safety precautions for your safety.

WARNING
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid
the risk of serious injury or death.

CAUTION
This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important instructions that must be followed to avoid
the risk of serious injury or damage to the unit.

After reading this manual, give it to the user to retain for future reference.
Keep this manual for easy reference. When the unit is moved or repaired, give this manual to those who provide these
services.
When the user changes, make sure that the new user receives this manual.

WARNING

Ask your dealer or a qualified technician to install the
unit.

In the event of a refrigerant leak, thoroughly ventilate
the room.

Improper installation by the user may result in water leakage, electric shock, smoke, and/or fire.

If refrigerant gas leaks and comes in contact with an open
flame, poisonous gases will be produced.

Properly install the unit on a surface that can withstand the weight of the unit.

When installing the All-Fresh type units, take it into
consideration that the outside air may be discharged
directly into the room when the thermo is turned off.

Unit installed on an unstable surface may fall and cause injury.

Direct exposure to outdoor air may have an adverse effect
on health. It may also result in food spoilage.

Only use specified cables. Securely connect each cable so that the terminals do not carry the weight of the
cable.

Properly install the unit according to the instructions
in the installation manual.

Improperly connected or fixed cables may produce heat
and start a fire.

Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.
Have all electrical work performed by an authorized
electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this manual, and a dedicated circuit must
be used.

Take appropriate safety measures against strong
winds and earthquakes to prevent the unit from falling.
If the unit is not installed properly, the unit may fall and
cause serious injury to the person or damage to the unit.

Insufficient capacity of the power supply circuit or improper
installation may result in malfunctions of the unit, electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Do not make any modifications or alterations to the
unit. Consult your dealer for repair.
Improper repair may result in water leakage, electric shock,
smoke, and/or fire.
Do not touch the heat exchanger fins.
The fins are sharp and dangerous.

HWE08040

i

GB

WARNING

Securely attach the terminal block cover (panel) to the
unit.

After completing the service work, check for a gas
leak.

If the terminal block cover (panel) is not installed properly,
dust and/or water may infiltrate and pose a risk of electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.

If leaked refrigerant is exposed to a heat source, such as a
fan heater, stove, or electric grill, poisonous gases may be
produced.

Only use the type of refrigerant that is indicated on the
unit when installing or reinstalling the unit.

Do not try to defeat the safety features of the unit.

Infiltration of any other type of refrigerant or air into the unit
may adversely affect the refrigerant cycle and may cause
the pipes to burst or explode.

Forced operation of the pressure switch or the temperature
switch by defeating the safety features of these devices, or
the use of accessories other than the ones that are recommended by MITSUBISHI may result in smoke, fire, and/or
explosion.

When installing the unit in a small room, exercise caution and take measures against leaked refrigerant
reaching the limiting concentration.

Only use accessories recommended by MITSUBISHI.
Ask a qualified technician to install the unit. Improper installation by the user may result in water leakage, electric
shock, smoke, and/or fire.

Consult your dealer with any questions regarding limiting
concentrations and for precautionary measures before installing the unit. Leaked refrigerant gas exceeding the limiting concentration causes oxygen deficiency.

Control box houses high-voltage parts.
When opening or closing the front panel of the control box,
do not let it come into contact with any of the internal components. Before inspecting the inside of the control box,
turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on
INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less. (It takes about
10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is
turned off.)

Consult your dealer or a specialist when moving or reinstalling the unit.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric
shock, and/or fire.

HWE08040

ii

GB

Precautions for handling units for use with R410A
CAUTION

Do not use the existing refrigerant piping.

Use a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve.

A large amount of chlorine that may be contained in the residual refrigerant and refrigerating machine oil in the existing piping may cause the refrigerating machine oil in the
new unit to deteriorate.
R410A is a high-pressure refrigerant and can cause the
existing pipes to burst.

If a vacuum pump that is not equipped with a reverse-flow
check valve is used, the vacuum pump oil may flow into the
refrigerant cycle and cause the refrigerating machine oil to
deteriorate.
Prepare tools for exclusive use with R410A. Do not use
the following tools if they have been used with the conventional refrigerant (gauge manifold, charging hose,
gas leak detector, reverse-flow check valve, refrigerant
charge base, vacuum gauge, and refrigerant recovery
equipment.).

Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized
copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes
clean and free of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides,
dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water.

If the refrigerant or the refrigerating machine oil left on
these tools are mixed in with R410A, it may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.
Infiltration of water may cause the refrigerating machine
oil to deteriorate.
Gas leak detectors for conventional refrigerants will not
detect an R410A leak because R410A is free of chlorine.

These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes
may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate.
Store the pipes to be installed indoors, and keep both
ends of the pipes sealed until immediately before brazing. (Keep elbows and other joints wrapped in plastic.)
Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system
may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate or
cause the unit to malfunction.

Do not use a charging cylinder.
If a charging cylinder is used, the composition of the refrigerant will change, and the unit may experience power loss.

Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges.

Exercise special care when handling the tools for use
with R410A.

Infiltration of a large amount of mineral oil may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

Infiltration of dust, dirt, or water into the refrigerant system
may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.

Only use refrigerant R410A.

If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and
may result in performance loss.

HWE08040

The use of other types of refrigerant that contain chlorine
(i.e. R22) may cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

iii

GB

Before installing the unit
WARNING

Do not install the unit where a gas leak may occur.

When installing the unit in a hospital, take appropriate
measures to reduce noise interference.

If gaseous refrigerant leaks and piles up around the unit, it
may be ignited.

High-frequency medical equipment may interfere with the
normal operation of the air conditioner or vice versa.

Do not use the unit to keep food items, animals, plants,
artifacts, or for other special purposes.

Do not install the unit on or over things that cannot get
wet.

The unit is not designed to preserve food products.

When the humidity level exceeds 80% or if the drainage
system is clogged, the indoor unit may drip water. Drain water is also discharged from the outdoor unit. Install a centralized drainage system if necessary.

Do not use the unit in an unusual environment.
Do not install the unit where a large amount of oil or steam
is present or where acidic or alkaline solutions or chemical
sprays are used frequently. Doing so may lead to a remarkable drop in performance, electric shock, malfunctions, smoke, and/or fire.
The presence of organic solvents or corrosive gas (i.e.
ammonia, sulfur compounds, and acid) may cause gas
leakage or water leakage.

HWE08040

iv

GB

Before installing the unit (moving and reinstalling the unit) and performing
electrical work
CAUTION

Properly ground the unit.

Periodically check the installation base for damage.

Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, water pipe,
lightning rod, or grounding wire from a telephone pole. Improper grounding may result in electric shock, smoke, fire,
and/or malfunction due to noise interference.

If the unit is left on a damaged platform, it may fall and
cause injury.
Properly install the drain pipes according to the instructions in the installation manual. Keep them insulated to avoid dew condensation.

Do not put tension on the power supply wires.
If tension is put on the wires, they may break and result in
excessive heat, smoke, and/or fire.

Improper plumbing work may result in water leakage and
damage to the furnishings.

Install an earth leakage breaker to avoid the risk of
electric shock.

Exercise caution when transporting products.
Products weighing more than 20 kg should not be carried
alone.
Do not carry the product by the PP bands that are used on
some products.
Do not touch the heat exchanger fins. They are sharp and
dangerous.
When lifting the unit with a crane, secure all four corners
to prevent the unit from falling.

Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in
electric shock, smoke, and/or fire.
Use the kind of power supply wires that are specified
in the installation manual.
The use of wrong kind of power supply wires may result in
current leak, electric shock, and/or fire.

Properly dispose of the packing materials.

Use breakers and fuses (current breaker, remote
switch , moulded case circuit
breaker) with the proper current capacity.

Nails and wood pieces in the package may pose a risk of
injury.
Plastic bags may pose a risk of choking hazard to children. Tear plastic bags into pieces before disposing of
them.

The use of wrong capacity fuses, steel wires, or copper
wires may result in malfunctions, smoke, and/or fire.
Do not spray water on the air conditioner or immerse
the air conditioner in water.
Otherwise, electric shock and/or fire may result.
When handling units, always wear protective gloves to
protect your hands from metal parts and high-temperature parts.

HWE08040

v

GB

Before the test run
CAUTION

Turn on the unit at least 12 hours before the test run.

Do not operate the unit without panels and safety
guards.

Keep the unit turned on throughout the season. If the unit is
turned off in the middle of a season, it may result in malfunctions.

Rotating, high-temperature, or high-voltage parts on the unit
pose a risk of burns and/or electric shock.

To avoid the risk of electric shock or malfunction of the
unit, do not operate switches with wet hands.

Do not turn off the power immediately after stopping
the operation.
Keep the unit on for at least five minutes before turning off
the power to prevent water leakage or malfunction.

Do not touch the refrigerant pipes with bare hands during and immediately after operation.

Do not operate the unit without the air filter.

During or immediately after operation, certain parts of the
unit such as pipes and compressor may be either very cold
or hot, depending on the state of the refrigerant in the unit
at the time. To reduce the risk of frost bites and burns, do
not touch these parts with bare hands.

HWE08040

Dust particles may build up in the system and cause malfunctions.

vi

GB

CONTENTS
I Read Before Servicing
[1] Read Before Servicing.............................................................................................................. 3
[2] Necessary Tools and Materials ................................................................................................ 4
[3] Piping Materials ........................................................................................................................ 5
[4] Storage of Piping ...................................................................................................................... 7
[5] Pipe Processing........................................................................................................................ 7
[6] Brazing...................................................................................................................................... 8
[7] Air Tightness Test..................................................................................................................... 9
[8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) .................................................................................................. 10
[9] Refrigerant Charging .............................................................................................................. 11
[10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak............................................................ 11
[11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants ............................................ 12
[12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil...................................................................................... 13

II Restrictions
[1] System configuration .............................................................................................................. 17
[2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables .................................................................. 18
[3] Switch Settings and Address Settings .................................................................................... 19
[4] Sample System Connection ................................................................................................... 26
[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected ........................... 27
[6] An Example of a System to which an M-NET Remote Controller is connected ..................... 37
[7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and M-NET Remote
Controller are connected ........................................................................................................ 39
[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length.................................................................................................... 41

III Outdoor Unit Components
[1] Outdoor Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit ................................................................. 47
[2] Control Box of the Outdoor Unit.............................................................................................. 49
[3] Outdoor Unit Circuit Board...................................................................................................... 52

IV Remote Controller
[1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers .......................................... 65
[2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller .................................... 66
[3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller .................................................................... 70
[4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller.......................................... 71

V Electrical Wiring Diagram
[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Outdoor Unit ........................................................................ 75
[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster................................................................ 78

VI Refrigerant Circuit
[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram .................................................................................................... 81
[2] Principal Parts and Functions ................................................................................................. 82

VII Control
[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches ................................................................ 89
[2] Controlling the Outdoor Unit ................................................................................................... 96
[3] Operation Flow Chart............................................................................................................ 108

VIII Test Run Mode
[1] Items to be checked before a Test Run................................................................................ 115
[2] Test Run Method .................................................................................................................. 116
[3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount................................................................ 117
[4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount......................................................................................... 117
[5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode.......................................................................................... 120
[6] The following symptoms are normal. .................................................................................... 122
[7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) ......................................................................... 123

IX Troubleshooting
[1] Error Code Lists.................................................................................................................... 149
[2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller........................................................ 152
[3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise ............................................................... 231
[4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts............................................................................................ 234
[5] Refrigerant Leak ................................................................................................................... 265
[6] Compressor Replacement Instructions................................................................................. 267
[7] Troubleshooting Using the Outdoor Unit LED Error Display................................................. 269

X LED Monitor Display on the Outdoor Unit Board
[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ...................................................................... 273
HWE08040

GB

HWE08040

GB

I Read Before Servicing
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]

HWE08040

Read Before Servicing ....................................................................................................... 3
Necessary Tools and Materials.......................................................................................... 4
Piping Materials ................................................................................................................. 5
Storage of Piping ............................................................................................................... 7
Pipe Processing ................................................................................................................. 7
Brazing............................................................................................................................... 8
Air Tightness Test .............................................................................................................. 9
Vacuum Drying (Evacuation) ........................................................................................... 10
Refrigerant Charging........................................................................................................ 11
Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak ....................................................... 11
Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants ....................................... 12
Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil ................................................................................. 13

-1-

GB

-2-

[ I Read Before Servicing ]
I Read Before Servicing

[1] Read Before Servicing
1. Check the type of refrigerant used in the system to be serviced.
Refrigerant Type
Multi air conditioner for building application CITY MULTI THMU-A, YHMU-A series R410A
2. Check the symptoms exhibited by the unit to be serviced.
Refer to this service handbook for symptoms relating to the refrigerant cycle.
3. Thoroughly read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual.
4. Preparing necessary tools: Prepare a set of tools to be used exclusively with each type of refrigerant.
Refer to "Necessary Tools and Materials" for information on the use of tools.(page 4)
5. Verification of the connecting pipes: Verify the type of refrigerant used for the unit to be moved or replaced.
Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper. Keep the inner and outer surfaces of the pipes clean and free
of such contaminants as sulfur, oxides, dust, dirt, shaving particles, oil, and water.
These types of contaminants inside the refrigerant pipes may cause the refrigerant oil to deteriorate.
6. If there is a leak of gaseous refrigerant and the remaining refrigerant is exposed to an open flame, a poisonous gas
hydrofluoric acid may form. Keep workplace well ventilated.

CAUTION
Install new pipes immediately after removing old ones to keep moisture out of the refrigerant circuit.
The use of refrigerant that contains chloride, such as R22, will cause the refrigerating machine oil to deteriorate.

HWE08040

-3-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[2] Necessary Tools and Materials
Prepare the following tools and materials necessary for installing and servicing the unit.
Tools for use with R410A (Adaptability of tools that are for use with R22 or R407C)
1. To be used exclusively with R410A (not to be used if used with R22 or R407C)
Tools/Materials

Use

Notes

Gauge Manifold

Evacuation and refrigerant charging

Higher than 5.09MPa[738psi] on the
high-pressure side

Charging Hose

Evacuation and refrigerant charging

The hose diameter is larger than the
conventional model.

Refrigerant Recovery Cylinder

Refrigerant recovery

Refrigerant Cylinder

Refrigerant charging

The refrigerant type is indicated. The
cylinder is pink.

Charging Port on the Refrigerant Cylinder Refrigerant charging

The charge port diameter is larger
than that of the current port.

Flare Nut

Use Type-2 Flare nuts.

Connection of the unit with the pipes

2. Tools and materials that may be used with R410A with some restrictions
Tools/Materials

Use

Notes

Gas Leak Detector

Gas leak detection

The ones for use with HFC refrigerant
may be used.

Vacuum Pump

Vacuum drying

May be used if a check valve adapter
is attached.

Flare Tool

Flare processing

Flare processing dimensions for the
piping in the system using the new refrigerant differ from those of R22. Refer to next page.

Refrigerant Recovery Equipment

Refrigerant recovery

May be used if compatible with
R410A.

3. Tools and materials that are used with R22 or R407C that may also be used with R410A
Tools/Materials

Use

Vacuum Pump with a Check Valve

Vacuum drying

Bender

Bending pipes

Torque Wrench

Tightening flare nuts

Pipe Cutter

Cutting pipes

Welder and Nitrogen Cylinder

Welding pipes

Refrigerant Charging Meter

Refrigerant charging

Vacuum Gauge

Vacuum level check

Notes

Only the flare processing dimensions
for pipes that have a diameter of
ø12.70 (1/2") and ø15.88 (5/8") have
been changed.

4. Tools and materials that must not be used with R410A
Tools/Materials
Charging Cylinder

Use
Refrigerant charging

Notes
Prohibited to use

Tools for R410A must be handled with special care to keep moisture and dust from infiltrating the cycle.

HWE08040

-4-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[3] Piping Materials

Do not use the existing piping!
1. Copper pipe materials
O-material (Annealed)

Soft copper pipes (annealed copper pipes). They can easily be bent with hands.

1/2H-material (Drawn)

Hard copper pipes (straight pipes). They are stronger than the O-material (Annealed)
at the same radial thickness.

The distinction between O-materials (Annealed) and 1/2H-materials (Drawn) is made based on the strength of the pipes themselves.
O-materials (Annealed) can easily be bent with hands.
1/2H-materials (Drawn) are considerably stronger than O-material (Annealed) at the same thickness.
2. Types of copper pipes
Maximum working pressure

Refrigerant type

3.45 MPa [500psi]

R22, R407C etc.

4.30 MPa [624psi]

R410A etc.

3. Piping materials/Radial thickness
Use refrigerant pipes made of phosphorus deoxidized copper.
The operation pressure of the units that use R410A is higher than that of the units that use R22.
Use pipes that have at least the radial thickness specified in the chart below.
(Pipes with a radial thickness of 0.7 mm or less may not be used.)
Pipe size (mm[in])

Radial thickness (mm)

ø6.35

[1/4"]

0.8t

ø9.52

[3/8"]

0.8t

ø12.7

[1/2"]

0.8t

ø15.88

[5/8"]

1.0t

ø19.05

[3/4"]

1.0t

ø22.2

[7/8"]

1.0t

ø25.4

[1"]

1.0t

ø28.58

[1-1/8"]

1.0t

ø31.75

[1-1/4"]

1.1t

ø34.93

[1-3/8"]

1.1t

ø41.28

[1-5/8"]

1.2t

Type

O-material (Annealed)

1/2H-material,
H-material (Drawn)

The pipes in the system that uses the refrigerant currently on the market are made with O-material (Annealed), even if the
pipe diameter is less than ø19.05 (3/4"). For a system that uses R410A, use pipes that are made with 1/2H-material (Drawn)
unless the pipe diameter is at least ø19.05 (3/4") and the radial thickness is at least 1.2t.
The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes
that meet the local standards.

HWE08040

-5-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]
4. Thickness and refrigerant type indicated on the piping materials
Ask the pipe manufacturer for the symbols indicated on the piping material for new refrigerant.

5. Flare processing (O-material (Annealed) and OL-material only)
The flare processing dimensions for the pipes that are used in the R410A system are larger than those in the R22 system.
Flare processing dimensions (mm[in])
A dimension (mm)
R410A

R22, R407C

ø6.35

[1/4"]

9.1

9.0

ø9.52

[3/8"]

13.2

13.0

ø12.7

[1/2"]

16.6

16.2

ø15.88

[5/8"]

19.7

19.4

ø19.05

[3/4"]

24.0

23.3

Dimension A

Pipe size (mm[in])

If a clutch-type flare tool is used to flare the pipes in the system using R410A, the length of the pipes must be between 1.0
and 1.5 mm. For margin adjustment, a copper pipe gauge is necessary.
6. Flare nut
The flare nut type has been changed to increase the strength. The size of some of the flare nuts have also been changed.
Flare nut dimensions (mm[in])
B dimension (mm)
Pipe size (mm[in])
R410A

R22, R407C

ø6.35

[1/4"]

17.0

17.0

ø9.52

[3/8"]

22.0

22.0

ø12.7

[1/2"]

26.0

24.0

ø15.88

[5/8"]

29.0

27.0

ø19.05

[3/4"]

36.0

36.0

Dimension B

The figures in the radial thickness column are based on the Japanese standards and provided only as a reference. Use pipes
that meet the local standards.

HWE08040

-6-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[4] Storage of Piping
1. Storage location

Store the pipes to be used indoors. (Warehouse at site or owner's warehouse)
If they are left outdoors, dust, dirt, or moisture may infiltrate and contaminate the pipe.
2. Sealing the pipe ends

Both ends of the pipes should be sealed until just before brazing.
Keep elbow pipes and T-joints in plastic bags.
The new refrigerator oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional refrigerating machine oil (such as Suniso) and, if not
handled with care, could easily introduce moisture into the system. Keep moisture out of the pipes, for it will cause the oil to
deteriorate and cause a compressor failure.

[5] Pipe Processing
Use a small amount of ester oil, ether oil, or alkylbenzene to coat flares and flanges.

Use a minimum amount of oil.
Use only ester oil, ether oil, and alkylbenzene.

HWE08040

-7-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[6] Brazing
No changes have been made in the brazing procedures. Perform brazing with special care to keep foreign objects (such as oxide
scale, water, and dust) out of the refrigerant system.
Example: Inside the brazed connection

Use of oxidized solder for brazing

Use of non-oxidized solder for brazing

1. Items to be strictly observed
Do not conduct refrigerant piping work outdoors if raining.
Use non-oxidized solder.
Use a brazing material (BCuP-3) that requires no flux when brazing between copper pipes or between a copper pipe and
copper coupling.
If installed refrigerant pipes are not immediately connected to the equipment, then braze and seal both ends.
2. Reasons
The new refrigerating machine oil is 10 times as hygroscopic as the conventional oil and is more likely to cause unit failure if
water infiltrates into the system.
Flux generally contains chloride. Residual flux in the refrigerant circuit will cause sludge to form.
3. Notes
Do not use commercially available antioxidants because they may cause the pipes to corrode or refrigerating machine oil to
deteriorate.

HWE08040

-8-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[7] Air Tightness Test
No changes have been made in the detection method. Note that a refrigerant leak detector for R22 will not detect an R410A leak.

Halide torch

R22 leakage detector

1. Items to be strictly observed
Pressurize the equipment with nitrogen up to the design pressure (4.15MPa[601psi]), and then judge the equipment's air tightness, taking temperature variations into account.
Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state (vs. gaseous state).
2. Reasons
Oxygen, if used for an air tightness test, poses a risk of explosion. (Only use nitrogen to check air tightness.)
Refrigerant R410A must be charged in its liquid state. If gaseous refrigerant in the cylinder is drawn out first, the composition
of the remaining refrigerant in the cylinder will change and become unsuitable for use.
3. Notes
Procure a leak detector that is specifically designed to detect an HFC leak. A leak detector for R22 will not detect an
HFC(R410A) leak.

HWE08040

-9-

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[8] Vacuum Drying (Evacuation)

(Photo1) 15010H

(Photo2) 14010
Recommended vacuum gauge:
ROBINAIR 14010 Thermistor Vacuum Gauge

1. Vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve (Photo1)
To prevent the vacuum pump oil from flowing into the refrigerant circuit during power OFF or power failure, use a vacuum
pump with a reverse-flow check valve.
A reverse-flow check valve may also be added to the vacuum pump currently in use.
2. Standard of vacuum degree (Photo 2)
Use a vacuum pump that attains 0.5Torr(65Pa) or lower degree of vacuum after 5 minutes of operation, and connect it directly
to the vacuum gauge. Use a pump well-maintained with an appropriate lubricant. A poorly maintained vacuum pump may not
be able to attain the desired degree of vacuum.
3. Required precision of vacuum gauge
Use a vacuum gauge that registers a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa) and measures at intervals of 1Torr(130Pa). (A recommended vacuum gauge is shown in Photo2.)
Do not use a commonly used gauge manifold because it cannot register a vacuum degree of 5Torr(650Pa).
4. Evacuation time
After the degree of vacuum has reached 5Torr(650Pa), evacuate for an additional 1 hour. (A thorough vacuum drying removes moisture in the pipes.)
Verify that the vacuum degree has not risen by more than 1Torr(130Pa) 1hour after evacuation. A rise by less than
1Torr(130Pa) is acceptable.
If the vacuum is lost by more than 1Torr(130Pa), conduct evacuation, following the instructions in section 6. Special vacuum
drying.
5. Procedures for stopping vacuum pump
To prevent the reverse flow of vacuum pump oil, open the relief valve on the vacuum pump side, or draw in air by loosening
the charge hose, and then stop the operation.
The same procedures should be followed when stopping a vacuum pump with a reverse-flow check valve.
6. Special vacuum drying
When 5Torr(650Pa) or lower degree of vacuum cannot be attained after 3 hours of evacuation, it is likely that water has penetrated the system or that there is a leak.
If water infiltrates the system, break the vacuum with nitrogen. Pressurize the system with nitrogen gas to
0.5kgf/cm2G(0.05MPa) and evacuate again. Repeat this cycle of pressurizing and evacuation either until the degree of vacuum below 5Torr(650Pa) is attained or until the pressure stops rising.
Only use nitrogen gas for vacuum breaking. (The use of oxygen may result in an explosion.)

HWE08040

- 10 -

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[9] Refrigerant Charging

Cylinder without a siphon

Cylinder with a siphon

Cylinder

Cylinder

Cylinder color R410A is pink.

Refrigerant charging in the liquid state

Valve

Valve

liquid

liquid

1. Reasons
R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend (boiling point R32=-52°C[-62°F], R125=-49°C[-52°F]) and can almost be handled
the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid
phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use.
2. Notes
When using a cylinder with a siphon, refrigerant is charged in the liquid state without the need for turning it upside down. Check
the type of the cylinder on the label before use.

[10] Remedies to be taken in case of a Refrigerant Leak
If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced. (Charge refrigerant in the
liquid state.)
Refer to "IX [5] Refrigerant Leak".(page 265)

HWE08040

- 11 -

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[11] Characteristics of the Conventional and the New Refrigerants
1. Chemical property
As with R22, the new refrigerant (R410A) is low in toxicity and chemically stable nonflammable refrigerant.
However, because the specific gravity of vapor refrigerant is greater than that of air, leaked refrigerant in a closed room will
accumulate at the bottom of the room and may cause hypoxia.
If exposed to an open flame, refrigerant will generate poisonous gases. Do not perform installation or service work in a confined area.
New Refrigerant (HFC type)

Conventional Refrigerant (HCFC type)

R410A

R407C

R22

R32/R125

R32/R125/R134a

R22

Composition (wt%)

(50/50)

(23/25/52)

(100)

Type of Refrigerant

Pseudo-azeotropic
Refrigerant

Non-azeotropic
Refrigerant

Single Refrigerant

Not included

Not included

Included

A1/A1

A1/A1

A1

72.6

86.2

86.5

Boiling Point (°C/°F)

-51.4/-60.5

-43.6/-46.4

-40.8/-41.4

Steam Pressure
(25°C,MPa/77°F,psi) (gauge)

1.557/226

0.9177/133

0.94/136

64.0

42.5

44.4

Nonflammable

Nonflammable

Nonflammable

0

0

0.055

1730

1530

1700

Refrigerant charging in
the liquid state

Refrigerant charging in
the liquid state

Refrigerant charging in
the gaseous state

Available

Available

Available

Chloride
Safety Class
Molecular Weight

Saturated Steam Density
(25°C,kg/m3/77°F,psi)
Flammability
Ozone Depletion Coefficient (ODP)*1
Global Warming Coefficient (GWP)*2
Refrigerant Charging Method
Replenishment of Refrigerant after a Refrigerant
Leak
*1 When CFC11 is used as a reference
*2 When CO2 is used as a reference

2. Refrigerant composition
R410A is a pseudo-azeotropic HFC blend and can almost be handled the same way as a single refrigerant, such as R22. To
be safe, however, draw out the refrigerant from the cylinder in the liquid phase. If the refrigerant in the gaseous phase is drawn
out, the composition of the remaining refrigerant will change and become unsuitable for use.
If the refrigerant leaks out, it may be replenished. The entire refrigerant does not need to be replaced.

3. Pressure characteristics
The pressure in the system using R410A is 1.6 times as great as that in the system using R22.
Pressure (gauge)
Temperature (°C/°F)

HWE08040

R410A

R407C

R22

MPa/psi

MPa/psi

MPa/psi

-20/-4

0.30/44

0.18/26

0.14/20

0/32

0.70/102

0.47/68

0.40/58

20/68

1.34/194

0.94/136

0.81/117

40/104

2.31/335

1.44/209

1.44/209

60/140

3.73/541

2.44/354

2.33/338

65/149

4.17/605

2.75/399

2.60/377

- 12 -

GB

[ I Read Before Servicing ]

[12] Notes on Refrigerating Machine Oil
1. Refrigerating machine oil in the HFC refrigerant system
HFC type refrigerants use a refrigerating machine oil different from that used in the R22 system.
Note that the ester oil used in the system has properties that are different from commercially available ester oil.
Refrigerant

Refrigerating machine oil

R22

Mineral oil

R407C

Ester oil

R410A

Ester oil

2. Effects of contaminants*1
Refrigerating machine oil used in the HFC system must be handled with special care to keep contaminants out.
The table below shows the effect of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.
3. The effects of contaminants in the refrigerating machine oil on the refrigeration cycle.
Cause

Symptoms

Water infiltration

Frozen expansion valve
and capillary tubes

Hydrolysis

Air infiltration

Effects on the refrigerant cycle

Sludge formation and adhesion
Acid generation
Oxidization
Oil degradation

Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes
Poor cooling performance
Compressor overheat
Motor insulation failure
Burnt motor
Coppering of the orbiting scroll
Lock
Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Oxidization
Adhesion to expansion valve and capillary
tubes

Clogged expansion valve, capillary tubes, and
drier
Poor cooling performance
Compressor overheat

Infiltration of contaminants into the compressor

Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Sludge formation and adhesion

Clogged expansion valve and capillary tubes
Poor cooling performance
Compressor overheat

Oil degradation

Burn-in on the orbiting scroll

Dust, dirt
Infiltration of
contaminants
Mineral oil
etc.

*1. Contaminants is defined as moisture, air, processing oil, dust/dirt, wrong types of refrigerant, and refrigerating machine oil.
HWE08040

- 13 -

GB

- 14 -

II Restrictions
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]

System configuration ....................................................................................................... 17
Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables ........................................................... 18
Switch Settings and Address Settings ............................................................................. 19
Sample System Connection............................................................................................. 26
An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected..................... 27
An Example of a System to which an M-NET Remote Controller is connected............... 37
An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and M-NET Remote
Controller are connected.................................................................................................. 39
[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length ............................................................................................. 41

HWE08040

- 15 -

GB

- 16 -

[ II Restrictions ]
II Restrictions

[1] System configuration

1. Table of compatible indoor units
The table below summarizes the types of indoor units that are compatible with different types of outdoor units.
Outdoor
units

Composing units

Maximum total capacity
of connectable indoor
units

Maximum number
of connectable indoor units

72

-

-

-

36 - 96

15

96

-

-

-

48 - 124

20

120

-

-

-

60 - 156

26

144

72

72

-

72 - 187

31

168

96

72

-

84 - 218

36

192

120

72

-

96 - 249

41

216

120

96

-

108 - 280

46

240

120

120

-

120 - 312

50

264

120

72

72

132 - 343

288

120

96

72

144 - 374

312

120

120

72

156 - 405

336

120

120

96

168 - 436

360

120

120

120

180 - 468

Types of connectable indoor units
P06 - P96models
R410A series indoor units

1) "Maximum total capacity of connectable indoor units" refers to the sum of the numeric values in the indoor unit model names.
2) If the total capacity of the indoor units that are connected to a given outdoor unit exceeds the capacity of the outdoor unit, the
indoor units will not be able to perform at the rated capacity when they are operated simultaneously. Select a combination of
units so that the total capacity of the connected indoor units is at or below the capacity of the outdoor unit whenever possible.

HWE08040

- 17 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[2] Types and Maximum allowable Length of Cables
1. Wiring work
(1) Notes
1) Have all electrical work performed by an authorized electrician according to the local regulations and instructions in this manual.
2) Install external transmission cables at least 5cm [1-31/32"] away from the power supply cable to avoid noise interference.
(Do not put the control cable and power supply cable in the same conduit tube.)
3) Provide grounding for the outdoor unit as required.
4) Run the cable from the electric box of the indoor or outdoor unit in such way that the box is accessible for servicing.
5) Do not connect power supply wiring to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the electronic components on the terminal block.
6) Use 2-core shielded cables as transmission cables.
Use a separate 2-core control cable for each refrigerant system. Do not use a single multiple-core cable to connect indoor
units that belong to different refrigerant systems. The use of a multiple-core cable may result in signal transmission errors and
malfunctions.
Outdoor unit

Outdoor unit

Indoor unit

Indoor unit
TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

multiple-core cable

2-core shielded cable
Remote Controller

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

Remote Controller

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

TB TB
3 7

2-core shielded cable

TB3: Terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line TB7: Terminal block for centralized control

(2) Control wiring
Different types of control wiring are used for different systems.
Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System
to which both MA Remote Controller and M-NET Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work.
Types and maximum allowable length of cables
Control lines are categorized into 2 types: transmission line and remote controller line.
Use the appropriate type of cables and observe the maximum allowable length specified for a given system. If a given system
has a long transmission line or if a noise source is located near the unit, place the unit away from the noise source to reduce
noise interference.
1) M-NET transmission line
Facility
type
Type

All facility types
Shielded cable CVVS, CPEVS, MVVS

Cable type

HWE08040

Number of
cores

2-core cable

Cable size

Larger than 1.25mm2 [AWG16]

Maximum transmission
line distance between the
outdoor unit and the farthest indoor unit

200 m [656ft] max.

Maximum transmission
line distance for centralized control and Indoor/
outdoor transmission line
(Maximum line distance
via outdoor unit)

500 m [1640ft] max.
*The maximum overall line length from the power supply unit on the transmission lines for
centralized control to each outdoor unit or to the system controller is 200m [656ft] max.

- 18 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2) Remote controller wiring
MA remote controller*1

M-NET remote controller*2

Type

CVV

CVV

Number of
cores

2-core cable

2-core cable

Cable size

0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3
[AWG22 to 16]
(0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) *4
[AWG18 to 16]

0.3 to 1.25mm2 *3
[AWG22 to 16]
(0.75 to 1.25mm2 ) *4
[AWG18 to 16]

200 m [656ft] max.

The section of the cable that exceeds 10m
[32ft] must be included in the maximum indoor-outdoor transmission line distance.

Cable type

Maximum overall line
length

*1 MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and
wireless remote controller.
*2 M-NET remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller.
*3 The use of cables that are smaller than 0.75mm2 (AWG18) is recommended for easy handling.
*4 When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the cable size specifications shown in the parenthesis.

[3] Switch Settings and Address Settings
1. Switch setting
Refer to section "[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected - [7] An Example of a System
to which both MA Remote Controller and M-NET Remote Controller are connected" before performing wiring work.
Set the switches while the power is turned off.
If the switch settings are changed while the unit is being powered, those changes will not take effect, and the unit will not
function properly.
Units on which to set the switches

Symbol

Units to which the power must be shut off

IC

Outdoor units *3 and Indoor units

LOSSNAY, OA processing unit *1

LC

Outdoor units *3 and LOSSNAY

Air handling kit

IC

Outdoor units *3 or field supplied air handling
unit

CITY MULTI indoor unit

Main/sub unit

M-NET remote controller

Main/sub remote
controller

RC

Outdoor units *3

MA remote controller

Main/sub remote
controller

MA

Indoor units

OC,OS1,OS2

Outdoor units *3

CITY MULTI outdoor unit*2

*1. Applicable when LOSSNAY units are connected to the indoor-outdoor transmission line.
*2. The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of
capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large).
*3. Turn off the power to all the outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit.

HWE08040

- 19 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2. M-NET Address settings
(1) Address settings table
The need for address settings and the range of address setting depend on the configuration of the system.
Unit or controller

Setting method

Factory setting

00,
01 to 50*1

Assign the smallest address to the main indoor unit in the
group, and assign sequential address numbers to the rest
of the indoor units in the same group. *4

00

LOSSNAY, OA processing unit
Air handling kit

00,
01 to 50*1

Assign an arbitrary but unique address to each of
these units after assigning an address to all indoor
units.

00

M-NET remote
controller

Main remote
controller

101 to 150

Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units
in the same group.

101

Sub remote
controller

151 to 200*2

Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units
in the same group.

CITY MULTI indoor unit

Main/sub unit

Address setting
range

M-NET adapter
M-NET control interface
Free Plan adapter

MA remote controller

No address settings required. (The main/sub setting must be made if 2
remote controllers are connected to the system.)

CITY MULTI outdoor unit

00,
51 to 100*1,*3

Assign sequential addresses to the outdoor units in the
same refrigerant circuit. The outdoor units in the same
refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC
and OS. *5

00

System controller

201 to 250

Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest
group number of the group to be controlled and 200.

201

Group remote
controller

Main

System remote
controller

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the
range listed on the left to each unit.

ON/OFF remote controller

Assign an address that equals the sum of the smallest
group number of the group to be controlled and 200.

Schedule timer
(compatible
with M-NET)

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the
range listed on the left to each unit.

202

Central controller
G(B)-50A

000,
201 to 250

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the
range listed on the left to each unit. The address must
be set to "000" to control the K-control unit.

000

LM adapter

201 to 250

Assign an arbitrary but unique address within the
range listed on the left to each unit.

247

*1. Address setting is not required for a City Multi system that consists of a single refrigerant circuit (with some exceptions).
*2. To set the M-NET remote controller address to "200", set the rotary switches to "00".
*3. To set the outdoor unit address to "100," set the rotary switches to "50."
*4. Some indoor units have 2 or 3 controller boards that require address settings.
No. 2 controller board address must be equal to the sum of the No. 1 controller board address and 1, and the No.3
controller board address must equal to the No. 1 controller address and 2.
*5. The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of
capacity from large to small (if two or more units have the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large).

HWE08040

- 20 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(2) Power supply switch connector connection on the outdoor unit
(Factory setting: The male power supply switch connector is connected to CN41.)
System configu- Connection to
Power supply unit
ration
the system con- for transmission
troller
lines
System with
one outdoor unit
System with
multiple outdoor
units

_

Group operation
of units in a system with multiple
outdoor units

_

Not connected

_

_

Power supply switch connector connection

Leave CN41 as it is
(Factory setting)

Not grouped
Grouped

With connection
to the indoor
unit system

Not required

Grouped/not
grouped

With connection
to the centralized control
system

Not required*1
(Powered from the
outdoor unit)

Grouped/not
grouped

Required *1

Grouped/not
grouped

Disconnect the male connector from the female power supply switch connector (CN41)
and connect it to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) on only one of the
outdoor units.*2
*Connect the S (shielded) terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose
CN41 was replaced with CN40 to the
ground terminal ( ) on the electric box.
Leave CN41 as it is
(Factory setting)

*1 The need for a power supply unit for transmission lines depends on the system configuration.
*2 The replacement of the power jumper connector from CN41 to CN40 must be performed on only one outdoor unit in the
system.
(3) Settings for the centralized control switch for the outdoor unit (Factory setting: SW2-1 are set to OFF.)
Centralized control switch settings *1

System configuration
Connection to the system controller
Connection to the system controller

Not connected
Connected *

Leave it to OFF. (Factory setting)

2

ON

*1 Set SW2-1 on all outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit to the same setting.
*2 When only the LM adapter is connected, leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
(4) Selecting the position of temperature detection for the indoor unit (Factory setting: SW1-1 set to "OFF".)
To stop the fan during heating Thermo-OFF (SW1-7 and 1-8 on the indoor units to be set to ON), use the built-in thermistor
on the remote controller or an optional thermistor.
1) To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 to ON.
Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor.
Use the built-in temperature sensor on the indoor unit instead.
When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected.
(Note) Factory setting for SW1-1 on the indoor unit of the All-Fresh Models is ON.
2) When an optional temperature sensor is used, set SW1-1 to OFF, and set SW3-8 to ON.
When using an optional temperature sensor, install it where room temperature can be detected.
(5) Various start-stop controls (Indoor unit settings)
Each indoor unit (or group of indoor units) can be controlled individually by setting SW 1-9 and 1-10.
Function

Operation of the indoor unit when the operation is resumed after the unit was
stopped

Setting (SW1)*4 *5
9

10

Power ON/OFF by
the plug*1,*2,*3

Indoor unit will go into operation regardless of its operation status before power
off (power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

OFF

ON

Automatic restoration
after power failure

Indoor unit will go into operation if it was in operation when the power was
turned off (or cut off due to power failure). (In approx. 5 minutes)

ON

OFF

Indoor unit will remain stopped regardless of its operation status before power
off (power failure).

OFF

ON

*1. Do not cut off power to the outdoor unit. Cutting off the power supply to the outdoor unit will cut off the power supply to the
crankcase heater and may cause the compressor to malfunction when the unit is put back into operation.
*2. Not applicable to units with a built-in drain pump or humidifier.
*3. Models with a built-in drain pump cannot be turned on/off by the plug individually. All the units in the same refrigerant circuits will be turned on or off by the plug.
*4. Requires that the dipswitch settings for all the units in the group be made.
*5. To control the external input to and output from the air conditioners with the PLC software for general equipment via the
G(B)-50A, set SW1-9 and SW1-10 to ON. With these settings made, the power start-stop function becomes disabled. To
use the auto recovery function after power failure while these settings are made, set SW1-5 to ON.
HWE08040

- 21 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(6) Miscellaneous settings
Cooling-only setting for the indoor unit: Cooling only model (Factory setting: SW3-1 "OFF.")
When using indoor unit as a cooling-only unit, set SW3-1 to ON.
(7) Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the outdoor unit (various connection options)
Type

Usage

Terminal
to be
used*1

Function

CN3D*2

Input Prohibiting cooling/heating operation (thermo OFF) by an external DEMAND (level)
input to the outdoor unit.
*It can be used as the DEMAND control device for each system.
Performs a low level noise operation of the outdoor unit by an external input to the outdoor unit.
* It can be used as the silent operation device for each refrigerant
system.

Output

Low-noise mode
(level) *3*4

Forces the outdoor unit to perform a fan operation by receiving sig- Snow sensor signal
nals from the snow sensor.*5
input (level)

CN3S

Cooling/heating operation can be changed by an external input to
the outdoor unit.

Auto-changeover

CN3N

How to extract signals from the outdoor unit
*It can be used as an operation status display device.
*It can be used for an interlock operation with external devices.

Operation status of
the compressor*5

CN51

Error status*6

Option

Adapter for
external input
(PACSC36NA-E)

Adapter for
external output
(PACSC37SA-E)

*1. For detailed drawing, refer to "Example of wiring connection".
*2. For details, refer to (1) through (4) shown below.
*3. Low-noise mode is valid when Dip SW4-4 on the outdoor unit is set to OFF. When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, 4 levels of
on-DEMAND are possible, using different configurations of low-noise mode input and DEMAND input settings.When 2
or more outdoor units exist in one refrigerant circuit system, 8 levels of on-DEMAND are possible. When 3 outdoor units
exist in one refrigerant circuitsystem, 12 levels of on-DEMAND are possible.
*4. By setting Dip SW5-5, the Low-noise mode can be switched between the Capacity priority mode and the Low-noise priority mode.
When SW5-5 is set to ON: The Low-noise mode always remains effective.
When SW5-5 is set to OFF: The Low-noise mode is cancelled when certain outside temperature or pressure criteria are
met, and the unit goes into normal operation (capacity priority mode).
Low-noise mode is effective
Cooling
TH7 < 30°C [86°F]
and
63HS1 < 32kg/cm2

Capacity priority mode becomes effective

Heating

Cooling

TH7 > 3°C [37°F]
and
63LS > 4.6kg/cm2

TH7 > 35°C [95°F]
or
63HS1 > 35kg/cm2

Heating
TH7 < 0°C [32°F]
or
63LS < 3.9kg/cm2

*5. Each outdoor unit in the system with multiple outdoor units requires the signal input/output setting to be made.
*6. Take out signals from the outdoor unit (OC) if multiple outdoor units exist in a single system.

CAUTION
1) Wiring should be covered by insulation tube with supplementary insulation.
2) Use relays or switches with IEC or equivalent standard.
3) The electric strength between accessible parts and control circuit should have 2750V or more.

HWE08040

- 22 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Example of wiring connection
(1) CN51

(2) CN3S

Lamp power source

Distant control
board
L1

Relay circuit
Relay circuit
X
Y

Y

X

L2

Adapter 1

Outdoor unit
control board

Adapter 2
1
2

X

CN51

5
4
3

Outdoor unit
control board
CN3S

3
Preparations
in the field

Preparations
in the field

Maximum cable
length is 10m
X : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V
Contact rating current >= 0.1A
Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC

Maximum cable
length is 10m

L1 : Outdoor unit error display lamp
L2 : Compressor operation lamp (compressor running state)
X, Y : Relay (coil =<0.9W : DC12V)
1. Optional part : PAC-SC37SA-E or field supply.

Snow sensor : The outdoor fan runs when X is closed
in stop mode or thermostat mode.
2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

(3) CN3N
Relay circuit

Adapter 2

X

Outdoor unit
control board

Y

X
OFF

CN3N

1
2

Y

3

Preparations
in the field

Relay circuit

Adapter 2

X

1
2

Y

3

Normal

ON

Cooling Heating

X : Cooling / Heating
Y : Validity / Invalidity of X
X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V
Contact rating current >= 0.1A
Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC
2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

Maximum cable
length is 10m

(4) CN3D

ON

OFF

Outdoor unit
control board

Relay circuit

CN3D
X

HWE08040

1
2

CN3D

3

Preparations
in the field
Maximum cable
length is 10m
X : Low-noise mode
Y : Compressor ON/OFF
X,Y : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V
Contact rating current >= 0.1A
Minimum appicable load =< 1mA at DC
2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.

Outdoor unit
Adapter 2 control board

Preparations
in the field
Maximum cable
length is 10m
X : Low-noise mode
X : Relay Contact rating voltage >= DC15V
Contact rating current >= 0.1A
Minimum applicable load =< 1mA at DC
2. Optional part : PAC-SC36NA-E or field supply.
Low-noise mode : The noise level is reduced by controlling the maximum
fan frequency and maximum compressor frequency.

- 23 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
1) SW4-4: OFF (Compressor ON/OFF, Low-noise mode)
CN3D 1-3P

Compressor ON/OFF *1

Open

Compressor ON

Short-circuit

Compressor OFF

CN3D 1-2P

Low-noise mode*2

Open

OFF

Short-circuit

ON

*1. When SW4-4 on the outdoor unit in one refrigerant circuit system is set to ON , this function cannot be used.
*2. This function and the 4 levels or 8 levels on-DEMAND function can be used together. Input the order to CN3D 1-2P on
the outdoor unit whose SW4-4 is set to OFF.
2) When SW4-4 on one outdoor unit in one refrigerant circuit system is set to ON (4 levels of on-DEMAND) (*3)
CN3D 1-2P
CN3D 1-3P

Open

Short-circuit

Open

100% (No DEMAND)

75%

Short-circuit

0% (Compressor OFF)

50%

*3. Input the order to CN3D on the outdoor unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON.
Note the following steps to be taken when using the STEP DEMAND
(Example) When switching from 100% to 50%
Demand control
steps

(Wrong) 100%

0%

50%

(Correct) 100%

75%

50%

If the step listed as the wrong example above is taken, thermo may go off.
The percentage of the demand listed in the table above is an approximate value based on the
compressor volume and does not necessarily correspond with the capacity.
When this function is enabled, the night mode cannot be enabled.

3) When SW4-4 on the two outdoor units in one refrigerant circuit system is set to ON (8 levels of on-DEMAND) (*4, *5)
8 levels of on-DEMAND

No.2 CN3D
1-2P

No.1 CN3D

Open

1-2P

1-3P

Open

Open

100%

50%

88%

75%

Short-circuit

50%

0%

38%

25%

Open

88%

38%

75%

63%

Short-circuit

75%

25%

63%

50%

Short-circuit

Open

Short-circuit

Short-circuit

Open

Short-circuit

*4. Input the order to CN3D on the outdoor unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON.
*5. CN3D of No. 1, 2, 3 can be selected arbitrary with the outdoor unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON.

HWE08040

- 24 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
4) When SW4-4 on the all outdoor units in one refrigerant circuit system is set to ON (12 levels of on-DEMAND) (*4)
12 levels
of on-DEMAND

No.1
CN3D

No.2 CN3D

No.3 CN3D

1-2P

1-2P

1-3P

Short-circuit

No.1
CN3D

Open

1-3P

Open

12 levels
of on-DEMAND

1-2P

No.2 CN3D

Open
Open
Open

Open

Shortcircuit

Open
Open

Short-circuit

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open

100%

67%

92%

84%

67%

34%

59%

50%

Shortcircuit

67%

34%

59%

50%

34%

0%

25%

17%

Open

92%

59%

84%

75%

59%

25%

50%

42%

Shortcircuit

84%

50%

75%

67%

50%

17%

42%

34%

1-2P

No.3 CN3D

1-2P

1-2P

1-3P

Short-circuit

Short-circuit

Shortcircuit

Short-circuit

1-3P

Open

Short-circuit

Open
Open
Open

Short-circuit
Short-circuit

Shortcircuit

Open

Shortcircuit

Open
Open

Shortcircuit

Short-circuit
Open

Shortcircuit

Open

92%

59%

84%

75%

84%

50%

75%

67%

Shortcircuit

59%

25%

50%

42%

50%

17%

42%

34%

Open

84%

50%

75%

67%

75%

42%

67%

59%

Shortcircuit

75%

42%

67%

59%

67%

34%

59%

50%

*3. Input the order to CN3D on the outdoor unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON.
*4. CN3D of No. 1, 2, 3 can be selected arbitrary with the outdoor unit whose SW4-4 is set to ON.

HWE08040

- 25 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[4] Sample System Connection
Examples of typical system connection are shown on pages [5] to [7].
Refer to the Installation Manual that came with each device or controller for details.
(1) An example of a system to which an MA remote controller is connected
System
configuration

Connection to the system controller

Address start up for indoor and outdoor units

1.

System with one outdoor unit

NO

Automatic
address setup

2.

System with one outdoor unit

NO

Manual
address setup

3.

Grouping of units in a
system with multiple
outdoor units

NO

Manual
address setup

4.

System with one out- With connection to transmission line
door unit
for centralized control

Manual
address setup

5.

System with one outdoor unit

Manual
address setup

With connection to indoor-outdoor
transmission line

Notes

Connection of
multiple LOSSNAY units

(2) An example of a system to which an M-NET remote controller is connected
System
configuration
1.

Connection to the system controller

System with one out- With connection to transmission line
door unit
for centralized control

Address start up for indoor
and outdoor units

Notes

Manual
address setup

(3) An example of a system to which both MA remote controller and M-NET remote controller are connected

1.

HWE08040

System
configuration

Connection to the system controller

Address start up for indoor and outdoor units

System with one outdoor unit

With connection to transmission
line for centralized control

Manual
address setup

- 26 -

Notes

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[5] An Example of a System to which an MA Remote Controller is connected
1. System with one outdoor unit (automatic address setup for both indoor and outdoor units)
(1) Sample control wiring
Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L1
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS2

L3

L2

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS1

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Group

L4
Group

OC

IC

00
00
TB7
M1 M2 S

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

00

00

00
TB3
M1 M2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

m1

TB3
M1 M2

00

LC

IC

A

B

A

A

RC

B

MA

L11

MA

B

L12
Group

L13
Group

IC

IC

00

00
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

00
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

m5

m4

m2

TB5
M1M2 S

IC

A

B

MA

A

B

MA

(2) Cautions
1) M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.
4) Automatic address setup is not available if start-stop input (CN32, CN51, CN41) is used for a group operation of
indoor units. Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for
both indoor and outdoor units".(page 29)
5) To connect more than 2 LOSSNAY units to indoor units
in the same system, refer to the next section "[5] 2. An
example of a system with one outdoor unit to which 2 or
more LOSSNAY units are connected".(page 29)

HWE08040

A

B

MA

A

B

MA

m3

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L1 +L2+L3+L4 200m[656ft]
L1 +L2+L11+L12+L13 200m[656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Maximum overall line length
(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])
m1 200m [656ft]
m2+m3 200m [656ft]
m4+m5 200m [656ft]

- 27 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
MA remote controller function selection or the installation
manual for the MA remote controller for the setting method.)
Group operation of indoor units
To perform a group operation of indoor units (IC), daisychain terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on
all indoor units (IC) in the same group, and then connect
terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block (TB15) on the indoor unit on one end to the terminal block on the MA remote controller. (Non-polarized two-wire)
When performing a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions, "Automatic indoor/outdoor address setup" is not available.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Interlock operation setting with all the indoor units in the
same system will automatically be made. (It is required
that the Lossnay unit be turned on before the outdoor
unit.)
Refer to "[5] 2. Manual address setup for both indoor and
outdoor units" in the following cases: performing an interlock operation of part of the indoor units in the system
with a LOSSNAY unit, using LOSSNAY alone without interlocking it with any units, performing an interlock operation of more than 16 indoor units with a LOSSNAY unit,
or connecting two or more LOSSNAY units to indoor
units in the same system.
5) Switch setting
No address settings required.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB3) on the outdoor
units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), and terminals M1 and M2
on the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line
(TB5) on each indoor unit (IC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Only use shielded cables.
The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the outdoor
units (OC, OS1, OS2), and the S terminal on the terminal
block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) with the shield wire of
the shielded cable.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Connect terminals 1 and 2 on the terminal block for MA
remote controller line (TB15) on the indoor unit (IC) to the
terminal block on the MA remote controller (MA). (Nonpolarized two-wire)
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system,
connect terminals 1 and 2 of the terminal block (TB15) on
the indoor unit (IC) to the terminal block on the two MA
remote controllers.
Set one of the MA remote controllers to sub. (Refer to
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor unit

Main unit

IC

Sub unit

IC

Setting
method

No settings required.

-

Notes
To perform a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions,
refer to [5] 2.(page 29)

Factory
setting
00

2

LOSSNAY

LC

No settings required.

-

00

3

MA
Main
remote con- remote controller
troller

MA

No settings required.

-

Main

Sub
remote controller

MA

Sub
remote controller

OC
OS1
OS2

No settings required.

4

Outdoor unit (Note)

Settings to
be made according to
the remote
controller
function selection
-

00

The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE08040

- 28 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
2. An example of a system with one outdoor unit to which 2 or more LOSSNAY units are connected
(manual address setup for both indoor and outdoor units)
(1) Sample control wiring
Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS2

TB7
M1 M2 S

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS1

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

Group

51
TB3
M1 M2

IC

IC

LC

01

02

05

TB5
M1M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

L4
Group

OC

52

53
TB3
M1 M2

L3

L2

L1
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

TB15
1 2

A

TB5
M1M2 S

B

A

B

MA

L11

MA

TB5
M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

L12

L13

Group

IC

03
TB5
M1M2 S

LC

IC

04
TB15
1 2

A

TB5
M1M2 S

06
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1M2 S

B

MA

(2) Cautions
1) M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.

HWE08040

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.

- 29 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized two-wire)
Interlock setting between the indoor units and LOSSNAY units must be entered on the remote controller. (Refer to "IV [3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote
Controller" or the installation manual for the MA remote
controller for the setting method.)
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
No connection is required.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor unit

Main
unit

IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

2

LOSSNAY

3

MA
remote controller

4

Outdoor unit

Factory
setting

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in the
group.

To perform a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions,
designate the indoor unit
in the group with the greatest number of functions as
the main unit.

00

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

Assign sequential numbers
starting with the address of
the main unit in the same
group +1. (Main unit address +1, main unit address +2, main unit
address +3, etc.)
LC

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning
an address to all indoor
units.

Main
remote
controller

MA

No
settings required.

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote
controller

Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

Assign sequential address To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to
to the outdoor units in the
50.
same refrigerant circuit.
The outdoor units are automatically designated as
OC, OS1, and OS2.(Note)

-

Main

00

The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE08040

- 30 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
3. Group operation of units in a system with multiple outdoor units
(1) Sample control wiring

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS2

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

L11

CN41

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

CN40 Replace

SW2-1 OFF

OS1

Group

Group

Group

OC

IC

IC

IC

LC

01

03

06

07

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB5

TB15
1 2

M1M2S

TB5

M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5

M1M2S

TB5

TB15
1 2

M1M2 S

m2

53
TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

Connect

A

B

A

A

MA

B

MA

L31

m3

MA

B

L22

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS2

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF

OS1

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

Group

OC

IC

IC

IC

02

04

05

TB5

M1M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5

M1M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5

M1M2S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

Not
connect

A

B

MA

(2) Cautions
1) M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different outdoor units with
each other.
4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)
must be performed only on one of the outdoor units.
5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for
transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only
one of the outdoor units.
6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.

HWE08040

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L11+L12 200m [656ft]
L21+L22 200m [656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Maximum line distance via outdoor unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L12+L31+L22 500m [1640ft]
L11+L31+L21 500m [1640ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.

- 31 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the outdoor units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield wire of
the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( )
and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with
CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 2.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 2.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the
outdoor units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on
the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on
only one of the outdoor units.
The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.

Sub unit

2

LOSSNAY

3

MA
remote
controller

4

Setting method

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)
LC

01 to 50

Main
remote
controller

MA

No
settings required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote controller

Settings to be made according to the remote controller function selection

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

Assign sequential address
to the outdoor units in the
same refrigerant circuit.
The outdoor units are automatically designated as
OC, OS1, and OS2.
(Note)

Outdoor unit

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning
an address to all indoor
units.

Notes

Factory
setting

To perform a group
operation of indoor
units that have different functions, designate the indoor unit in
the group with the
greatest number of
functions as the main
unit.

00

None of these addresses may overlap
any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

Main

To set the address to
100, set the rotary
switches to 50.

00

The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE08040

- 32 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
4. A system in which a system controller is connected to the transmission line for centralized control and which is powered from an outdoor unit
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

CN41

CN40 Replace

SW2-1 OFF

OS2

OS1

OC

53

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

ON

Group

Group
IC

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

02
TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

Not
connect

Connect

07
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

A B

A B

MA

MA

MA

Group

OC

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

Group
IC

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

m2

L31

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS1

Not
connect

TB5
M1 M2 S

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

03
TB15
1 2

A B

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

LC

IC

m1

TB7
M1 M2 S

IC

01
TB5
M1 M2 S

Group

Not
connect
Not
connect

A B

A B

MA

MA

L32

m3

Note1

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,
leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
Note2 LM adapters require the power supply
capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

System controller
A B S

(2) Cautions
1) M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different outdoor units with
each other.
4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)
must be performed only on one of the outdoor units.
5) Short-circuit the shield terminal (S terminal) and the
earth terminal ( ) on the terminal block for transmission
line for centralized control (TB7) on the outdoor unit
whose power jumper connector is mated with CN40.
6) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 32 indoor units (26 units if one or more indoor
units of the 72 model or above is connected) are connected.
7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper
connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

HWE08040

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Maximum line distance via outdoor unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L32+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]
L32+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]
L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m[1640ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.

- 33 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the outdoor units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield wire of
the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( )
and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with
CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor unit (IC) to the appropriate terminals
on the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line
(TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized 2-core cable)
Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit
using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the
ON/OFF remote controller alone or the LM adapter alone
is connected.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 1.
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals A and B on the system controller,
terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the outdoor
units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on the outdoor units (OC, OS1, and OS2) in the same refrigerant
circuit.
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on
only one of the outdoor units.
If a system controller is connected, set the central control
switch (SW2-1) on the control board of all outdoor units
to "ON."
The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
Only use shielded cables.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor unit

Main unit IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

Setting method

00

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

Enter the same indoor
unit group settings on the
system controller as the
ones that were entered
on the MA remote controller.

Main

To set the address to
100, set the rotary switches to 50.

00

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to 50

3

MA
Main
remote con- remote
troller
controller

MA

No
settings required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote controller

Settings to be made according to the remote
controller function selection

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the outdoor units
in the same refrigerant
circuit.
The outdoor units are automatically designated as
OC, OS1, and
OS2.(Note)

Outdoor unit

Factory
setting

To perform a group operation of indoor units that
have different functions,
designate the indoor unit
in the group with the
greatest number of functions as the main unit.

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.

2

4

Notes

The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.
HWE08040

- 34 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
5. An example of a system in which a system controller is connected to the indoor-outdoor transmission line (except
LM adapter)
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

SW2-1 OFF

CN41

CN40 Replace

SW2-1 OFF

Group

OS1

Group

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

IC

IC

IC

LC

01

02

03

07

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

Not
connect

Connect

L31

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

A B

A B

MA

MA

MA

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF

SW2-1 OFF

SW2-1 OFF

ON

TB15
1 2

A B

L21
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

OS2

Group

OC

53

TB7
M1 M2 S

ON

ON

m1

OS2

ON

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12

ON

OS1

OC

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

Group

Group
IC

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

L25

56

ON

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

TB7
M1 M2 S

m2

TB7
M1 M2 S

Not
connect

A B

A B

Not
connect

MA

MA
m3

Note1
System controller

Note1 LM adapters cannot be connected to the
indoor-outdoor transmission line.

A B S

(2) Cautions
1) M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different outdoor units with
each other.
4) Replacement of male power jumper connector (CN41)
must be performed only on one of the outdoor units.
5) Provide grounding to S terminal on the terminal block for
transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on only
one of the outdoor units.
6) A maximum of 3 system controllers can be connected to
the indoor-outdoor transmission line, with the exception
that only one G(B)-50A may be connected.
7) When the total number of indoor units exceeds 26, it may
not be possible to connect a system controller on the indoor-outdoor transmission line.
8) In a system to which more than 18 indoor units including
one or more indoor units of 72 model or above are connected, there may be cases in which the system controller cannot be connected to the indoor-outdoor
transmission line.

HWE08040

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Maximum distance (1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L11+L12 200m [656ft]
L21+L22 200m [656ft]
L25 200m [656ft]
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Maximum line distance via outdoor unit
(1.25mm2 [AWG16] or larger)
L25+L31+L12(L11) 500m [1640ft]
L12(L11)+L31+L22(L21) 500m [1640ft]
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.

- 35 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Set the central control switch (SW2-1) on the control
board of all outdoor units to "ON."
Only use shielded cables.
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on
the outdoor units (OC, OS1, OS2) with the shield wire of
the shielded cable. Short-circuit the earth terminal ( )
and the S terminal on the terminal block (TB7) on the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector is mated with
CN40.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Connect terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
(TB5) on the indoor units (IC) to the appropriate terminals on the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB5) on LOSSNAY (LC). (Non-polarized twowire)
Indoor units must be interlocked with the LOSSNAY unit
using the system controller. (Refer to the operation manual for the system controller for the setting method.) Interlock setting from the remote controller is required if the
ON/OFF remote controller alone is connected.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for indoor-outdoor transmission line (TB3) on the outdoor
units (OC, OS1, OS2) (Note 1), terminals M1 and M2 on
the terminal block for indoor-outdoor transmission line
(TB5) on each indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal on the
system controller. (Non-polarized two-wire)
Only use shielded cables.
The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units
have the same capacity, in the order of address from
small to large).
Shielded cable connection
Daisy-chain the ground terminal ( ) on the outdoor
units (OC, OS1, OS2), the S terminal on the terminal
block (TB5) on the indoor unit (IC), and the S terminal on
the system controller with the shield wire of the shielded
cable.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Daisy-chain terminals M1 and M2 on the terminal block
for transmission line for centralized control (TB7) on the
outdoor units (OC) in different refrigerant circuits and on
the OC, OS1, and OS2 in the same refrigerant circuit.
If a power supply unit is not connected to the transmission line for centralized control, replace the power jumper connector on the control board from CN41 to CN40 on
only one of the outdoor units.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Unit or controller
Indoor
unit

Main unit

IC

Address setting range
01 to 50

Sub unit

LOSSNAY

3

MA
Main
MA
remote remote
control- controller
ler
MA
Sub
remote
controller

4

Outdoor unit

Notes

Assign the smallest address
to the main unit in the group.

To perform a group operation of indoor units that have
different functions, designate the indoor unit in the
group with the greatest
number of functions as the
main unit.

00

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

Assign sequential numbers
starting with the address of
the main unit in the same
group +1. (Main unit address
+1, main unit address +2,
main unit address +3, etc.)

2

LC

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning an
address to all indoor units.

No
settings required.

-

Sub
remote controller

Settings to be made according to the remote controller
function selection

OC 51 to 100
OS1
OS2

Factory
setting

Setting method

Assign sequential address to
the outdoor units in the same
refrigerant circuit.
The outdoor units are automatically designated as OC,
OS1, and OS2. (Note)

Enter the same indoor unit
group settings on the system controller as the ones
that were entered on the MA
remote controller.

Main

To set the address to 100,
set the rotary switches to 50.

00

The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE08040

- 36 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[6] An Example of a System to which an M-NET Remote Controller is connected
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

CN41

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

Interlock operation with
the ventilation unit

L12
CN40 Replace

SW2-1 OFF

OS1

ON

Group

Group
IC

53

52

51

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S

Not
connect

01
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

07
TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

A B

A B

A B

101

102

103

RC

RC

RC

Group

OC

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

IC

IC

LC

04

05

06

08

TB5
M1 M2S

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

m2

TB7
M1 M2 S

Group
IC

Not
connect

m3

L31

TB15
1 2

LC

L22
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS1

Not
connect

03

TB5
M1 M2 S

L21

TB7
M1 M2 S

IC

02

Not
connect

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

IC

m1

TB5
M1 M2 S

Connect

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.
SW2-1 OFF ON

Group

OC

Not
connect

A B

A B

154

104

106

RC

RC

RC

L32

A B

Note1
System controller

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,
leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
Note2 LM adapters require the power supply
capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

A B S

(2) Cautions
1) M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
2) No more than 3 M-NET remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units.
3) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different outdoor units with
each other.
4) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board
from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units.
5) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on
the terminal block for centralized control on only one of
the outdoor units.
6) A transmission booster must be connected to a system
in which the total number of connected indoor units exceeds 20.
7) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units
of the 72 model or above are connected.
8) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper
connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

HWE08040

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
3) M-NET remote controller wiring
Maximum overall line length
(0.3 to 1.25mm2 [AWG22 to 16])
m1 10m [32ft]
m2+m3 10m [32ft]
If the standard-supplied cable must be extended, use a
cable with a diameter of 1.25mm2 [AWG16]. The section
of the cable that exceeds 10m [32ft] must be included in
the maximum indoor-outdoor transmission line distance
described in (1).
When connected to the terminal block on the Simple remote controller, use cables that meet the following cable
size specifications: 0.75 - 1.25 mm2 [AWG18-14].

- 37 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Refer to the section on Switch Setting.
Performing a group operation (including the group
operation of units in different refrigerant circuits).
Refer to the section on Switch Setting.
4) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 4.
5) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 4.
3) M-NET remote controller wiring
M-NET remote controller is connectable anywhere on
the indoor-outdoor transmission line.
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Address setting
range

Unit or controller
Indoor
unit

Main unit

Setting method

Notes

Factory
setting

IC

01 to 50

To perform a group
operation of indoor
units that have different functions, desigAssign sequential num- nate the indoor unit in
bers starting with the ad- the group with the
dress of the main unit in greatest number of
the same group +1.
functions as the main
(Main unit address +1,
unit.
main unit address +2,
main unit address +3,
etc.)

00

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.

Sub unit

2

LOSSNAY

LC

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each
of these units after assigning an address to all
indoor units.

None of these addresses may overlap
any of the indoor unit
addresses.

00

3

Main
M-NET
remote
remote
controller controller

RC

101 to 150

Add 100 to the main unit
address in the group

101

Sub
remote
controller

RC

151 to 200

Add 150 to the main unit
address in the group

It is not necessary to
set the 100s digit.
To set the address
to 200, set the rotary switches to 00.

OC
OS1
OS2

51 to 100

Assign sequential address to the outdoor
units in the same refrigerant circuit. The outdoor units are
automatically designated as OC, OS1, and
OS2. (Note)

To set the address to
100, set the rotary
switches to 50.

00

4

Outdoor unit

The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.

HWE08040

- 38 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[7] An Example of a System to which both MA Remote Controller and M-NET Remote Controller are connected
(1) Sample control wiring
L11
Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

L12
CN41

CN40 Replace

SW2-1 OFF ON

Group

Group

OS1

OC

IC

IC

IC

53

52

51

01

02

06

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB5
TB15
M1 M2 S 1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect
Connect

A

B

A

B

106
MA

L31

L21

L22

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

Leave the male
connector on
CN41 as it is.

SW2-1 OFF ON

SW2-1 OFF ON

SW2-1 OFF ON

OS2

OS1

OC

56

55

54

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

RC

Group

Group

IC

IC

IC

03

04

05

TB5
TB15
M1 M2 S 1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB5
M1 M2 S

TB15
1 2

TB7
M1 M2 S
Not
connect

A

Not
connect

B

A

B

104
RC

L32

MA

Note1 When only the LM adapter is connected,
leave SW2-1 to OFF (as it is).
Note1

Note2 LM adapters require the power supply
capacity of single-phase AC 208/230V.

System controller
A B S

(2) Cautions
1) Be sure to connect a system controller.
2) M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
3) Assign to the indoor units connected to the MA remote
controller addresses that are smaller than those of the indoor units that are connected to the M-NET remote controller.
4) No more than 2 M-NET remote controllers can be connected to a group of indoor units.
5) No more than 2 MA remote controllers can be connected
to a group of indoor units.
6) Do not connect the terminal blocks (TB5) on the indoor
units that are connected to different outdoor units with
each other.
7) Replace the power jumper connector of the control board
from CN41 to CN40 on only one of the outdoor units.
8) Provide an electrical path to ground for the S terminal on
the terminal block for centralized control on only one of
the outdoor units.
9) A transmission booster must be connected to a system
in which the total number of connected indoor units exceeds 20.
10) A transmission booster is required in a system to which
more than 16 indoor including one or more indoor units
of the 72 model or above are connected.
11) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, leave the power jumper
connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).
HWE08040

(3) Maximum allowable length
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
4) M-NET remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.

- 39 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
4) M-NET remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
Same as [5] 1.
Group operation of indoor units
Same as [5] 1.
5) LOSSNAY connection
Same as [5] 4.
6) Switch setting
Address setting is required as follows.

(4) Wiring method
1) Indoor/outdoor transmission line
Same as [5] 3.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 1.
2) Transmission line for centralized control
Same as [5] 4.
Shielded cable connection
Same as [5] 4.
3) MA remote controller wiring
Same as [5] 1.
When 2 remote controllers are connected to the system
(5) Address setting method
Procedures
1

Opera- Indoor
tion
with the unit
MA remote
controller

MA
remote
controller

2

Address
setting
range

Unit or controller

Opera- Indoor
tion
with the unit
M-NET
remote
controller

MNET
remote
controller

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Sub unit

Setting method

Notes

Assign the smallest address
to the main unit in the group.

Assign an address smaller
than that of the indoor unit that
is connected to the M-NET remote controller.
Enter the same indoor unit
group settings on the system
controller as the ones that
were entered on the MA remote controller.
To perform a group operation
of indoor units that have different functions, designate the
indoor unit in the group with
the greatest number of functions as the main unit.

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

Main reMA
mote controller

No
settings
required.

-

Sub
remote
controller

MA

Sub
remote
controller

Settings to be made according to the remote
controller function selection

Main unit

IC

01 to 50

Assign the smallest address to the main unit in
the group.

Sub unit

Assign sequential numbers starting with the address of the main unit in
the same group +1. (Main
unit address +1, main unit
address +2, main unit address +3, etc.)

Main reRC
mote controller

101 to
150

Add 100 to the main unit
address in the group.

RC

151 to
200

Add 150 to the main unit
address in the group.

01 to 50

Assign an arbitrary but
unique address to each of
these units after assigning an address to all indoor units.

Sub
remote
controller

Factory
setting
00

Main

Enter the indoor unit group settings on the system controller
(MELANS).
Assign an address larger than
those of the indoor units that
are connected to the MA remote controller.
To perform a group operation
of indoor units that have different functions, designate the
indoor unit in the group with
the greatest number of functions as the main unit.

00

It is not necessary to set
the 100s digit.
To set the address to 200,
set the rotary switches to
00.

101

3

LOSSNAY

LC

4

Outdoor unit

To set the address to 100,
OC 51 to 100 Assign sequential address to the outdoor units set the rotary switches to 50.
OS1
in the same refrigerantcirOS2

None of these addresses
may overlap any of the indoor unit addresses.

00

00

cuit. The outdoor units
are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and
OS2.(Note)

The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit are automatically designated as OC, OS1, and OS2.
HWE08040

- 40 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]

[8] Restrictions on Pipe Length
(1) End branching
P72 - P120 models

Outdoor unit

D

First branch
(Branch joint)

Branch header

L
B

cap

d

e

f

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

4

5

C

Branch joint
a

6

c

b

h

H (Outdoor unit above indoor unit)
H' (Outdoor unit below indoor unit)

A

1

Indoor

2

Indoor

3

Indoor

Unit: m [ft]

Operation
Length

Height
difference

Pipe sections

Total pipe length

A+B+C+D
+a+b+c+d+e+f

1000 [3280] or less

Total pipe length (L) from the outdoor unit to the
farthest indoor unit

A+B+C+c or
A+D+f

165 [541] or less
(Equivalent length 190
[623] or less)

Total pipe length from the first branch to the farthest indoor unit ( )

B+C+c or
D+f

40 [131] or less

Outdoor unit above indoor unit

H

50 [164] or less

Outdoor unit below indoor unit

H'

40 [131] or less

h

15 [49] or less

Between indoor and
outdoor units

Between indoor units

HWE08040

Allowable length of
pipes

- 41 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
P144 - P360 models
The figure shows a system with three outdoor units. (P264-P360 models)
Provide a trap on the pipe (gas pipe only) within 2 m from the
joint pipe if the total length of the pipe that connects the joint
pipe and the outdoor unit exceeds 2 m.

h2

Note1 Install the pipe that connects the branch pipe and the outdoor units in
the way that it has a downward inclination toward the branch pipe.

To indoor unit

Downward inclination

To indoor unit
Joint pipe

2m [6ft]

A

B

Trap
(gas pipe
only)

D
C

To indoor unit
2m [6ft] Max.

Upward inclination
Second gas refrigerant distributor
Second liquid refrigerant distributor
First liquid refrigerant distributor
First gas refrigerant distributor

L

(Note)
E

F

G
b

c

d

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

1

2

3

4

J

h1

I

a

First branch

H

To indoor unit
Joint pipe

K

M

e

f

g

i

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

Indoor

5

6

7

8

E

To downstream units

Note : "Total sum of downstream unit model numbers"
in the table is the sum of the model numbers
of the units after point E in the figure.

Unit: m [ft]

Pipe sections

Allowable length of
pipes

A+B+C+D

10 [32] or less

A+B+C+D+E+F+G+I+J
+K+M+a+b+c+d+e+f+g
+i

1000 [3280] or less

Total pipe length (L) from the outdoor unit to the
farthest indoor unit

A(B)+C+E+J+K+M+i

165 [541] or less
(Equivalent length 190
[623] or less)

Total pipe length from the first branch to the farthest indoor unit ( )

G+I+J+i

40 [131] or less

Between indoor and outdoor units

H

50 [164] or less
(40 [131] or below if
outdoor unit is below indoor unit)

Between indoor units

h1

15 [49] or less

Between outdoor units

h2

0.1[0.3] or less

Operation
Length

Between outdoor units
Total pipe length

Height
difference

HWE08040

- 42 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
1. Refrigerant pipe size
(1) Diameter of the refrigerant pipe between the outdoor unit and the first branch (outdoor unit pipe size)
Outdoor unit set name
(total capacity)

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch]

Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

72 model

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

96 model

ø9.52

[3/8"]*1

ø22.2 [7/8"]

*2

120 model

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

144 model

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

168 model

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

192 model

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

216 model

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

240 model

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

264 - 312 model

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

336 - 360 model

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø41.28 [1-5/8"]

*1. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 90 m [295 ft].
*2. Use ø12.7 [1/2"] pipes if the piping length exceeds 40 m [131 ft].
(2) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first branch and the indoor unit (indoor unit pipe size)
model

Pipe diameter (mm) [inch]

06 - 15 models

Liquid pipe

ø6.35 [1/4"]

Gas pipe

ø12.7 [1/2"]

Liquid pipe

ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe

ø15.88 [5/8"]

Liquid pipe

ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe

ø19.05 [3/4"]

Liquid pipe

ø9.52 [3/8"]

Gas pipe

ø22.2 [7/8"]

18 - 54 models

72 model

96 model

(3) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the branches for connection to indoor units

HWE08040

Total capacity of the
downstream units

Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch]

Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

- 54

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø15.88 [5/8"]

P55 - P72

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

P72 - P108

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

P109 - P144

ø12.7 [1/2"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P145 - P240

ø15.88 [5/8"]

ø28.58 [1-1/8"]

P241 - P308

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

P309 -

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø41.28 [1-5/8"]

- 43 -

GB

[ II Restrictions ]
(4) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor and the second distributor
Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch]

Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]

ø19.05 [3/4"]

ø34.93 [1-3/8"]

(5) Size of the refrigerant pipe between the first distributor or the second distributor and outdoor units
Liquid pipe size (mm) [inch] Gas pipe size (mm) [inch]
72 model

ø9.52 [3/8"]

ø22.2 [7/8"]

96 model
120 model

ø12.7 [1/2"]

* Only applicable to the 120 model and below

HWE08040

- 44 -

GB

III Outdoor Unit Components
[1] Outdoor Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit .......................................................... 47
[2] Control Box of the Outdoor Unit....................................................................................... 49
[3] Outdoor Unit Circuit Board............................................................................................... 52

HWE08040

- 45 -

GB

- 46 -

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
III Outdoor Unit Components

[1] Outdoor Unit Components and Refrigerant Circuit
1. PUHY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A
PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A
(1) Front view of a outdoor unit
Fan guard

Fan

Control
Box

Heat exchanger

Front panel
Fin guard

HWE08040

- 47 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
2. PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A
PUHY-P72, P96YHMU-A
(1) Refrigerant circuit

Low pressure sensor(63LS)

High pressure sensor(63HS1)
High-pressure switch(63H1)

Check valve

Transformer Box
(YHMU-A only)

4-way valve(21S4b)

Accumulator

4-way valve(21S4a)

Low pressure check joint

Subcool coil

High pressure check joint

Compressor cover

Linear Expansion Valve(LEV1)
Solenoid valve(SV5b)

Compressor
Linear Expansion Valve(LEV2a,2b)

Liquid side valve

Gas side valve

Oil separator
Solenoid valve (SV1a)

Solenoid valve (SV9)
3. PUHY- P120THMU-A
PUHY- P120YHMU-A
(1) Refrigerant circuit

Low pressure sensor(63LS)
4-way valve(21S4a)
4-way valve(21S4c)
4-way valve(21S4b)
Check valve
High pressure check joint

Transformer Box
(YHMU-A only)

Low pressure check joint
Solenoid valve(SV5c)
High pressure sensor(63HS1)
Linear Expansion Valve
(LEV2a,2b)

High-pressure switch(63H1)
Compressor cover

Linear Expansion
Valve(LEV1)
Solenoid valve(SV5b)

Compressor
Liquid side valve
Subcool coil

HWE08040

Solenoid valve
Solenoid valve (SV1a)
(SV9)
Gas side valve
Accumulator

- 48 -

Oil separator

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]

[2] Control Box of the Outdoor Unit


Control box houses high-voltage parts.
When opening or closing the front panel of the control box, do not let it come into contact with any of
the internal components.
Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.)

1. PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A
DC reactor (DCL)

Fan board

Control board

Electromagnetic relay(72C)

Rush current
protection resistor
(R1) Note.2

Noise filter

M-NET board

Note.2

Terminal block for
power supply
(TB1)

Note.1

INV board
Ground terminal
Smoothing capacitor(C1)

Terminal block for transmission line
(TB3, TB7)

1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components.
2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

HWE08040

- 49 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
2. PUHY-P120THMU-A
Fan board

Note.2

INV board

Control board

DC reactor (DCL)
Electromagnetic relay
(72C)
Diode stack
Noise filter
Current sensor
(ACCT3)
M-NET board
Current sensor
(DCCT1)

Terminal block for
power supply
(TB1)

IPM
Ground terminal

Note.1

Smoothing capacitor(C1)

Current sensor
(ACCT2)

Current sensor
(ACCT1)

Terminal block for transmission line
(TB3, TB7)

3. PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A
Capacitor(C100)

Rush current protection resistor
(R1,R5) Note.2

Electromagnetic relay(72C)

Fan board

Control board

DC reactor (DCL)

Noise filter

M-NET board
Terminal block for
power supply
(TB1)

Fuse(F4)
Fuse(F5)

Ground
terminal

INV board

Note.1

Terminal block for transmission line
(TB3, TB7)

1) Exercise caution not to damage the bottom and the front panel of the control box. Damage to these parts affect the waterproof and dust proof properties of the control box and may result in damage to its internal components.
2) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.
HWE08040

- 50 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
4. Transformer Box (PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A)

Transformer
(T03)

Transformer
(T02)

HWE08040

- 51 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]

[3] Outdoor Unit Circuit Board
1. Outdoor unit control board

CNDC
Bus voltage input
P
N

CN2
Serial communication signal input CN801
GND INV board
Pressure switch
Output 17VDC
connection

CN332
Output 18VDC CN4
GND
GND
(Fan board)
Serial communication signal output

CNAC2
L1
L2
CN505
72C driving output
(THMU)
LEV
driving output

LED1
Service LED
CN51
Output 12VDC
Compressor
ON/OFF output
Error output
SWU1,2
Address switch
SW1-5
Dip switch
Actuator
driving output

CN72
72C driving output
(YHMU)
Sensor
input

LED3
Lit when powered

LED2
Lit during normal
CPU operation

LED3
Lit
when powered

CNAC
L1
L2

HWE08040

F01
Fuse
250V AC/3.15A

CN41
Power supply for
CN40
centralized control OFF
Power supply for
centralized control ON
CN102
Power supply input for centralized control system (30VDC)
Indoor/outdoor transmission line input/output (30VDC)

External signal input (contact input)

- 52 -

CNVCC2
Output 12VDC
Output 5VDC
GND

CNIT
Output 12VDC
GND
Output 5VDC
Power supply detection input
Power supply ON/OFF signal output
CNS2
Transmission line input/output
for centralized control system (30VDC)

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
2. M-NET board

CN04
Bus voltage input
CN03(THMU
only)
(YHMU only)
(THMU only)
Bus
voltage
input
Bus voltage output
F01
P
(THMU only)
250V
N
P
3.15A
N

CN102
Power supply output for centralized
control system (30VDC)
Indoor/outdoor transmission line
input/output (30VDC)

CNS2
Transmission line
input/output for
centralized control
system (30VDC)

Grounding

CNIT
Input 12VDC
GND
Input 5VDC
Power supply
detection output
Power supply
ON/OFF signal input

LED1
Power supply for
indoor
transmission line

Grounding

HWE08040

Ground terminal for TB7
Terminal block for
transmission line
transmission line for
TB3
centralized control
Indoor/outdoor transmission block

Grounding

- 53 -

TP1,2
Check pins for
indoor/outdoor
transmission line

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
3. INV board
(1) PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A

CN6
Open: No-load operation setting
Short-circuited: Normal setting

SC-P1
Rectifier diode output (P)

CN5V
GND
Output 5VDC
LED1
Lit: Inverter in normal operation
Blink: Inverter error

IGBT
(Rear)

CN4
GND(INV Boar)
Serial communication signal output
C30,31,32
Smoothing capacitor

CNDC
Bus voltage output
P
N

RSH1,2
Overcurrent detection
resistor

CN2
Serial communication signal output
GND
Input 17VDC

SC-P2
Bus voltage Input(P)

SC-V
Inverter output(V)

SC-W
Inverter output(W)

TB-P(Note)
Bus voltage output(P)
TB-N(Note)
Bus voltage output(N)

CT12
Current sensor(U)

SC-T
Input(L3)

SC-R
Input(L1)

CT3
Current sensor(L3)

CT22
Current sensor(W)
SC-U
Inverter output(U)

SC-S
Input(L2)

Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

HWE08040

- 54 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
(2) PUHY-P120THMU-A

CNCT3
CNTH
Current (AC) sensor input
Thermistor input
(ACCT3)
(THHS)
CNTYP
CNCT2
Function setting input
Current (AC) sensor input
(Z26)
ACCT1
LED1
Inverter in
ACCT2
normal operation

LED2
Inverter error
LED4
Lit during normal
CPU operation

SW1
ON: No-load operation setting
OFF: Normal setting
: Fixed to OFF
CN5V
GND
Output 5VDC

CNCT
Current (DC) sensor input

CN2
Serial communication
signal output
GND
Output 17VDC

FT-N(Note)
BUS voltage output(N)

CN4
GND
(Fan board)
Serial communication
signal input
LED3
Lit while charging

SC-P1
Bus voltage input/output(P)

IPM-P
BUS voltage output(P)
(IPM input)

CNFG
Functional earth

CNIPM
IPM driving power supply output
and signal output
IPM error signal input (IPM output)

CNDC1
BUS voltage output
P
N

IPM-N
BUS voltage input/output(N)
(IPM input)

CNDC2
BUS voltage input
P
N

F02
Fuse
250VAC 3.15A

CNDC3
BUS voltage output
P
N

Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the cable heads are securely locked in place. Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

HWE08040

- 55 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
(3) PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A

SC-P1
CN6
Rectifier diode output (P)
Open: No-load operation setting CN5V
RSH1
SC-P2
Short-circuited: Normal setting
GND
Overcurrent detection
LED1
Bus voltage Input(P)
Lit: Inverter in normal operation
Output 5VDC resistor
Blink: Inverter error
CN4
GND(INV Board)
Serial communication
signal output

Bus voltage check
terminal (P)
Note
CN2
Serial communication
signal output
GND
Input 17VDC

IGBT
(Rear)
CN1
Bus voltage output
N
P
Bus voltage check
terminal (N)
Note 1

CNTYP Inverter
board type
SC-V
Inverter output(V)

SC-L1
Input(L1)

SC-W
Inverter output(W)
SC-U
Inverter output(U)

SC-L2
Input(L2)

SC-L3
Input(L3)

CT12
Current sensor(U)

CT22
Current sensor(W)

C30 C37
Smoothing capacitor

CT3
Current sensor(L3)

1) Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that
the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turned off.)

HWE08040

- 56 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
4. Fan board
(1) PUHY-P72, P96, P120THMU-A

CNVDC
Bus voltage input
N
P

F01
Fuse
250VAC 15A

CN18V
Input 18VDC
GND

LED3
Lit during normal
CPU operation

CN4
GND
Serial communication signal output
GND（Control board）
Serial communication signal output

CN22
GND（INV board）
Input 5VDC
Serial communication signal input
GND（INV board）
Input 17VDC
CN21
Serial communication signal output
GND（INV board）
Input 17VDC
THBOX
Thermistor
(Control box internal temperature
detection)
LED1
Inverter in normal operation

LED2
Inverter error

R630
Overcurrent detection
resistor

HWE08040

CNINV
Inverter output
W
V
U

DIP IPM（Rear）

- 57 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
(2) PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A

CN4
LED3
CN18V
GND
Input 18VDC Lit during normal
Serial communication signal output
CPU
operation
GND

CN5
GND(Control board)
Serial communication signal output
CN21
Serial communication signal output
GND(INV board)
Input 17VDC

CNVDC
Bus voltage input
N
P

CN22
GND(INV board)
Input 5VDC
Serial communication signal input
GND(INV board)
Output 17VDC
THBOX
Thermistor
(Control box internal temperature
detection)
LED1
Inverter in normal operation
LED2
Inverter error

CNINV
Inverter output
W
V
U

R630,R631
Overcurrent detection
resistor

HWE08040

DIP IPM Rear

- 58 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
5. Noise Filter
(1) PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A

TB21
Input/output（L1）

CN02
Output
L1
L2

Grounding

TB22
Input/output（L2）

F2
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

TB23
Input/output（L3）

F1
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

CN01
Input
L3
L2
L1

HWE08040

- 59 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
(2) PUHY-P120THMU-A

R1,2
TB42
Rush current
Bus voltage output（N）
protection resistor

TB31
CN03
Bus voltage output
（P） 72C drive input

Electromagnetic relay
（72C）

F3
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

Diode stack rectified voltage
input (Diode stack output)

Grounding

Output
（Diode stack input）
CN02
Output
L1
L2

TB23
Input
（L3）
TB22
Input
（L2）

F1
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

TB21
Input
（L1）

F2
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

CN01
Input
L3
L2
L1

HWE08040

- 60 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]
(3) PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A

CN5
Output
(Rectified L2-L3 current)
P
N

CN4
Output
(Rectified L2-L3 current)
P
N

CN6
Input
L2
L3

CN2
Surge absorber circuit
Surge absorber circuit
Short circuit
Short circuit

Grounding

F1,F2,F3,F4
Fuse
250VAC 6.3A

Grounding

CN1A
Input
L1

CN1B
Input
L3
L2

HWE08040

TB21
TB22
TB23
Input/output(L1) Input/output(L2) Input/output(L3)

- 61 -

GB

[ III Outdoor Unit Components ]

HWE08040

- 62 -

GB

IV Remote Controller
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]

HWE08040

Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers ................................... 65
Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller ............................. 66
Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller ............................................................. 70
Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller ................................... 71

- 63 -

GB

- 64 -

[ IV Remote Controller ]
IV Remote Controller

[1] Functions and Specifications of MA and ME Remote Controllers

There are two types of remote controllers: M-NET (ME) remote controller, which is connected on the indoor-outdoor
transmission line, and MA remote controller, which is connected to each indoor unit.
1. Comparison of functions and specifications between MA and ME remote controllers
MA remote controller*1*2

Functions/specifications

M-NET (ME) remote controller*2*3

Remote controller address settings Not required

Required

Indoor/outdoor unit address settings

Not required (required only by a system
with one outdoor unit)*4

Required

Wiring method

Non-polarized 2-core cable
Non-polarized 2-core cable
To perform a group operation, daisychain the indoor units using non-polarized 2-core cables.

Remote controller connection

Connectable to any indoor unit in the
group

Connectable anywhere on the indoor-outdoor transmission line

Interlock with the ventilation unit

Each indoor unit can individually be interlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up
via remote controller in the group.)

Each indoor unit can individually be interlocked with a ventilation unit. (Set up via
remote controller.)

Changes to be made upon grouping change

MA remote controller wiring between in- Either the indoor unit address and remote
door units requires rewiring.
controller address must both be changed,
or the registration information must be
changed via MELANS.

*1. MA remote controller refers to MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA, PAR-21MAA), MA simple remote controller, and wireless remote controller.
*2. Either the MA remote controller or the M-NET remote controller can be connected when a group operation of units in a
system with multiple outdoor units is conducted or when a system controller is connected.
*3. M-NET remote controller refers to ME remote controller and ME simple remote controller.
*4. Depending on the system configuration, some systems with one outdoor unit may require address settings.
2. Remote controller selection criteria
MA remote controller and M-NET remote controller have different functions and characteristics. Choose the one that better
suits the requirements of a given system. Use the following criteria as a reference.
MA remote controller*1*2

M-NET (ME) remote controller*1*2

There is little likelihood of system expansion and grouping changes.
Grouping (floor plan) has been set at the time of installation.

There is a likelihood of centralized installation of remote
controllers, system expansion, and grouping changes.
Grouping (floor plan) has not been set at the time of installation.
To connect the remote controller directly to the OA processing unit.

*1. M-NET remote controller and MA remote controller cannot both be connected to the same group of indoor units.
*2. A system controller must be connected to a system to which both MA remote controller and M-NET remote controller are
connected.


Outdoor unit

HWE08040



M-NET transmission line
(indoor/outdoor transmission line)

group

group

MA remote controller

Indoor unit

Outdoor unit

M-NET transmission line
(indoor/outdoor transmission line)

group

M-NET remote controller

- 65 -

group

Indoor unit

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

[2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via the ME Remote Controller
1. Group settings/interlock settings
Make the following settings to perform a group operation of units that are connected to different outdoor units or to manually set up the
indoor/outdoor unit address.
(A) Group settings...........Registration of the indoor units to be controlled with the remote controller,
and search and deletion of registered information.
(B) Interlock settings........Registration of LOSSNAY units to be interlocked with the indoor units,
and search and deletion of registered information
[Operation Procedures]
(1) Address settings
Register the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller.
1 Bring up either the blinking display of HO by turning on the unit or the
˚C
TEMP.
ON/OFF
normal display by pressing the ON/OFF button.
The display window must look like one of the two figures below to proceed to the
C
next step.
CENTRALLY CONTROLLED
ON OFF
DAILY
AUTO OFF
CLOCK

1Hr.

˚C

REMAINDER

STAND BY
DEFROST

NOT AVAILABLE

FILTER
CHECK MODE
TEST RUN
LIMIT TEMP.

FILTER

CLOCK→ON→OFF

G

CHECK TEST

PAR-F27MEA

(A) Group Settings
2 Bring up the Group Setting window.
-Press and hold buttons A [FILTER] and B [
]
simultaneously for 2 seconds to bring up the display as
shown below.

D

H

[Normal display]

A

TIMER SET

E

[Blinking display of HO ]

?F

B

(B) Interlock Settings
6 Bring up the Interlock Setting window.

-Press button G [
] to bring up the following display.
Press again to go back to the Group Setting window as shown
under step 2 .
Both the indoor unit address and
interlocked unit address will be
displayed together.

Indoor unit address display window

Indoor unit
Interlocked unit
address
address
display window display window

3 Select the unit address.
- Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing
button C [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back
through the addresses.
4 Register the indoor unit whose address appears on the

To search for an address,
go to section (2) Address Search.

7 Bring up the address of the indoor unit and the address of the

LOSSNAY to be interlocked on the display.
- Select the address of the indoor unit to be registered by pressing
button C [TEMP. ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back through
the addresses.
- Select the address of the LOSSNAY unit to be interlocked by
pressing button H [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back
through the interlocked unit addresses.

display.
- Press button D [TEST] to register the indoor unit address
whose address appears on the display.
- If registration is successfully completed, unit type will appear
on the display as shown in the figure below.
- If the selected address does not have a corresponding indoor
unit, an error message will appear on the display. Check the
address, and try again.


8 Make the settings to interlock LOSSNAY units with indoor

units.
- Press button D [TEST] while both the indoor unit address and
the address of the LOSSNAY units to be interlocked
are displayed to enter the interlock setting.
- Interlock setting can also be made by bringing up the
LOSSNAY address in the indoor unit address display
window and the indoor unit address in the interlocked unit
address display window.

Unit type (Indoor unit in this case)



blinks to indicate a registration error.
(Indicates that selected address does not have a
corresponding unit.)

(Displayed alternately)

5 To register the addresses for multiple indoor units, repeat
steps 3 and 4 above.

If registration is successfully
completed, the two displays as
shown on the left will appear
alternately.
If the registration fails,
will blink on the display.
(Indicates that the selected
address does not have a
corresponding unit.)

To search for an address,
go to section (2) Address Search.
NOTE : Interlock all the indoor units in the group with the
LOSSNAY units; otherwise, the LOSSNAY units will
not operate.
To next page.

HWE08040

- 66 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 in the previous page to interlock

all the indoor units in a group with the LOSSNAY unit.
(C) To return to the normal display
When all the group settings and interlock settings are made, take the
following step to go back to the normal display.
10 Press and hold buttons A [FILTER] and B [
]
simultaneously for 2 seconds to go back to the
window as shown in step 1 .

To go back to the normal display, To search for an address,
follow step 10 .
go to section (2) Address Search.

(2) Address search
To search for the address of indoor units that have been entered into
the remote controller, follow steps 1 and 2 .

(A) To search group settings

(B) Interlock setting search

11 Bring up the Group Setting window.

After performing step 6 , proceed as follows:
12 Bring up the address of the indoor unit to be searched on

- Each pressing of button E [ ] will bring up the address of a
registered indoor unit and its unit type on the display.

the display.
- Select the address of the indoor unit to be searched by pressing
button H [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to advance or go back
through the interlocked addresses.



Unit type
(Indoor unit in this case)
LOSSNAY can be searched in the same manner by bringing up
the LOSSNAY address in the Interlocked unit address display window.



13 Bring up on the display the address of the LOSSNAY unit
that was interlocked with the indoor unit in step 12 .

- With each pressing of button E [ ], the address of the
LOSSNAY and indoor unit that is interlocked with it will be
displayed alternately.

- When only one unit address is registered, the same address
will remain on the display regardless of how many times the
button is pressed.
- When the address of multiple units are registered
(i.e. 011, 012, 013 ), they will be displayed one at a time in
an ascending order with each pressing of button E [ ] .

Address of an interlocked
LOSSNAY unit

(Displayed alternately)

14 Bring up the address of another registered unit on the

To delete an address, go to
section (3) Address Deletion.

display.
- After completing step 13 , a subsequent pressing of button
E [
] will bring up the address of another registered
unit.
(The display method is the same as the one in step 13 .)

To go back to the normal display,
follow step 10 .

Address of another
interlocked unit

(Displayed alternately)

To delete an address,
go to section (3) Address Deletion .
(3) Address deletion
The addresses of the indoor units that have been entered into the remote controller can be deleted by deleting the group settings.
The interlock settings between units can be deleted by deleting the interlock settings.
Follow the steps in section (2) Address Search to find the address to be deleted and perform deletion with the address being displayed in the
display window. To delete an address, the address must first be bought up on the display.
15 Delete the registered indoor unit address or the interlock setting between units.
- Press button F? [CLOCK ON OFF] twice while either the indoor unit address or the address of the interlocked unit is displayed on the
display to delete the interlock setting.

HWE08040

- 67 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]
(A) To delete group settings

(B) To delete interlock settings



will be displayed in the room temperature display window.

If deletion is successfully
completed, - - will appear in
the unit type display window.
If the deletion fails,
will
appear in the unit type display
window. In this case, repeat the
steps above.

(Displayed alternately)

- If a transmission error occurs, the selected setting will not be
deleted, and the display will appear as shown below.
In this case, repeat the steps above.


will be displayed in the room temperature display window.

To go back to the normal display, follow step 10 .

(4) Making (A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group from any arbitrary remote controller
(A) Group settings and (B) Interlock settings of a group can be made from any arbitrary remote controller.
Refer to (B) Interlock Settings under section 1 Group Settings/Interlock Settings for operation procedures.
Set the address as shown below.
(A) To make group settings
Interlocked unit address display window...Remote controller address
Indoor unit address display window...........The address of the indoor unit to be controlled with the remote controller
(B) To make interlock settings
Interlocked unit address display window...LOSSNAY address
Indoor unit address display window..........The address of the indoor unit to be interlocked with the LOSSNAY

2. Remote controller function selection via the ME remote controller
In the remote controller function selection mode, the settings for four types of functions can be made or changed as necessary.
1) Skip-Auto-Mode setting
The automatic operation mode that is supported by some simultaneous cooling/heating type units can be made unselectable via the ME remote
controller.
2) Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of COOL/HEAT during automatic operation mode)
When the automatic operation mode is selected, the indoor unit will automatically perform a cooling or heating operation based on the room
temperature. In this case,
or
will appear on the remote controller display.
This setting can be changed so that only
will appear on the display.
3) Room temperature display selection mode (Display or non-display of room temperature)
Although the suction temperature is normally displayed on the remote controller, the setting can be changed so that it will not appear on the
remote controller.
4) Narrowed preset temperature range mode
The default temperature ranges are 19 C to 30 C in the cooling/dry mode and 17 C to 28 C in the heating mode and 19 C to 28 C in the auto mode.
By changing these ranges (raising the lower limit for the cooling/dry mode and lowering the upper limit for the heating mode), energy can be saved.
NOTE
When making the temperature range setting on the simultaneous cooling/heating type units that supports the automatic operation mode to save on
energy consumption, enable the Skip-Auto-Mode setting to make the automatic operation mode unselectable. If the automatic operation mode is
selected, the energy-saving function may not work properly.
When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for the Skip-Auto-Mode, restricted preset
temperature range mode (AUTO), and operation mode display selection mode are invalid. If an attempt is made to change the preset temperature range,
“LIMIT TEMP.” appears on the display.
[Function selection mode sequence on the remote controller]
Normal display
1

1

Remote controller function selection mode
Skip-Auto-Mode setting
*2 2

3

Temperature range setting mode (AUTO)
TEMP.

2

ON/OFF

CLOCKĺONĺOFF

FILTER

5

CHECK TEST

PAR-F27MEA

3

2

*1

*1

[Normal display]
1 : Press and hold the [CHECK] and

[
] buttons simultaneously
for two seconds.
2 : [SET TEMP. ( ) ] button
3 : [SET TEMP. ( ) ] button

Operation mode display selection mode (Display or non-display of the automatic mode)
2

3 *2

Restricted preset temperature range mode (Cooling)

TIMER SET

4

2

3

Restricted preset temperature range mode (Heating)
2

3

Room temperature display selection mode

HWE08040

3

- 68 -

2

3

*1 : Skip-Auto-Mode is enabled
*2 : Skip-Auto-Mode is disabled

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

[Operation Procedures]
1. Press the [ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop. The display will appear as shown in the previous page (Normal
display).
2. Press buttons 1 [CHECK] and [
] simultaneously for 2 seconds to go into the “Skip-Auto-Mode setting.”
under the remote controller function selection mode. Press button 2 [SET TEMP. ( )] or 3 [SET TEMP. ( )] to go into the other four modes
under the remote controller function selection mode.

Skip-Auto-Mode setting (Making the automatic operation mode unselectable)
This setting is valid only when the controller is connected to the simultaneous cooling/heating type air conditioning units that
support the automatic operation mode.
“
” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the 4 [TIMER SET (
between “ON” and “OFF.”

[TIMER SET (

) ((

) or (

)] button switches

))] button

When set to “ON,” the automatic operation mode is available for selection in the function selection mode.
When set to “OFF,” the automatic operation mode is not available for selection in the function selection mode, and an automatic operation
cannot be performed.
(The automatic operation mode is skipped in the function selection mode sequence.)

Operation mode display selection mode (Changing the type of display that appears during the automatic mode operation)
When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid.

will blink, and either “ON”or “OFF” will light up. Press button 4 [TIMER SET (

) or (

)] in this state to

switch between “ON” and “OFF.”

[TIMER SET (
When it is set to ON,
When it is set to OFF, only

) ((

))] button

will appear on the display during automatic operation mode.
will appear on the display during automatic operation mode.

Restricted preset temperature range mode (The range of preset temperature can be changed.)
1) Temperature range setting for the cooling/dry mode
will light up in the display window, and the temperature range for the cooling/dry mode will appear on the display.
[Lower limit temperature]: Appears in the preset temperature display window [Upper limit temperature: Appears in the time display window
Switch between the Lower and Upper limit temperature setting by pressing the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button. The selected temperature setting blinks.

[TIMER SET (

) ((

))] button

[The left figure shows the display that appears when the current temperature range setting is between 19 C and 30 C in the Cool/Dry mode,
and the lower limit temperature is selected to be set.]
Press button 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the lower limit temperature to the desired temperature.
[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C
[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 30 C

30 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)
19 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

2) Temperature range setting for heating
“
” and the settable temperature range for heating appear on the display.
As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range.
[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 17 C
[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C

28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)
17 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

3) Temperature range setting for the automatic mode
When connected to the air conditioning units that do not support the automatic operation mode, the setting for this mode is invalid.
“
” and the temperature range for the automatic operation mode appear on the display.
As with the Cool/Dry mode, use the 5 [CLOCK-ON-OFF] button and the 4 [TIMER SET ( ) or ( )] to set the temperature range.
[Settable range for the lower limit temperature] : 19 C
28 C (Settable up to the upper limit temperature that is shown on the display)
[Settable range for the upper limit temperature] : 28 C
19 C (Settable up to the lower limit temperature that is shown on the display)

Room temperature display selection mode (Switching between the display or non-display of room temperature on the controller)

“ 88 C ” blinks and either “ON” or “OFF” lights up on the controller. Pressing the 4 [TIMER SET (
switches between “ON” and “OFF.”
˚C

) or (

)] button

˚C

[TIMER SET (

) ((

))] button

When set to “ON,” room temperature always appears on the display during operation.
When set to “OFF,” room temperature does not appear on the display during operation.

HWE08040

- 69 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]

[3] Interlock Settings via the MA Remote Controller
1. LOSSNAY interlock setting (Make this setting only when necessary.)
Make this setting only when necessary.
Perform this operation to enter the interlock setting between the LOSSNAY and the indoor units to which the remote controller is connected, or to
search and delete registered information.
In the following example, the address of the indoor unit is 05 and the address of the LOSSNAY unit is 30.
[Operation Procedures]
1 Press the

[ON/OFF] button on the remote controller to bring the unit to a stop.
The display window on the remote controller must look like the figure below to proceed to step 2 .

2 Press and hold the [FILTER] and [

] buttons simultaneously for two seconds to perform a search for the LOSSNAY that is interlocked with the
indoor unit to which the remote controller is connected.

3 Search result

- The indoor unit address and the interlocked LOSSNAY address will appear alternately.





- Without interlocked LOSSNAY settings

4 If no settings are necessary, exit the window by pressing and holding the [FILTER] and [

] buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds.
Go to step 1. Registration Procedures to make the interlock settings with LOSSNAY units, or go to step 2. Search Procedures to search for a
particular LOSSNAY unit.
Go to step 3. Deletion Procedures to delete any LOSSNAY settings.

< 1. Registration Procedures >
5 To interlock an indoor unit with a LOSSNAY unit, press the [

TEMP. ( ) or ( )] button on the remote controller that is connected to the indoor
unit, and select its address (01 to 50).
6 Press the [ CLOCK ( ) or ( )] button to select the address of the LOSSNAY to be interlocked (01 to 50).

Indoor unit address

LOSSNAY address

7 Press the [TEST] button to register the address of the selected indoor unit and the interlocked LOSSNAY unit.

- Registration completed
The registered indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately.

- Registration error
If the registration fails, the indoor unit address and the LOSSNAY address will be displayed alternately.

Registration cannot be completed: The selected unit address does not have a corresponding indoor unit or a LOSSNAY unit.
Registration cannot be completed: Another LOSSNAY has already been interlocked with the selected indoor unit.

HWE08040

- 70 -

GB

[ IV Remote Controller ]
< 2. Search Procedures >
8 To search for the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with a particular indoor unit, enter the address of the indoor unit into the remote controller that is
connected to it.


9 Press the [

MENU] button to search for the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.
- Search completed (With a LOSSNAY connection)
The indoor unit address and IC, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and LC will appear alternately.

- Search completed (No interlocked settings with a LOSSNAY exist.)

- The selected address does not have a corresponding indoor unit.

< 3. Deletion Procedures >
Take the following steps to delete the interlock setting between a LOSSNAY unit and the interlocked indoor unit from the remote controller
that is connected to the indoor unit.
10 Find the address of the LOSSNAY to be deleted (See section 2. Search Procedures. ), and bring up the result of the search for both the
indoor unit and LOSSNAY on the display.

11 Press the [

ON/OFF] button twice to delete the address of the LOSSNAY unit that is interlocked with the selected indoor unit.
- Registration completed
The indoor unit address and
, and the interlocked LOSSNAY address and
will appear alternately.

-Deletion error
If the deletion fails

[4] Using the built-in Temperature Sensor on the Remote Controller
1. Selecting the position of temperature detection (Factory setting: SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit is
set to OFF.)
To use the built-in sensor on the remote controller, set the SW1-1 on the controller board on the indoor unit to ON.
Some models of remote controllers are not equipped with a built-in temperature sensor. Use the built-in temperature sensor
on the indoor unit instead.
When using the built-in sensor on the remote controller, install the remote controller where room temperature can be detected.

HWE08040

- 71 -

GB

- 72 -

V Electrical Wiring Diagram
[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Outdoor Unit ................................................................. 75
[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster......................................................... 78

HWE08040

- 73 -

GB

- 74 -

HWE08040

- 75 -

Symbol

SV9

SV5b

SV1a

LEV2a,b

63HS1
63LS
72C
CT12,22,3
CH11
DCL
LEV1

21S4a
21S4b
63H1

Explanation

1

U

U

Z3

TB21

CX5

L

TH7
THBOX
THHS
Z24,25

TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6

TH2

TB7

TB1
TB3

Symbol

Power supply
3~
60Hz
208/230V

L3

L3

black

TB23

L2

L2

L1

white

red

TB22

CX4

CX6

C1

2
1

4

6

CNINV

black

red

*5

*5

black

CT3

SC-T

+

1 3

CN5V
yellow

12

CN6

+

red

Power supply
Indoor/Outdoor transmission
cable
Central control transmission
cable
Thermistor
Subcool bypass outlet
temperature
Pipe temperature
Discharge pipe temperature
ACC inlet pipe temperature
Subcooled liquid refrigerant
temperature
OA temperature
Control box internal temperature
IGBT temperature
Function setting connector

white

SC-R

U

red

red

V
W

white

white

MS
3~

CT12

SC-U

C1

SC-V

RSH2

CN2

5
7

black

black

CT22

SC-W

CNDC
pink

3

1
2

CN4 1
2

SV9

SV5b

21S4a

CH11

SV1a

21S4b

A2 red
72C
A1 white

CN502

1

3

6

1

3

6

CN508
black

CN506

CN504
1 green

3

CN503
1 blue

3

1

2

1 CN501

3

CN505
1 black

3

12
CNT01

red
CNAC

X09

X05

X04

X03

X02

X01

X72

2

1

321

SWU1
1's digit

LED1

SW5

10

SW4

10

SW3

10

Function setting

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

1

1

M-NET power
supply
circuit

CN04
3 red

1234

CN41

6
CNLVC 5
4
red
3
2
1

54321

CNIT
red

21

TB3
M1 M2

TB7
M1 M2 S
TP1 TP2

LED1:Power supply to
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission line

CNS2
yellow

1
CN211 2

CN215 2
black 1

4321

12345

red
CNIT

1

3

CN201 2

CN202 3
2
red
1

2
CN990 1

1

CN212 2

CN213 3
2
red
1

4

CNTYP4 2
1
green

CNTYP5 3
1
green

LED1
Display
setting

SW1

10

6
CNLVB 5
4
red
3
2
1

CN102

OFF

12

yellow
CNS2

SW2

10

6
5

2
1

CNLVA 4
3

Indoor/Outdoor Central control
transmission
transmission
cable
cable

*4

M-NET Board

3

1234

321

321

CN102

red
CN3S CN3D

Power selecting
connector

1234

CN40

LED2:CPU in operation

ON

*3
Compressor ON/OFF output
Error detection output

CN03
black

321

yellow blue
CN3K CN3N

G

*3

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

3
4
5

CN51
1

CN2

12
CN4

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
1
1
1
1
1

LED3:Lit when powered

12V

2
1

7
5

12 21
CNT02 CN332
blue

Control Board

1 3
CN801
yellow

Unit address setting

SWU2
10's digit

Power
failure
detection
circuit

CPU power
supply circuit

CNDC
3 pink

CNAC2
2 black
1

1

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring
not supplied with the unit.
*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control
box boundaries.
*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting
input/output signal connectors.
*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the
outdoor units in the same refrigerant
system together.
*5.Faston terminals have a locking
function.Make sure the terminals
are securely locked in place after
insertion.Press the tab on the
terminals to removed them.

Motor
(Compressor)

THHS

t°

RSH1

t°

LED1:Normal
operation
LED2:Error

THBOX

4
3
2
1

CN22 5

6

1

LED3:CPU in red
operation

R30 C30 C31 C32

+

SC-S

ZNR1

U

IPM

4

CN21 3
blue 2

12 45

21

CN18V CN4
blue

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)
/Error(Blink)
1

SC-P1

black

R630

C630

IGBT

Explanation

TB-N

TB-P

SC-P2

INV Board

black

Terminal
block

Ground

black

white

red

+

33
43

red

23

72C

13

R1

44

14

*5
24

1 3 CN02

TB1 L1

CX3
CX2
F2
AC250V
6.3A T

Z2

CY1
CY2
CY3

Cooling/Heating switching
Heat exchanger capacity control
Pressure
High pressure protection for the
switch
outdoor unit
Discharge pressure
Pressure
sensor
Low pressure
Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
Current sensor(AC)
Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
DC reactor
HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant
Linear
expansion
flow in HIC circuit
valve
Pressure control,Refrigerant flow
rate control
Solenoid
For opening/closing the bypass
valve
circuit under the O/S
Outdoor unit heat exchanger
capacity control
For opening/closing the bypass
circuit

4-way valve

3

Z4

U

CN01 5

CX1
F1
AC250V
6.3A T

Z1

U

DSA1



G

Noise Filter

V
W

U

DCL 34

red

M
3~

Fan motor
(Heat exchanger)

3
1

F01
AC250V
CNVDC 15A T

FAN Board

P

63H1

Z24

Z25

1
2
3
1
2
3

TH7

t°

t°

t°

LEV2b

LEV2a

LEV1

TH4

TH2

63HS1

63LS

TH5

TH3

TH6
t°
t°

t°

M

M

M

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

V Electrical Wiring Diagram

[1] Electrical Wiring Diagram of the Outdoor Unit

1. Electrical wiring diagram of the outdoor unit
(1) PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A

GB

- 76 -

Z1

CN01 5

U

CY3

F1 CX1
AC250V
6.3A T

U

CY2

CY1

1

TB31

red

TB1

U

L2

L2

white

+

L3

L3

black

L

Z5
C41

TH7
THBOX
THHS
Z24,25,26

TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6

TH2

TB7

Symbol
TB1
TB3

W

U
V

red

4

C1

black

1

DCCT1

black

R01

21

R630

C630

21

Z26
21

IPM

IPM

N

C007

P

FT-N

*5

U

white

MS
3~

V

white

V

SW1

1

pink

3 1 CNDC3

G

21S4c

SV9

SV5c

SV5b

21S4a

CH11

SV1a

21S4b
CN502

CN501

CN506

1

3

6

1

CN508
black

CN507
3 red

1
6
5

3

6

CN504
1 green

3

CN503
1 blue

3

1

2

1

3

CN505
1 black

3

12
CNT01

CNAC
red

X09

X08

X07

X05

X04

X03

X02

X01

X72

2

1

SWU1
1's digit

321

10

SW4

10

SW5

SW3

10

Function setting

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

1

1

3

M-NET power
supply
circuit

CN04
red

red
CNIT

CNS2
yellow

21

12345

CNIT
red

54321

CN211 12

CN215 2
black 1

TB3
M1 M2

1

3

CN201 2

CN202 32
red
1

CN990 12

1

CN212 2

CN213 3
2
red
1

4

CNTYP4 21
green

CNTYP5 3
green 1

LED1
Display
setting

SW1

10

TB7
M1 M2 S

TP1 TP2

LED1:Power supply to
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission line

CN102

4321

OFF

12

yellow
CNS2

SW2

10

6
CNLVB 5
4
red
3
2
1

2
1

6
5

CNLVA 43

Indoor/Outdoor Central control
transmission
transmission
cable
cable

*4

M-NET Board

3

CN41
1234

321

1234

red
CN3S CN3D CN102
321

ON
Power selecting
connector

1234

CN40

LED2:CPU in operation

CN03
black

321

LED1

P

6
CNLVC 5
4
red
3
2
1

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
1
1
1
1
1

LED3:Lit when powered

3
4
5

CN2

12
CN4

*3
Compressor ON/OFF output
Error detection output

12V CN51
1

yellow blue
CN3K CN3N

G

*3

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

SWU2
10's digit

2
1

7
5

12 21
CNT02 CN332
blue

Control Board

1 3
CN801
yellow

Unit address setting

Power
failure
detection
circuit

CPU power
supply circuit

CNDC
3 pink

CNAC2
2 black
1

1

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring
not supplied with the unit.
*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control
box boundaries.
*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting
input/output signal connectors.
*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the
outdoor units in the same refrigerant
system together.
*5.Faston terminals have a locking
function.Make sure the terminals
are securely locked in place after
insertion.Press the tab on the
terminals to removed them.

red

4

CNFG 2
blue 1
F02
AC250V
3.15A T

IPM power
supply
circuit

1

2
1

7
5

CN4 2

CN2

CN5V
yellow

3 1

LED3:Charge

Function
setting

6

OFF ON
1

ACCT1

red

U

4

1

25

Motor
(Compressor)

W

black

CNDC1
C008

ACCT2

t°

LED1:Normal
operation
LED2:Error

THBOX

4
3
2
1

6

CN22 5

LED1:Normal operation
LED2:Error

CNIPM

black

4

1

CN4 CN21 32
blue

12 45

LED3:CPU in red
operation

INV Board

W

1

21

CN18V
blue

LED4:CPU in
operation

CNTH CNTYP CNCT3
green
black

t°

THHS

1
2
3 CNCT
4

CNCT2
blue

4321

2
1

4

6

CNINV

3
1

F01
AC250V
CNVDC 15A T

FAN Board

Explanation
Power supply
Terminal
block
Indoor/Outdoor transmission
cable
Central control transmission
cable
Thermistor
Subcool bypass outlet
temperature
Pipe temperature
Discharge pipe temperature
ACC inlet pipe temperature
Subcooled liquid refrigerant
temperature
OA temperature
Control box internal temperature
IGBT temperature
Function setting connector

Ground

M
3~

72C

TB23

~ ~

Stack

TB22

-

R2

black

R1

Power supply
3~
60Hz
208/230V

L1

L1

red

F2
AC250V
6.3A T

CX3 TB21
CX2

Z2

Z3

~

Diode

F3
AC250V
6.3A T

TB42

72C

black

Explanation
4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching
Heat exchanger capacity control
Pressure
High pressure protection for the
switch
outdoor unit
63HS1
Discharge pressure
Pressure
sensor
63LS
Low pressure
72C
Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
ACCT1,2,3 Current sensor(AC)
CH11
Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
DCCT1
Current sensor(DC)
DC reactor
DCL
HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant
LEV1
Linear
expansion
flow in HIC circuit
valve
LEV2a,b
Pressure control,Refrigerant flow
rate control
Solenoid
For opening/closing the bypass
SV1a
valve
circuit under the O/S
SV5b,c
Outdoor unit heat exchanger
capacity control
SV9
For opening/closing the bypass
circuit

Symbol
21S4a
21S4b,c
63H1

3

U

U

CN02 1 3



G

Z4 DSA1

1 3 CN03

CX6

DCL

ACCT3

Noise
Filter

CX4 CX5

Fan motor
(Heat exchanger)

SC-P1

HWE08040
CNDC2

63H1

Z24

Z25

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

1
2
3
1
2
3

LEV2b

LEV2a

LEV1

TH4

TH2

63HS1

63LS

TH5

TH3

TH7

TH6

M

M

M

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(2) PUHY-P120THMU-A

GB

HWE08040

*7 exist

P120

Explanation
4-way valve Cooling/Heating switching
Heat exchanger capacity control
Pressure
High pressure protection for the
switch
outdoor unit
63HS1
Discharge pressure
Pressure
sensor
63LS
Low pressure
72C
Magnetic relay(inverter main circuit)
CT12,22,3 Current sensor(AC)
CH11
Crankcase heater(for heating the compressor)
DCL
DC reactor
HIC bypass,Controls refrigerant
LEV1
Linear
expansion
flow in HIC circuit
valve
LEV2a,b
Pressure control,Refrigerant flow
rate control
Solenoid
For opening/closing the bypass
SV1a
valve
circuit under the O/S
SV5b,c
Outdoor unit heat exchanger
capacity control
SV9
For opening/closing the bypass
circuit
TB1
Power supply
Terminal
block
Indoor/Outdoor transmission
TB3
cable
Central control transmission
TB7
cable
Thermistor
Subcool bypass outlet
TH2
temperature
TH3
Pipe temperature
TH4
Discharge pipe temperature
TH5
ACC inlet pipe temperature
TH6
Subcooled liquid refrigerant
temperature
OA temperature
TH7
Control box internal temperature
THBOX
THHS
IGBT temperature
Z24,25
Function setting connector

Symbol
21S4a
21S4b,c
63H1



*7 do not exist

Appliance

P72/P96

Model name

- 77 red

CN1A 3

1

Z1 Z2 Z3
U U U

white

4

R1

R2

R3

C9
C8
C7

TB1

black

+
C17

3

R6

R4

C5

C6

+

3

F4
600V
3A F

red
white
black

black

white

red

2

purple 1

460V

6
5
4
3

CN07

2
purple 1

460V

6
5
4
3

CN06

T03
(Transformer)

T02
(Transformer)

F5
600V
3A F

2

3

4

N

4
1

black

white

red

+
+
+
+
R31
R33
R35

8

THBOX
t°

2
1

CN5V
yellow

CT12

SC-L2

SC-U

t°
THHS

W

white

MS
3~

V

white

SC-V

1

3

2
1

black

black

CT22

SC-W

CNTYP
black

CN2

Motor
(Compressor)

U

red

red

RSH1

C1

7
5

2
CN4 1

LED1:Normal operation(Lit)
/ Error(Blink)

CN6

3 1

1

21S4c

*7

5
72C
6

SV9

SV5c

SV5b

21S4a

CH11

SV1a

21S4b

CN503

CN502

CN504

CN508

CN507
red

CN506

1

3 black

6

1

3

6
5

1

3

6

CPU power
supply circuit

CNAC
red

X09

X08

X07

X05

X04

X03

X02

X01

2

1

12

CNT01

F01
AC250V
3.15A T

2 CN72 ZNR01
1 red
U

CN501

1 green

3

CNDC
3 pink

CNAC2
black

1 blue

3

1

2

1

3

2
1

1
12

1

CN2

SW5

10

12

CN4

LED1

SW3

10

yellow
CN3K
321

G

blue
CN3N
321

CN04
3 red

CN102
1234

CN41
1234

CN40
1234

M-NET Board

M-NET power
supply circuit

1

red
CN3S CN3D
321 321

LED2:CPU in operation

LED1
Display
setting

SW1

10

1

2

3

4

CNTR3

1

2

3

63H1

4321

CN102

6
5

1

3

21

54321

red
CN211 12
CNIT
12345

CN215 1
2
black

1

3

CN201 2

CN202 32
red
1

CN990 21

CN212 21

1

CN213 3
2
red

4

CNTYP4 2
1
green

CNTYP5 3
green
1

CNTYP2
black

6
5
CNLVC 4
3
red
2
1

6
5
CNLVB 4
3
red
2
1

2
1

CNLVA 43

Central control
transmission
cable

CNS2
CNIT
yellow
red
LED1:Power supply to
Indoor/Outdoor
transmission line
TB3
TB7
M1 M2 S
M1 M2
TP1 TP2

yellow
CNS2
12

OFF

ON

TB7 Power
selecting
connector

SW2

10

Function
setting

SW4

10

LED3:Lit when powered

3
4
5

21

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
1
1
1
1
1

2
1

5

7

CNT02 CN332
blue

*3
Compressor ON/OFF output
Error detection output

Unit address
setting

SWU2 SWU1
10's 1's
digit digit

12V CN51

*3

3

Control Board

Power failure
detection circuit

1

CN801
yellow

*4

7

SC-L3

6
5

CN22 4
3
red

LED1:Normal
operation
LED2:Error

21

4

CN21 3
blue 2

12
CN5

Indoor/Outdoor
transmission
cable

6

CT3

SC-L1

1 3
CN4
red

LED3:CPU in
operation

21
CN18V
blue

4

5

ZNR1

black

*5

IPM

C31
U
C33
IGBT
C35
C37

FT-N

SC-P1

2
1
3 72C 4
black

R5

C100

R631

R630

R1

FT-P

*6

red

C631

INV Board

R30
R32
R34

C30
C32
C34
C36

P

CN1

+
+
+
+

SC-P2

red

DCL

C630

CNINV

4
1

7

CNVDC

4
1

F01
DC700V
4A T

FAN Board

P

CNTR2

L1L2L2 L3

CNTR1 1

Diode
Bridge
F4
AC250V
6.3A T

3

L1 L2 L3 Ground
Power Source
3~
60Hz
460V

L1 L2 L3

L

U

Z5

1

CN6 1
yellow

TB21 TB22 TB23

L1 L2 L3

C4

Noise
Filter
C10

1 CN1B

C1

C2

F1
C3

F2

Z4
U
F3

DSA

1

Transformer Box

F1,F2,F3
AC250V
6.3A T

1

3

6
5

*1.Single-dotted lines indicate wiring not supplied with the unit.
*2.Dot-dash lines indicate the control box boundaries.
*3.Refer to the Data book for connecting input/output signal connectors.
*4.Daisy-chain terminals (TB3) on the outdoor units in the
same refrigerant system together.
*5.Faston terminals have a locking function.
Make sure the terminals are securely locked
Fan motor
(Heat exchanger)
in place after insertion. Press the tab
U
on the terminals to removed them.
M V
3~
*6.Control box houses high-voltage parts.
W
Before inspecting the inside of the
control box,turn off the power,keep
the unit off for at least 10 minutes,
and confirm that the voltage between
G
G
FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped
to DC20V or less.
CN5
CN4
red
*7.Difference of appliance
blue
D1 R5
CN2

Z24

Z25

M

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

t°

1
2
3

1
2
3

TH4

TH2

63HS1

63LS

TH5

TH3

TH7

TH6

LEV2b

M

LEV2a

M

LEV1

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]
(3) PUHY-P72, P96,P120YHMU-A

GB

[ V Electrical Wiring Diagram ]

[2] Electrical Wiring Diagram of Transmission Booster

Terminal block for power supply
(TB1)
250V 5A
L
Red Red Red

Red
Red

100V/200VAC

White

White

Black
1

Varistor

3
E

Noise filter

Green/Yellow

U

White

White

White

White

2

4

Black

Red
Varistor
U

Green

DSA
Red
Red
Blue

Grounding

White
Choke coil
Red

White Red

4

1

3
2
1
CN2

Stabilized power supply

2
3

Black
Black
CN1

Blue
CN2

1

2
CN3

1

2

1

2

CN4

Electronic control board

S
White

White

Red

Red

Black

Black

Red

Red

B
A

Terminal block 2 for
transmission line (TB3)
Expanded (indoor unit) side

CN1
2

1
S

HWE08040

- 78 -

B
A

Terminal block 1 for
transmission line (TB2)
Expanded (outdoor unit) side

GB

VI Refrigerant Circuit
[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram ............................................................................................. 81
[2] Principal Parts and Functions .......................................................................................... 82

HWE08040

- 79 -

GB

- 80 -

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
VI Refrigerant Circuit

[1] Refrigerant Circuit Diagram
1. Outdoor unit
(1) PUHY-P72, P96 models
21S4b
TH7

BV1

TH5

21S4a

ST1

HEX
CJ1
63H1
63HS1

CV

63LS
SV1a
O/S
CP1

ST3

ACC

TH4

CJ2

Comp

ST6
ST7
SV9

SV5b

CP2 TH2
LEV2a
LEV1

SCC

TH3

ST2

BV2

TH6
LEV2b

(2) PUHY-P120 models
21S4c

21S4b
21S4a

TH7

ST1

BV1

HEX
63H1
63HS1
CJ1

CV

63LS
TH5

SV1a
O/S
ST3

CP1

ACC

TH4
Comp
CJ2

ST6
ST7
SV9
SV5c

CP2 TH2

SV5b
TH3

LEV2a
SCC

LEV1

ST2

BV2

TH6
LEV2b

HWE08040

- 81 -

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]

[2] Principal Parts and Functions
1. Outdoor unit
Part
name

Symbols
(functions)

Compressor

MC1
(Comp1)

High
pressure
sensor

63HS1

Notes

Usage
Adjusts the amount of circulating
refrigerant by adjusting the operating frequency based on the operating pressure data

1) Detects high pressure
2) Regulates frequency and provides high-pressure protection

Specifications
P72 and 96 models
Low-pressure shell scroll
compressor
Wirewound resistance
20°C[68°F] :
0.268ohm(THMU)
0.981ohm(YHMU)
P120 model
Low-pressure shell scroll
compressor
Wirewound resistance
20°C[68°F] :
0.161ohm(THMU)
0.583ohm(YHMU)
63HS1
123

Connector

Pressure
0~4.15 MPa [601psi]
Vout 0.5~3.5V
0.071V/0.098 MPa [14psi]
Pressure [MPa]
=1.38 x Vout [V]-0.69
Pressure [psi]
=(1.38 x Vout [V] - 0.69) x 145

GND (Black)
Vout (White)
Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

1
2
3

Low
pressure
sensor

63LS

1) Detects low pressure
2) Provides low-pressure protection

63LS
123

Connector

Pressure
0~1.7 MPa [247psi]
Vout 0.5~3.5V
0.173V/0.098 MPa [14psi]
Pressure [MPa]
=0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283
Pressure [psi]
=(0.566 x Vout [V] - 0.283) x 145
1
2
3

Pressure
switch

HWE08040

63H1

1) Detects high pressure
2) Provides high-pressure protection

- 82 -

Check method

GND (Black)
Vout (White)
Vcc (DC5V) (Red)

4.15MPa[601psi] OFF setting

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
Part
name
Thermistor

Symbols
(functions)

Notes

TH4
(Discharge)

Usage
1) Detects discharge air temperature
2) Provides high-pressure protection

Specifications
Degrees Celsius
R 120 = 7.465k
R 25/120 = 4057
Rt =
7.465 exp 4057

0°C[32°F] :698kohm
10°C[50°F] :413kohm
20°C[68°F] :250kohm
30°C[86°F] :160kohm
40°C[104°F] :104kohm
50°C[122°F] : 70kohm
60°C[140°F] : 48kohm
70°C[158°F] : 34kohm
80°C[176°F] : 24kohm
90°C[194°F] :17.5kohm
100°C[212°F] :13.0kohm
110°C[230°F] : 9.8kohm
TH2

LEV 1 is controlled based on the
TH2, TH3, and TH6 values.
1) Controls frequency
2) Controls defrosting during
heating operation
3) Detects subcool at the heat
exchanger outlet and controls
LEV1 based on HPS data
and TH3 data

TH3
(Pipe
temperature)

TH7
(Outdoor temperature)

1) Detects outdoor air temperature
2) Controls fan operation

TH5

LEV2a and LEV2b are controlled
based on the 63LS and TH5 values.

TH6

Controls LEV1 based on TH2,
TH3, and TH6 data.

THHS
Inverter
heat sink temperature

Controls inverter cooling fan
based on THHS temperature

THBOX
Control box internal temperature detection

Solenoid
valve

1) High/low pressure bypass at
start-up and stopping, and
capacity control during lowload operation
2) High-pressure-rise prevention

SV5b
Heat
exchanger
capacity control

SV9

HWE08040

Resistance
check

1
273 t

1
393

Resistance
check

Degrees Celsius
R 0 = 15k
R 0/80 = 3460
R t = 15 exp 3460

1
273 t

1
273

0°C[32°F] :15kohm
10°C[50°F] :9.7kohm
20°C[68°F] :6.4kohm
25°C[77°F] :5.3kohm
30°C[86°F] :4.3kohm
40°C[104°F] :3.1kohm

Degrees Celsius
R 50
= 17k
R 25/120 = 4016
R t = 17 exp 4016

1
273

t

1
323

0°C[32°F] :161kohm
10°C[50°F] :97kohm
20°C[68°F] :60kohm
25°C[77°F] :48kohm
30°C[86°F] :39kohm
40°C[104°F] :25kohm

SV1a
Discharge-suction
bypass

SV5c

Check method

AC208-230V
Open while being powered/
closed while not being powered

Continuity
check with a
tester

Controls outdoor unit heat exchanger capacity

P120
model
only
High-pressure-rise prevention

- 83 -

Open while being powered/
closed while not being powered
GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
Part
name

Symbols
(functions)

Usage

Specifications

Check method

LEV1
(SC control)

Adjusts the amount of bypass flow
from the liquid pipe on the outdoor
unit during cooling

DC12V
Opening of a valve driven by a
stepping motor 0-480 pulses
(direct driven type)

Same as indoor LEV
The resistance
value differs
from that of the
indoor LEV.
(Refer to the
section "LEV
Troubleshooti
ng."(page 238
))

LEV2a
LEV2b
(Refrigerant
flow adjustment)

Adjusts refrigerant flow during
heating

DC12V
Opening of a valve driven by a
stepping motor 1400 pulses

Same as indoor LEV

Heater

CH11

Heats the refrigerant in the compressor

Cord heater AC230V
P72 and P96 models
1037 ohm 51W
P120 model
928 ohm 57W

Resistance
check

4-way
valve

21S4a

Changeover between heating and
cooling

AC208-230V
Dead: cooling cycle
Live: heating cycle

Continuity
check with a
tester

21S4b

1) Changeover between heating
and cooling
2) Controls outdoor unit heat exchanger capacity

Linear
expansion
valve

21S4c

HWE08040

Notes

P120
model
only

- 84 -

AC208-230V
Dead: cooling cycle
Outdoor unit heat exchanger
capacity at 100%
Live: heating cycle
Outdoor unit heat exchanger
capacity at 50%
or heating cycle

GB

[ VI Refrigerant Circuit ]
2. Indoor Unit
Part
Name

Symbol
(functions)

Linear
LEV
expansion valve

Notes

Usage

Specification

Check method

1) Adjusts superheat at the
indoor heat exchanger
outlet during cooling
2) Adjusts subcool at the
heat exchanger outlet of
the indoor unit during
cooling

DC12V
Opening of stepping motor
driving valve 0-(1400) pulses

Refer to the section
"Continuity Test with a
Tester".
Continuity between
white, red, and orange.
Continuity between
yellow, brown, and
blue.
White

M

Red
Orange
Yellow Brown Blue

Thermistor

HWE08040

TH1
(Suction air
temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

TH2
(Pipe temperature)

1) Indoor unit control (Frost
prevention, Hot adjust)
2) LEV control during heating operation (subcool
detection).

TH3
(Gas pipe
temperature)

LEV control during cooling operation (superheat detection)

TH4
Outdoor air
temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

Temperature
sensor (Indoor air temperature)

Indoor unit control (Thermo)

- 85 -

Resistance check
R0=15k
R0/80=3460
Rt =
15exp{3460(

1
1
)}
273+t 273

0°C [32°F]:15kohm
10°C [50°F] :9.7kohm
20°C [68°F]:6.4kohm
25°C [77°F] :5.3kohm
30°C [86°F] :4.3kohm
40°C [104°F] :3.1kohm

GB

- 86 -

VII Control
[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches ......................................................... 89
[2] Controlling the Outdoor Unit ............................................................................................ 96
[3] Operation Flow Chart..................................................................................................... 108

HWE08040

- 87 -

GB

- 88 -

[ VII Control ]
VII Control

[1] Functions and Factory Settings of the Dipswitches
1. Outdoor unit
(1) Control board

Function according to switch setting
Switch

Switch setting timing

Function
OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Units that require switch
setting
Note.2
OC

OS

C

C

C

C

B

B

A

-

SWU

1-2

Unit address setting

Set to 00 or 51-100 with the dial switch

Before power on

SW1

1-10

For self-diagnosis/
operation monitoring

Refer to the LED monitor display on the
outdoor unit board.

Anytime after power on

1

Centralized control
switch

Without connection
to the centralized
controller

With connection to
the centralized con- Before power on
troller

2

Deletion of connection information

Normal control

Deletion

(OC) Storage of IC/
OC error history

C

3

(OS) Storage of OS
error history

(OC) Deletion of IC/
Anytime after power on
OC error history
(When switched from OFF
(OS) Deletion of
to ON)
OS error history

C

Deletion of error history SW

-

Pump down mode

After being energized and
while the compressor is
stopped

A

Normal control

-

-

A

A

B

B

A

-

A

-

4

Pump down mode

5
6

-

-

Before power on

SW2

Anytime after power
on (When
switched
from OFF to
ON)

7

Forced defrost
Note 3

Normal control

Forced defrost
starts

10 minutes
after compressor
startup

8

Defrost timer setting
Note 3

50 minutes

90 minutes

Anytime after power on
(When switched from OFF
to ON)

9

Target evaporation
temperature setting

Depends on the setting combination with
the SW3-5 setting (Note 4)

10

Enable/disable refrigerant noise suppression function
during defrosting
(Fan operation
against leaky indoor
unit LEV)

Normal control

Refrigerant noise
suppression

Anytime after power on

Before power on

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.
2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.
B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.
C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.
3) Refer to "VII [2] Controlling the Outdoor Unit" for details.(page 96)
4) The table below shows the combination of SW2-9 and SW3-5 settings and the target evaporation temperature setting that
corresponds to each combination.
SW2-9
Switch
SW3-5

HWE08040

OFF

ON

OFF

0°C [32°F]

-4°C [25°F]

ON

-2°C [28°F]

-6°C [21°F]

- 89 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

Function according to switch setting
Switch

OFF

OC

OS

Anytime after power on

A

-

After power on and when
SW3-1 is on.

A

-

Anytime after power on

B

B

B

B

Anytime after power on

A

-

Anytime after power on

C

C

A

-

Before being energized

C

C

Before being energized

C

C

A

-

A

-

C

C

A

-

C

C

-

-

Function
OFF

1
2
3

4

SW3

Switch setting timing

Units that
require
switch setting
Note.2

5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2

ON

Test run mode: en- SW3-2 disabled
SW3-2 enabled
abled/disabled
Test run mode: ON/ Stops all ICs
Sends a test-run
OFF
signal to all IC
Defrost start tem-10°C [14°F]
-5°C [23°F]
perature Note 5
P72, P96
Defrost end tem10°C [50°F]
5°C [41°F]
perature Note 5
P120
7°C [45°F]
Target evaporation Depends on the setting combination with
temperature setting the SW2-9 setting (Note 4)
Temperature unit
°C
°F
setting
Target condensing
53°C [127°F]
temperature setting 49°C [120°F]
for heating
Outdoor
standard
Outdoor
high
static
Model setting
static pressure
pressure
High static pressure High static pressure
Model setting
60Pa
30Pa
Enable/disable high Normal operation
High sensible temperature operation
sensible temperamode
mode
ture operation
-

ON

Anytime after power on (except during defrost)

-

Before being energized
Anytime after being energized (except during initial startup mode.
Automatically cancelled 60 minutes after compressor startup)

3

Refrigerant amount
adjustment

Normal operation
mode

Refrigerant amount
adjust mode

4

Low-noise mode/
step demand
switching

Low-noise mode
Note 3

Step demand mode Before being energized

5

Automatic cooling/heating switchover (IC with
the minimum address)

Normal operation
mode

Automatic cooling/
heating switchover

6

Cumulative compressor operation
time data deletion

Cumulative comCumulative compressor operation
pressor operation
time data is retained. time data is deleted.

SW4

7
8
9
10

-

-

Before being energized
Anytime after power on
(when the unit is turned on)

-

-

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.
2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.
B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.
C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.
3) The noise level is reduced by controlling the compressor frequency and outdoor fan rotation speed.
Setting of CN3D is required.
4) The table below shows the combination of SW2-9 and SW3-5 settings and the target evaporation temperature setting that
corresponds to each combination.
SW2-9

Switch
SW3-5

OFF
ON

OFF
0°C [32°F]
-2°C [28°F]

ON
-4°C [25°F]
-6°C [21°F]

5) Refer to VII [2] Controlling the Outdoor Unit -7- Defrost Operation Control for details.(page 99)
HWE08040

- 90 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

Function according to switch setting
Switch

OFF
1
2
3
4

Model setting

5

Low-noise mode
selection

6
7

Model setting

SW5

8
9
10

Switch setting timing

Function

Capacity priority
mode
Note 3

Heating backup

Units that require switch
setting
Note.2

ON

OFF

ON

OC

OS

-

-

-

C

C

A

-

Low-noise mode

Before being energized

-

-

-

B

B

Ineffective

Effective

Any time after power on

A

-

1) Unless otherwise specified, leave the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may be set to OFF for a reason.
2) A: Only the switch on either the OC or OS needs to be set for the setting to be effective on both units.
B: The switches on both the OC and OS need to be set to the same setting for the setting to be effective.
C: The setting is effective for the unit on which the setting is made.
3) When set to the capacity priority mode and if the following conditions are met, the Low-noise mode will terminate, and the unit
will go back into the normal operation mode.
Cooling: Outside temperature is high or high pressure is high.
Heating: Outside temperature is low or low pressure is low.
(2) INV board
1) PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A, PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A
Functions are switched with the following connector.

Connector

Function

Function according to connector
Enabled

CN6 shortcircuit connector

Enabling/disabling the following error
detection functions;
ACCT sensor failure
(5301 Detail No. 115)
ACCT sensor circuit failure
(5301 Detail No.117)
IPM open/ACCT erroneous wiring
(5301 Detail No. 119)
Detection of ACCT erroneous wiring
(5301 Detail No.120)

Error detection enabled

Disabled

Setting timing
Enabled

Disabled

Anytime after power on
Error detection disable
(No load operation is possible.)

CN6 short-circuit connector is mated with the mating connector.
Leave the short-circuit connector on the mating connector during normal operation to enable error detection and protect the
equipment from damage.

HWE08040

- 91 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
2) PUHY-P120THMU-A

Switch

Function

Function according to switch
setting
OFF

SW1

1

Enabling/disabling the following error
detection functions;
ACCT/DCCT sensor failure
(5301 Detail No. 115, 116)
ACCT/DCCT sensor circuit failure
(5301 Detail No.117,118)
IPM open/Disconnected CNCT2
(5301 Detail No. 119)
Detection of erroneous wiring
(5301 Detail No.120)

Error detection enabled

ON

Switch setting timing
OFF

ON

Error detecAnytime after power on
tion disable
(No load operation is possible.)

2

-

-

-

-

-

3

-

-

-

-

-

4

-

-

-

-

-

5

-

-

-

-

-

6

-

-

-

-

-

All are set to OFF at factory shipment. Unless otherwise specified, set the switch to OFF where indicated by "-," which may
be set to a certain setting for a reason.
Leave SW1-1 to OFF during normal operation. If it is set to ON, errors cannot be detected and the unit may be damaged.

HWE08040

- 92 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
2. Function of the switch (Indoor unit)
(1) Dipswitches
1) SW1,3

Switch

SW1

Function according to switch setting

Function

Notes

1

Room temperature
detection position

2

Clogged filter detection

3

Filter check reminder time setting

4

Outside air intake

5

Remote display option

6

Humidifier control

OFF

ON

Indoor unit inlet

Built-in sensor on
the remote controller

Not available

Available

Forced heating operation
at OA temp of 5 C or below
Fan speed setting for
Heating Thermo-OFF

100h

2500h

Disabled

Enabled

Fan output

Thermo-ON signal

OFF

ON
Set to ON (built-in sensor on the remote controller)
on All Fresh (PEFY-VMH-F) model units

Always set to OFF on PKFY-AM model units

During heating operation Always on while in the heating mode

Fan speed setting for
Heating Thermo-OFF

7

Switch setting timing

Very Low

Low

Not available

Available

According to the
SW1-7 setting

Applicable to All Fresh model units
(PEFY-VMH-F) only

Preset speed

8
-

SW3

-

-

9

Self-recovery after power failure

Disabled

10

Power source start-stop

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

While the unit is stopped
(Remote controller OFF)

Applicable to All Fresh model units
(PEFY-VMH-F) only

1

Unit model selection

Heat pump

Cooling only

2

Louver

Not available

Available

3

Vane

Not available

Available

4

Vane swing function

Not available

Available

5

-

-

-

Vane angle limit setting
for cooling operation

Downblow B,C

Horizontal

Always set to Downblow B or C on
PKFY-VAM model units

Initial vane position

Enabled

Disabled

PLFY-VLMD model only

7

Automatic LEV value
conversion function

Not available

Available

8

Heating 4°C [7.2°F] up

Enabled

Disabled

Set to OFF on floor-standing
(PFFY) type units

9

SHm setting

2°C [3.6°F]

5°C [9°F]

The setting depends on the
model and type.

10

SCm setting

10°C [18°F]

15°C [27°F]

The setting depends on the
model and type.

6

Always set to OFF on PKFY-VAM model units

Note 1. Settings in the shaded areas are factory settings.(Refer to the table below for the factory setting of the switches whose factory settings are not indicated by the shaded cells.)
Note 2. If both SW1-7 and SW1-8 are set to ON, the fan remains stopped during heating Thermo-OFF.
To prevent incorrect temperature detection due to a build-up of warm air around the indoor unit, use the built-in temperature sensor on the remote controller (SW1-1)
instead of the one on the indoor unit inlet thermistor.
Note 3. By setting SW3-1, SW1-7, and SW1-8 to a certain configuration, the fan can be set to remain stopped during cooling Thermo-OFF. See the table below for details.
Switch setting

Fan speed during Thermo-OFF

SW3-1 SW1-7 SW1-8
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF
ON
OFF

ON

ON
OFF
ON

OFF
ON
OFF
ON

Heating

Cooling

Cooling-only/heat pump

Very Low
Low

Preset speed

Heat pump

Preset speed

Cooling-only

Preset speed
Stop
-

Stop

Stop

Stop

Heat pump

(2) Address switch
Actual indoor unit address setting varies in different systems. Refer to the installation manual for the outdoor unit for details
on how to make the address setting.
Each address is set with a combination of the settings for the 10's digit and 1's digit.
(Example)
When setting the address to "3", set the 1's digit to 3, and the 10's digit to 0.
When setting the address to "25", set the 1's digit to 5, and the 10's digit to 2.

HWE08040

- 93 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
3. Function of the switch 
(1) MA remote controller (PAR-20MAA)
The SW is located at the bottom of the remote controller under the cover. Operate the switches to perform the remote controller main/sub setting or other function settings. Normally, do not change the settings of switches other than the SW1 (main/
sub switching switch). (All the switches are set to "ON" at factory setting.)

ON

1

2

3

4

Switching switch

Switch

Function

ON

OFF

Remote controller
main/sub setting

Main

Sub

2

At power on of the
remote controller

Normal
startup

3

Cooling/heating display
set by automatic setting

4

Suction temperature display
(discharge temperature display)

1

Remote controller

Operation by switch settings

Switch setting timing

When two remote controllers are connected
to one group, set either of the remote
controllers to "Sub".

Before power on

Timer mode
startup

When the program timer (only few stock
products are available) is connected, set to
"Timer mode startup" to resume the operation
with timer mode after power is restored.

Before power on

Displayed

Not displayed

When the automatic mode is set and the
"Cooling"/"Heating" display is not necessary,
set to "Not displayed".

Before power on

Displayed

Not displayed

When the suction temperature (discharge
temperature) display is not necessary,
set to "Not displayed".

Before power on

The MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA) does not have the switches listed above. Refer to the installation manual for the function setting.

HWE08040

- 94 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) ME remote controller (PAR-F27MEA)
Set the address of the remote controller with the rotary switch.

4 56

78 9

78 9

4 56

10's digit 1's digit
(left)
(right)

01

23

23

78 9

23

01

01

4 56

01

23

78 9

Rotary switch

45 6

Remote controller unit
Example: In case of address 108

Address setting range

Setting method

Main remote controller

101-150

Add 100 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the
same group.

Sub remote controller

151-200

Add 150 to the smallest address of all the indoor units in the
same group.

Setting of rotary switch

Address No.

01-99*1

101-199 with the 100's digit automatically being set to 1*2

00

200

*1. At factory shipment, the rotary switch is set to 01.
*2. The address range that can be set with the ME remote controller is between 101 and 200. When the dials are set to
a number between 01 and 99, the 100's digit is automatically set to [1]. When the dials are set to 00, the 100's digit is
automatically set to [2].
To set addresses, use a precision slotted screw driver [2.0 mm [0.08 in] (w)], and do not apply than 19.6N.
The use of any other tool or applying too much load may damage the switch.

HWE08040

- 95 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

[2] Controlling the Outdoor Unit
-1- Outline of Control Method
The outdoor units are designated as OC, OS1 and OS2 in the order of capacity from large to small (if two or more units have
the same capacity, in the order of address from small to large).
The setting of outdoor unit can be verified by using the self-diagnosis switch (SW1).

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Display
The unit is designated as the OC: “oc” appears on the display.
The unit is designated as OS1: “oS-1” appears on the display
The unit is designated as OS2: “oS-2” appears on the display.

The OC determines the operation mode and the control mode, and it also communicates with the indoor units.
The OS exercises autonomous distributed control (over defrost, error detection, and actuator control etc.) according to the
operation/control mode signals that are sent from the OC.

-2- Startup sequence rotation
At the initial startup, outdoor units start up in the order of "OC, OS1 and OS2." After two or more hours of operation, the startup
sequence changes to "OS1, OS2 and OC" or "OS2, OC and OS1".
Startup sequence rotation is performed while all the indoor units are stopped. (Even after two hours of operation, startup sequence rotation is not performed while the compressor is in operation.)
Refer to [-12- Control at Initial Start-up] for the initial startup.
Performing startup sequence rotation does not change the basic operation of OC and OS. Only startup sequence is changed.
Startup sequence of the outdoor units can be checked with the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the OC.

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Display
OC→OS1→OS2: “oc” and the OC address appear alternately on the display.
OS1→OS2→OC: “oS-1” and the OS1 address appear alternately on the display.
OS2→OC→OS1: “oS-2” and the OS2 address appear alternately on the display.

-3- Initial Control
When the power is turned on, the initial processing of the microcomputer is given top priority.
During the initial processing, control processing of the operation signal is suspended. (The control processing is resumed after
the initial processing is completed. Initial processing involves data processing in the microcomputer and initial setting of each
of the LEV opening. This process will take up to 5 minutes.)
During the initial processing, the LED monitor on the outdoor unit's control board displays S/W version -> refrigerant type
-> heat pump -> cooling only and capacity -> and communication address in turn every second.

-4- Control at Start-up
The upper limit of frequency during the first 3 minutes of the operation is 50 Hz.
When the power is turned on, normal operation will start after the initial start-up mode (to be described later) has been completed (with a restriction on the frequency).

HWE08040

- 96 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-5- Bypass Control
Bypass solenoid valves (SV1a), which bypass the high- and low- pressure sides, perform the following functions.
(1) Bypass solenoid valve (SV1a) (ON = Open), (SV9) (ON = Open)
SV1a

Operation
ON

OFF

When starting-up the compressor of each
outdoor unit

ON for 4 minutes.

After the restoration of thermo or 3 minutes
after restart

ON for 4 minutes.

During cooling or heating operation with the
compressor stopped

Always ON.
Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2 MPa [29 psi] or less

After the operation has stopped

ON for 3 minutes.
Exception: OFF when 63HS1-63LS is 0.2 MPa [29 psi] or less

During defrost operation

ON

While the compressor is operating at the
When low pressure (63LS) drops
minimum frequency and when the low pres- below 0.23 MPa [33 psi].
sure (63LS) drops (3 or more minutes after
compressor startup)

When low pressure (63LS) exceeds 0.38 MPa [55 psi].

When high pressure (63HS1) rises

When 63HS1 is or below
3.43 MPa [497 psi] and 30 seconds
have passed

When 63HS1 exceeds
3.62 MPa [525 psi]

SV9

Operation
When high pressure (63HS1) rises during
the heating operation

ON

OFF

When 63HS1 exceeds 3.50MPa
[507psi]

When 63HS1 is or below 2.70Mpa
[391psi]

When startup or resuming operation after a
defrost cycle

ON for 5 minutes and goes OFF

Others

HWE08040

Always OFF

- 97 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-6- Compressor Frequency Control
Depending on the capacity required, the frequency of the compressor is controlled to keep constant evaporation temperature
(0°C [32°F] = 0.71 MPa [103 psi]) during cooling operation, and condensing temperature (49°C [120°F] = 2.88 MPa [418 psi])
during heating operation.
The table below summarizes the operating frequency ranges of the inverter compressor during normal operation.
The OS in the multiple-outdoor-unit system operates at the actual compressor frequency value that is calculated by the OS
based on the preliminary compressor frequency value that the OC determines.
Frequency/cooling (Hz)

Frequency/heating (Hz)

Max

Min

Max

Min

72 model

52

10

53

10

96 model

65

10

71

10

120 model

74

15

81

15

Model

The maximum frequency during heating operation is affected by the outdoor air temperature to a certain extent.
(1) Pressure limit
The upper limit of high pressure (63HS1) is preset, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency is decreased every 15
seconds.
The actuation pressure is when the high-pressure reading on 63HS1 is 3.58MPa[519psi].
(2) Discharge temperature limit
Discharge temperature (TH4) of the compressor in operation is monitored, and when it exceeds the upper limit, the frequency
is decreased every minute.
Operating temperature is 115°C [239°F].
(3) Periodic frequency control
Frequency control other than the ones performed at start-up, upon status change, and for protection is called periodic frequency control (convergent control) and is performed in the following manner.
Periodic control cycle
Periodic control is performed after the following time has passed
30 seconds after either compressor start-up or the completion of defrost operation
30 seconds after frequency control based on discharge temperature or pressure limit
The amount of frequency change
The amount of frequency change is controlled to approximate the target value based on the evaporation temperature (Te) and
condensing temperature (Tc).

HWE08040

- 98 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-7- Defrost Operation Control
(1) Starting the defrost operation
The defrost cycle starts when the pipe temperature (TH3), in the following table, or below has continuously been detected for
3 minutes after the integrated compressor operation time of 50 minutes have passed.
If 10 minutes have passed since compressor start-up or since the completion of defrost operation, forced defrost operation
will start by turning on the forced defrost switch (DIP SW2-7).
Even if the defrost prohibit timer is set to 90 minutes, the actual defrost prohibit time for the next operation will be 50 minutes
if defrosting took 12 minutes.
In the multiple-outdoor-unit system, all of the outdoor units that are in operation go into the defrost mode simultaneously. The
unit(s) that is stopped at the time defrost operation starts remains stopped.
TH3
Model
SW3 - 3 OFF

SW3 - 3 ON

72 model

- 10°C [14°F]

- 5°C [23°F]

96 model

- 10°C [14°F]

- 5°C [23°F]

120 model

- 10°C [14°F]

- 5°C [23°F]

(2) Defrost operation
Compressor frequency

Model

Compressor frequency

72 model

65 Hz

96 model

65 Hz

120 model

103 Hz

Outdoor unit fan

Stopped

SV1a

ON

SV5b, SV5c

ON

21S4a

OFF

21S4b, 21S4c

OFF

SV9

OFF

LEV1

0 pulses*1

LEV2a

1400 pulses

LEV2b

1400 pulses

*1. This value may be greater than 0 pulse depending on the 63LS and TH4 status.
(3) Stopping the defrost operation
The defrost cycle ends when 12 minutes have passed since the beginning of the cycle, or when the pipe temperature (TH3)
has been continuously detected for 4 minutes (when SW3-4 is set to OFF) or 2 minutes (when SW3-4 is set to ON) that exceeds the values in the table below.
The defrost cycle will not end for two minutes once started unless one of the following conditions is met : Pipe temperature
reaches 25°C [77°F] and SW3-4 is set to OFF OR =25+TH7°C [77°F+TH7] and SW3-4 is set to ON.
*1 (5°C [41°F]
25°C [77°F]).
In the multiple-outdoor-unit system, defrosting is stopped on all units at the same time.
TH3
Model
SW3 - 4 OFF

SW3 - 4 ON

72 model

10°C [50°F]

5°C [41°F]

96 model

10°C [50°F]

5°C [41°F]

120 model

7°C [45°F]

5°C [41°F]

(4) Problems during defrost operation
If a problem is detected during defrost operation, the operation will be stopped, and the defrost prohibition time based on the
integrated compressor operation time will be set to 20 minutes.
(5) Change in the number of operating indoor units during defrost operation
Even when there is a change in the number of operating indoor units during defrost operation, the operation will continue, and
an adjustment will be made after the completion of the defrost operation.
Defrost operation will be continued, even if the indoor units stop or under the Thermo-OFF conditions until it has run its course.

HWE08040

- 99 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-8- Refrigerant Recovery Control
Recovery of refrigerant is performed during heating operation to prevent the refrigerant from accumulating inside the unit while
it is stopped (unit in fan mode), or inside the indoor unit that is in cooling mode or in heating mode with thermo off. It is also
performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the outdoor heat exchanger.
It is also performed during cooling operation to prevent an excessive amount of refrigerant from accumulating in the outdoor
heat exchanger.
(1) During heating operation
Starting refrigerant recovery mode
The refrigerant recovery mode in heating starts when all of the following three conditions are met:
15 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery.
TH4 > 115°C [239°F]
Frequencies below 50 Hz
Refrigerant recovery
1) Refrigerant is recovered with the LEV on the applicable indoor unit (unit under stopping mode, fan mode, cooling, heating with
thermo off) being opened for 30 seconds.
Opening of LEV during refrigerant recovery
Opening of indoor unit LEV: 400 pulses

30 seconds

Initial opening of LEV

Start

Finish

2) Periodic capacity control of the outdoor units and periodic LEV control of the indoor units will be suspended during refrigerant
recovery operation; they will be performed after the recovery has been completed.

HWE08040

- 100 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) During cooling operation
Starting refrigerant recovery mode
The refrigerant recovery mode starts when all the following conditions are met:
30 minutes have passed since the completion of previous refrigerant recovery.
When the unit keeps running for 3 minutes in a row or more with high discharge temperature
TH4 > 105°C [221°F] or 63HS1 > 3.43 MPa [497 psi] (35 kg/cm2G) and SC0 > 10°C [18°F]
Refrigerant recovery
The opening of LEV1 is increased and periodic control begins again.

-9- Capacity Control of Outdoor Fan
(1) Control method
Depending on the capacity required, the rotation speed of the outdoor unit fan is controlled by the inverter, targeting a constant
evaporation temperature of (0°C [32°F]= 0.71 MPa [103 psi]) during cooling operation and constant condensing temperature
of (49°C [120°F]= 2.88 MPa [418 psi]) during heating operation.
The OS in the multiple-outdoor-unit system operates at the actual outdoor unit fan control value that is calculated by the OS
based on the preliminary outdoor unit fan control value that the OC determines.
(2) Control
Outdoor unit fan stops while the compressor is stopped (except in the presence of input from snow sensor).
The fan operates at full speed for 5 seconds after start-up.(Only when TH7<0°C [32°F])
The outdoor unit fan stops during defrost operation.

-10- Subcool Coil Control (Linear Expansion Valve )
The OC, OS1, and OS2 controls the subcool coil individually.
The LEV is controlled every 30 seconds to maintain constant the subcool at the outdoor unit heat exchanger outlet that is
calculated from the values of high pressure (63HS1) and liquid piping temperature (TH3), or the superheat that is calculated
from the values of low pressure (63LS) and the bypass outlet temperature (TH2) of the subcool coil.
LEV opening is controlled based on the values of the inlet (TH6) and the outlet (TH3) temperatures of the subcool coil, high
pressure (63HS1), and discharge temperature (TH4). In a single-outdoor-unit system, the LEV is closed (0) in the heating
mode, while the compressor is stopped, and during cooling Thermo-OFF. In a multiple-outdoor-unit system, the LEV closes
(0) during heating operation, while the compressor is stopped, or during cooling Thermo-OFF. The LEV opens to a specified
position when 15 minutes have passed after Thermo-OFF. (65 pulses)
The valve remains open at the preset position. (480 pulses)

-11- Refrigerant flow control (Linear expansion valve )
Refrigerant flow is controlled by each unit in the combined models during heating. Refrigerant flow control is performed by the
OC, OS1, and OS2 individually. The valve opens to a specified angle during cooling (Opening: 1400 pulses)
Valve opening is controlled based on the values of high pressure (63HS1), discharge temperature (TH4), low pressure(
63LS), and piping temperature (TH5).
The valve moves to the predetermined position while the unit is stopped.
The valve remains open at the preset position. (1400 pulses)

-12- Control at Initial Start-up
When started up for the first time before 12 hours have elapsed after power on, the unit goes into the initial startup mode.
At the completion of the initial operation mode on the OC, OS1, and OS2, they will go into the normal control mode.
1. Flowchart of initial operation
(1) P72, P96, P120 models
Initial startup mode starts.

50 F 60Hz
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

Initial startup mode complete

HWE08040

- 101 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) P144, P168, P192, P216, P240 models

Initial startup mode starts.

The compressor on the OC starts up.
F 60Hz

The total operating load of the indoor unit
after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above.
(*1 Qj 50)

No

Yes

The compressor on the OC remains in operation, and the
compressor on the OS starts up.

*2

The compressor on the OC starts up.
50 F 60Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (both OC and OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.
*3

Both the OC and OS stop.
The startup sequence of the OC and OS is rotated.

The compressor on the OS starts up.
50 F 60Hz (OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OS)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

*2
The air conditioning load is too small
for both the OC and the OS to
simultaneously stay in operation.

Initial startup mode complete

*3
The air conditioning load is
high enough for both OC and OS to
simultaneously stay in operation.

1

HWE08040

Qj:Total capacity (models) code
Refer to the VII [1] 2. (1) Dipswitches for the capacity code. (page 93)

- 102 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(3) P264, P288, P312, P336, P368 models
Initial startup mode starts.

The compressor on the OC starts up.
F 60Hz

No

The total operating load of the indoor unit
after 5 minutes of operation is P96 or above.
( *1 Qj 50)
Yes

The total operating load of the indoor unit after
5 minutes of operation is between P96 and P400.
(50 < *1 Qj< 200)

Yes

No

The compressor on the OS remains in operation, and the
compressors on the OS1 and OS2 start up.

*2

50 F 60Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or F < 50Hz (OC, OS1, and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The compressor on the OC remains in operation,
and the compressor on the OS1 starts up.

The compressor on the OC starts up.
*3
50 F 60Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OC)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

50 F 60Hz (both OC and OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (both OC and OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.
*4

*2
The air conditioning load is
too small for the OC, OS1,
and OS2 to simultaneously
stay in operation.
*3
The air conditioning load is
too small for both OC and
OS1, or OS1 and OS2 to
simultaneously stay in
operation.

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.

The startup sequence of the OC, OS1,
and OS2 is rotated.
(The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1, and OS2 is rotated.
(The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

The compressor on the OS1 remains in operation,
and the compressor on the OS2 starts up.
50 F 60Hz (both OS1 and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (both OS1 and OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

*4
The air conditioning load is
high enough for OC, OS1
and OS2 to simultaneously
stay in operation.

The compressor on the OS1 starts up.

*5

50 F 60Hz (OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OS1)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

The OC, OS1, and OS2 stop.
The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1, and OS2 is rotated.
(The startup sequence of the OC,
OS1 and OS2 is changed.)

*5
The air conditioning load is
high enough for both OC
and OS1, or OS1 and OS2
to simultaneously stay in
operation.

The compressor on the OS2 starts up.
50 F 60Hz (OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 35 minutes.
or
F < 50Hz (OS2)
Completed in the integrated operation time of 90 minutes.

Initial startup mode complete

1

HWE08040

Qj:Total capacity (models) code
Refer to the VII [1] 2. (1) Dipswitches for the capacity code. (page 93)

- 103 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-13- Emergency Operation Mode
1. Problems with the outdoor unit
Emergency operation mode is a temporary operation mode in which the outdoor unit that is not in trouble operates when one
of the outdoor units in the P144 through P240 models is in trouble or when one or two of the outdoor units in the P264 througt
P360 models are in trouble.
This mode can be started by performing an error reset via the remote controller.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Starting the emergency operation
When an error occurs, the error source and the error code will be displayed on the display on the remote controller.
The error is reset using the remote controller.
If an error code appears that permits an emergency operation in step 1) above, (See the table below.), the retry operation
starts.
4) If the same error is detected during the retry operation (step 3 above), an emergency operation can be started by resetting
the error via the remote controller.
Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS)
Trouble source

Compressor
Fan motor
Inverter

Thermistor

TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7

Power

Error codes that permit an
emergency operation

Error code description

0403
4220, 4225
4230
4240
4250, 4255
5110
5301
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107

Serial communication error
Bus voltage drop
Heatsink overheat protection
Overload protection
Overcurrent relay trip
Heatsink temperature sensor failure (THHS)
Current sensor/circuit failure
Subcool heat exchanger bypass outlet temperature sensor failure
Pipe temperature sensor failure
Discharge temperature sensor failure
Accumulator inlet temperature sensor failure
Subcool heat exchanger liquid outlet sensor failure
Outside air temperature sensor failure

4102

Open phase

4115

Power supply sync signal abnormality

Emergency operation pattern (2 outdoor units)
OC failure
pattern
Trouble
OC
Normal
OS
Emergency Cooling Permitted
operation Heating Permitted
Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OS failure
pattern
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

60%

Emergency operation pattern (3 outdoor units)

OC
OS1
OS2
Emergency
operation

Cooling
Heating

Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OC failure
pattern

OS1 failure
pattern

OS2 failure
pattern

Trouble
Normal
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

60%

OC, OS1 failure OC, OS2 failure OS1, OS2 failure
pattern
pattern
pattern
Trouble
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Trouble
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

40%

(Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity,
some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF.

HWE08040

- 104 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Ending the emergency operation
1) End conditions
When one of the following conditions is met, emergency operation stops, and the unit makes an error stop.
When the integrated operation time of compressor in cooling mode has reached four hours.
When the integrated operation time of compressor in heating mode has reached two hours.
When an error is detected that does not permit the unit to perform an emergency operation.
2) Control at or after the completion of emergency operation
At or after the completion of emergency operation, the compressor stops, and the error code reappears on the remote controller.
If another error reset is performed at the completion of an emergency mode, the unit repeats the procedures in section (1)
above.
To stop the emergency mode and perform a current-carrying operation after correcting the error, perform a power reset.
2. Communication circuit failure or when some of the outdoor units are turned off
This is a temporary operation mode in which the outdoor unit that is not in trouble operates when communication circuit failure
occurs or when some of the outdoor units are turned off.
(1) Starting the emergency operation (When the OC is in trouble)
1) When an error occurs, the error source and the error code appear on the display on the remote controller.
2) Reset the error via the remote controller to start an emergency operation.
Precautions before servicing the unit
When the OC is in trouble, the OS temporarily takes over the OC's function and performs an emergency operation. When this
happens, the indoor unit connection information are changed.
In a system that has a billing function, a message indicating that the billing system information has an error may appear on
the TG-2000A. Even if this message appears, do not change (or set) the refrigerant system information on the TG-2000A.
After the completion of an emergency operation, the correct connection information will be restored.
(2) Starting the emergency operation (When the OS is in trouble)
1) A communication error occurs. -> An emergency operation starts in approximately six minutes.
Error codes that permit an emergency operation (Applicable to both OC and OS)
Trouble source
Circuit board failure or the power
to the outdoor units is off

HWE08040

Error codes that permit an
emergency operation
6607
6608

- 105 -

Error code description
No acknowledgement error
No response error

GB

[ VII Control ]
Emergency operation pattern (2 outdoor units)

OC
OS
Emergency Cooling
operation Heating
Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OC failure OS failure
pattern
pattern
Trouble Normal
Normal Trouble
Permitted Permitted
Permitted Permitted
Capacity that matches
the total capacity of the
operable outdoor units

Emergency operation pattern (3 outdoor units)

OC
OS1
OS2
Emergency
operation

Cooling
Heating

Maximum total capacity
of indoor units (Note 1)

OC failure
pattern

OS1 failure
pattern

OS2 failure
pattern

Trouble
Normal
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

OC, OS1 failure OC, OS2 failure OS1, OS2 failure
pattern
pattern
pattern
Trouble
Trouble
Normal
Permitted
Permitted

Trouble
Normal
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

Normal
Trouble
Trouble
Permitted
Permitted

Capacity that matches the total capacity of the operable outdoor units

(Note 1) If an attempt is made to put into operation a group of indoor units whose total capacity exceeds the maximum allowable capacity,
some of the indoor units will go into the same condition as Thermo-OFF.

(3) Ending the emergency operation
When communication is restored, the emergency mode is cancelled, and the units go into the normal operation mode.

-14- Operation Mode
(1) Indoor unit operation mode
The operation mode can be selected from the following 5 modes using the remote controller.
1

Cooling mode

2

Heating mode

3

Dry mode

4

Fan mode

5

Stopping mode

(2) Outdoor unit operation mode
1

Cooling mode

All indoor units in operation are in cooling mode.

2

Heating mode

All indoor units in operation are in heating mode.

3

Stopping mode

All indoor units are in fan mode or stopping mode.

When the outdoor unit is performing a cooling operation, the operation mode of the connected indoor units that are not in the
cooling mode (Stopped, Fan, Thermo-OFF) cannot be changed to heating from the remote controller. If this attempt is mode,
"Heating" will flash on the remote controller. The opposite is true when the outdoor unit is performing a heating operation. (The
first selection has the priority.)

HWE08040

- 106 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

-15- DEMAND Control
Cooling/heating operation can be prohibited (Thermo-OFF) by an external input to the indoor units.

When DIP SW4-4 is set to ON, the 4-step DEMAND control is enabled.
Eight-step demand control is possible in the system with two outdoor units.
Twelve-step demand control is possible in the system with three outdoor units.
Refer to Chapter II [3] 2. (7) "Various types of control using input-output signal connector on the outdoor unit (various connection options)" for details.(page 22)

HWE08040

- 107 -

GB

[ VII Control ]

[3] Operation Flow Chart
1. Mode determination flowchart
(1) Indoor unit (cooling, heating, dry, fan mode)

Start
Normal operation
Breaker
turned on

Error

NO

Unit in the stopped state

YES
1
Operation SW
turned on

From outdoor unit

YES

NO
1. Protection function
self-holding cancelled.
*Note 1
2. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.
Remote controller
display lit off

*Note 2
NO
Error mode
YES

YES

Operation mode
Auxiliary heater
ON

NO
1. Auxiliary heater OFF
2. Low fan speed for
1 minute

YES

3-minute
drain pump ON

Error stop

Error display

Cooling mode

Heating mode

Dry mode

Fan mode

Self-holding of
protection function

Cooling display

Heating display

Dry display

Fan display

FAN stop

Drain pump
ON
NO

Error command
to outdoor unit

Indoor unit LEV
fully closed.

*Note 1

*Note 3
YES
Prohibition
NO

Refer to 2-(1)
Cooling operation.

*Note 3
YES

*Note 3
YES

Prohibition

Prohibition

NO

NO

Refer to 2-(2)
Heating operation.

Refer to 2-(3)
for dry operation.

Fan operations

Prohibition
"Blinking display on
the remote controller"

Operation command to outdoor unit (to 2 )

*Note 1. Indoor unit LEV fully closed : Opening 41.
*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the outdoor unit side. If some of the indoor units are
experiencing a problem (except water leakage), only those indoor units that are experiencing the problems will stop.
If the outdoor unit is experiencing a problem, all connected indoor units will stop.
*Note 3. The operation will be prohibited when the set cooling/heating mode is different from that of the outdoor unit.

HWE08040

- 108 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Outdoor unit (cooling and heating modes)

Start

Normal operation
Error

NO

Breaker
turned on

Unit in the stopped state

YES
"HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on
the remote controller
NO

*Note 1
Indoor units
registered to the
remote controller
YES

NO
1. Protection function self-holding cancelled.
2. LEV1 fully closed.

2

From indoor unit

Operation
command

YES
Operation
mode

Cooling / Heating

*Note 2
Error mode

YES
Error stop

NO
1. 72C OFF
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. Fan stop
4. All solenoid valves OFF

72C ON
*Note 3
Operation
mode

Refer to Cooling/Dry
Operation 2-(1) and 2-(3)

Error display on the
outdoor unit LED
Self-holding of
protection function

Error command to
indoor unit

Refer to heating
Operation 2-(2).

Operation command to indoor unit To 1 .

*Note 1. For about 3 minutes after power on, search for the indoor unit address, for the remote controller address,

and for the group information will start. During this, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" blinks on the display of the remote
controller. When the indoor unit to be controlled by the remote controller is missing, "HO" / "PLEASE WAIT" keeps
blinking on the display of the remote controller even after 3 or more minutes after power on.
*Note 2. The system may go into the error mode on either the indoor unit or the outdoor unit side. The outdoor stops only
when all of the connected indoor units are experiencing problems. The operation of even a single indoor unit will
keep the outdoor unit running. The error will be indicated on the LED display.
*Note 3. The outdoor unit operates according to the operation mode commanded by the indoor unit. However, when the
outdoor unit is running a cooling operation, come of the operating indoor units will stop, or the operation of these
indoor units will be prohibited even when the indoor unit mode is switched from fan mode to heating mode.
This also applies when the outdoor unit is running a heating operation.

HWE08040

- 109 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
2. Operations in each mode
(1) Cooling operation

Cooling operation

Normal operation
During test run mode

4-way valve OFF

Indoor unit fan
operation

Test run mode
ON

Unit in the stopped state

*Note 1

YES

NO
NO
Thermostat ON

YES
YES

3-minute restart
prevention

NO
1. Inverter output 0Hz
2. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1
LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening
3. All solenoid valves OFF
4. Outdoor unit fan stop
5. 72C OFF

1. Inverter frequency control
2. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 control
LEV2a, LEV2b fully opened
3. Solenoid valve control
4. Outdoor unit fan control
5. 72C control

*Note 1. The indoor fan operates at the set notch under cooling mode regardless of the ON/OFF state of the thermostat.

HWE08040

- 110 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(2) Heating operation

Normal operation
Defrost operation
Heating operation

Unit in the stopped state

*Note 1,2
Defrost
operation

During test run mode

YES

NO
4-way valve ON

Test run mode
ON

4-way valve OFF

1. Indoor unit fan stops
2. Inverter defrost frequency control
3. Indoor unit LEV fully closed.
4. Solenoid valve control
5. Outdoor unit fan stop
6. LEV1 control
7. LEV2a, LEV2b fully opened.
8. 72C control

YES

NO
NO
Thermostat ON

YES
YES

Stopping the
defrost operation

3-minute restart
prevention

YES

NO
1. Indoor unit fan operation at
Very Low speed
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 Fully closed
LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening
4. All solenoid valves OFF
5. Outdoor unit fan stop
6. 72C OFF

*Note 1,2
NO

1. Indoor/outdoor unit fan control
2. Inverter frequency control
3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1,LEV2a, LEV2b control
4. Solenoid valve control
5. 72C control

Stopping the defrost
operation

Return to heating
operation

1) When outdoor unit starts defrosting, it transmits defrost operations command to indoor unit, and the indoor unit start defrosting
operations. Similarly when defrosting operation stops, indoor unit returns to heating operation after receiving defrost end command of outdoor unit.
2) Defrost end condition: 12 or more minutes must pass after defrost operation or outdoor unit piping temperature.
Refer to "-7-. Defrost operation control" of [2] Controlling the Outdoor Unit for the temperature.

HWE08040

- 111 -

GB

[ VII Control ]
(3) Dry operation

Dry operation

Normal operation
Thermostat ON

4-way valve OFF

Test run mode
ON

Unit in the stopped state

YES
*Note 2

NO
Thermostat ON
NO

Suction temperature
18°C[64°F]

YES
*Note 1
1. Indoor unit fan stop
2. Inverter output 0Hz
3. Indoor unit LEV, LEV1 fully closed.
LEV2a, LEV2b rated opening.
4. Solenoid valve OFF
5. Outdoor unit fan stop
6. 72C OFF

1. Outdoor unit (compressor)
intermittent operation
2. Indoor unit fan intermittent operations
(Synchronized with the compressor:
low speed, OFF operations)

1 or 2

*Note 1.When the indoor unit inlet temperature exceeds 18°C [64°F], the outdoor unit (compressor) and the
indoor unit fan start the intermittent operation simultaneously. When the indoor unit inlet temperature
becomes 18°C [64°F],or less, the fan always runs (at low speed). The outdoor unit, the indoor unit,
and the solenoid valve operate in the same way as they do in the cooling operation when the compressor
is turned on.
*Note 2.Thermostat is always kept on during test run mode, and indoor and outdoor unit intermittent operation
(ON) time is a little longer than that of normal operation.

HWE08040

- 112 -

GB

VIII Test Run Mode
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]

HWE08040

Items to be checked before a Test Run ......................................................................... 115
Test Run Method ........................................................................................................... 116
Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount ......................................................... 117
Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount .................................................................................. 117
Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode................................................................................... 120
The following symptoms are normal. ............................................................................. 122
Standard Operation Data (Reference Data) .................................................................. 123

- 113 -

GB

- 114 -

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
VIII Test Run Mode

[1] Items to be checked before a Test Run
(1) Check for refrigerant leak and loose cables and connectors.
(2) Measure the insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground with a 500V megger and
make sure it reads at least 1.0Mohm.
Do not operate the unit if the insulation resistance is below 1.0Mohm.
Do not apply megger voltage to the terminal block for transmission line. Doing so will damage the controller board.
The insulation resistance between the power supply terminal block and the ground could go down to close to 1Mohm immediately after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant
in the compressor.
If insulation resistance reads at least 1Mohm, by turning on the main power and powering the crankcase heater for at least
12 hours, the refrigerant in the compressor will evaporate and the insulation resistance will go up.
Do not measure the insulation resistance of the terminal block for transmission line for the unit remote controller.

(3) Check that the valve on the gas pipe and liquid pipe are fully open.
Securely tighten the cap.
(4) Check the phase sequence and the voltage of the power supply.
(5) [When a transmission booster is connected]
Turn on the transmission booster before turning on the outdoor units.
If the outdoor units are turned on first, the connection information for the refrigerant circuit may not be properly recognized.
In case the outdoor units are turned on before the transmission booster is turned on, perform a power reset on the outdoor
units after turning on the power booster.
(6) Turn on the main power to the unit at least 12 hours before test run to power the crankcase heater.
Insufficient powering time may result in compressor damage.
(7) When a power supply unit is connected to the transmission line for centralized control, perform a test run with the
power supply unit being energized. Leave the power jumper connector on CN41 as it is (factory setting).

HWE08040

- 115 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[2] Test Run Method
The figure shows an MA remote controller (PAR-21MAA).

ON/OFF button

Set Temperature buttons
Down

Fan Speed button

Up
TIME SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
TIMER
Hr
ON
AFTER

AFTER OFF

ERROR CODE

FUNCTION
FILTER

FC

FC

WEEKLY
SIMPLE
AUTO OFF

ONLY1Hr.

Operation Mode button

TEMP.

MENU
BACK

Louver button
Operation button)
(

MONITOR/SET

PAR-21MAA

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

FILTER

DAY

CHECK TEST

OPERATION

CLOCK

Test Run button

CLEAR

Vertical Air Direction button

To preceding
operation number.
Ventilation button
Operation button)
(
To next operation
number.

Operation procedures
Turn on the main power.

"PLEASE WAIT" appears on the LCD for up to five minutes. Leave
the power on for 12 hours. (Energize the crankcase heater.)

Press the Test button twice.

Operation mode display "TEST RUN" and OPERATION MODE are
displayed alternately.

Press the Operation Mode button.

Make sure that the air is blowing out.

Switch to cooling (or heating) operation by pressing the Operation Mode button.
Make sure that cold (or warm) air blows out.
Press the Fan Speed button.

Make sure that the fan speed changes with each pressing of the button.

Change the air flow direction by pressing the Vertical Air Direction button

or the Louver button.

Make sure that the air flow direction changes with each pressing of the button.
Confirm the operation of outdoor unit fan.
Confirm the operation of all interlocked equipment, such as ventilation equipment.
Cancel the test run by pressing the ON/OFF button.

Stop

Note 1: Refer to the following pages if an error code appears on the remote controller or when the unit malfunctions.
2: The OFF timer will automatically stop the test run after 2 hours.
3: The remaining time for the test run will be displayed in the time display during test run.
4: The temperature of the liquid pipe on the indoor unit will be displayed in the room temperature display window on the remote
controller during test run.
5: On some models, "NOT AVAILABLE" may appear on the display when the Vane Control button is pressed. This is normal.
6: If an external input is connected, perform a test run using the external input signal.

HWE08040

- 116 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[3] Operating Characteristic and Refrigerant Amount
It is important to have a clear understanding of the characteristics of refrigerant and the operating characteristics of air conditioners
before attempting to adjust the refrigerant amount in a given system.
1. Operating characteristic and refrigerant amount
The following table shows items of particular importance.
1) During cooling operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the smallest when all indoor units are in operation.
2) During heating operation, the amount of refrigerant in the accumulator is the largest when all indoor units are in operation.
3) General tendency of discharge temperature
Discharge temperature tends to rise when the system is short on refrigerant.
Changing the amount of refrigerant in the system while there is refrigerant in the accumulator has little effect on the discharge
temperature.
The higher the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise.
The lower the pressure, the more likely it is for the discharge temperature to rise.
4) When the amount of refrigerant in the system is adequate, the compressor shell temperature is 10 to 60°C [18 to 108°F] higher
than the low pressure saturation temperature (Te).
-> If the temperature difference between the compressor shell temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is
smaller than 5°C [9°F], an overcharging of refrigerant is suspected.

[4] Adjusting the Refrigerant Amount
1. Symptoms
Overcharging or undercharging of refrigerant can cause the following symptoms:
Before attempting to adjust the amount of refrigerant in the system, thoroughly check the operating conditions of the system.
Then, adjust the refrigerant amount by running the unit in the refrigerant amount adjust mode.
The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1500 (overcharged refrigerant) on
the controller.

Overcharged refrigerant

The operating frequency does not reach the set frequency, and there is a problem with
performance.

Insufficient refrigerant amount

The system comes to an abnormal stop, displaying 1102 (abnormal discharge temperature) on the controller.

2. Amount of refrigerant
(1) To be checked during operation
Operate all indoor units in either cooling-only or heating-only mode, and check such items as discharge temperature, subcooling, low pressure, suction temperature, and shell bottom temperature to estimate the amount of refrigerant in the system.
Symptoms

Conclusion

Discharge temperature is high. (Normal discharge temperature is below 95°C [203°F].)
Low pressure is unusually low.

Slightly undercharged refrigerant

Suction superheat is large. (Normal suction superheat is less than 20°C [36°F].)
Compressor shell bottom temperature is high. (The difference between the compressor shell
bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is greater than 60°C [108°F].)
Discharge superheat is small. (Normal discharge superheat is greater than 10°C [18°F].)
Compressor shell bottom temperature is low. (The difference between the compressor shell bottom temperature and low pressure saturation temperature (Te) is less than 5°C [9°F].)

HWE08040

- 117 -

Slightly overcharged
refrigerant

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3. Amount of refrigerant to be added
The amount of refrigerant that is shown in the table below is factory-charged to the outdoor units.
The amount necessary for extended pipe (field piping) is not included and must be added on site.
Outdoor unit model

P72

P96

P120

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in
the outdoor unit (kg)

9.0

9.0

11.5

Amount of pre-charged refrigerant in
the outdoor unit [lbs-oz]

19-13

19-13

25-6

(1) Calculation formula
The amount of refrigerant to be added depends on the size and the length of field piping. (unit in m[ft])
Amount of added refrigerant (kg) = (0.29x L1) + (0.2 x L2) + (0.12 x L3) + (0.06 x L4) + (0.024 x L5) +ǩ
Amount of added refrigerant (oz) = (3.12x L1' ) +(2.15 x L2' ) + (1.29 x L3' ) + (0.65 x L4' ) + (0.26 x L5' ) + ǩ
L1 : Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe (m)
L2 : Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe (m)
L3 : Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe (m)
L4 : Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe (m)
L5 : Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe (m)
ǩ, ǩ' : Refer to the table below.

L1'
L2'
L 3'
L 4'
L 5'

Total capacity of
connected indoor units

ǩ(kg)

ǩ'(oz)

-

27

2.0

71

28

-

54

2.5

89

55

-

126

3.0

106

127

-

144

3.5

124

145

-

180

4.5

159

181

-

234

5.0

177

235

-

273

6.0

212

274

-

307

8.0

283

308

-

342

9.0

318

343

-

411

10.0

353

412

-

480

12.0

424

481

-

14.0

494

: Length of ø19.05 [3/4"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø15.88 [5/8"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø12.7 [1/2"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø9.52 [3/8"] liquid pipe [ft]
: Length of ø6.35 [1/4"] liquid pipe[ft]

Round up the calculation result to the nearest 0.1kg. (Example: 18.04kg to 18.1kg)
Round up the calculation result in increments of 4oz (0.1kg) or round it up to the nearest 1oz.
(Example: 178.21Q\ to 179oz)

HWE08040

- 118 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Example: PUHY-P144Y(T)SHMU-A

9.52
(3 m)

9.52
(1 m)

9.52 (10 m)
15.88 (10 m)

×

Liquid
separator

9.52
(10 m)

9.52
(20 m)

9.52
(10 m)

9.52
(10 m)

6.35
(10 m)

15.88 (30 m)
96
model

[3/8"]
[9 ft]

48
model

[3/8"]
[3 ft]

30
model

24
model

06
model

[3/8"][32 ft]
[3/4"] [32 ft]

×

Liquid
separator
[3/8"]
[65 ft]

[3/8"]
[32 ft]

[3/8"]
[32 ft]

[3/8"]
[32 ft]

[1/4"]
[32 ft]

[3/4"][98 ft]
96
model

48
model

30
model

24
model

06
model

(3) Sample calculation
All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes.
15.88 : 30 m + 10 m = 40 m
9.52 : 3 m + 1m + 10 m + 10 m + 20 m + 10 m + 10 m = 64 m
6.35 : 10 m
According to the above formula
Amount of refrigerant to be charged (kg) = (0.2 X 40) + (0.06 X 64) + (0.024 X 10) + 5.0 = 17.08kg
The calculation result would be 17.08, and it is rounded up to the nearest 0.1.
The final result will be as follows:
Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 17.1kg
All the pipes in the figure are liquid pipes.
[3/4"] : [98 ft] + [32 ft] = [130 ft]
[3/8"] : [9 ft] + [3 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] + [65 ft] + [32 ft] + [32 ft] = [205 ft]
[1/4"] : [32 ft]
According to the above formula
Amount of refrigerant to be charged (oz) = (2.15 X 130) + (0.65 X 205) + (0.26 X 32) + 177 = 598.07oz
The calculation result would be 598.07 oz, and it is rounded up to the nearest 1 oz.
The final result will be as follows:
Amount of refrigerant to be charged = 599 oz

CAUTION
Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.
If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may
result in performance loss.

HWE08040

- 119 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[5] Refrigerant Amount Adjust Mode
1. Procedures
Follow the procedures below to add or extract refrigerant as necessary depending on the operation mode.
When the function switch (SW4-3) on the main board on the outdoor unit (OC only) is turned to ON, the unit goes into the
refrigerant amount adjust mode, and the following sequence is followed.
SW4-3 on the OS is invalid, and the unit will not go into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.
Operation
When the unit is in the refrigerant amount adjust mode, the LEV on the indoor unit does not open as fully as it normally does during cooling operation to secure subcooling.
1) Adjust the refrigerant amount based on the values of TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc, following the flowchart below. Check the TH4,
TH3, TH6, and Tc values on the OC, OS1, and OS2 by following the flowchart. The TH4, TH3, TH6, and Tc values can be
displayed by setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the main board on the OC, OS1, and OS2.
2) There may be cases when the refrigerant amount may seem adequate for a short while after starting the unit in the refrigerant
amount adjust mode but turn out to be inadequate later on (when the refrigerant system stabilizes).
When the amount of refrigerant is truly adequate.
TH3-TH6 on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or above and SH on the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F].
The refrigerant amount may seem adequate at the moment, but may turn out to be inadequate later on.
TH3-TH6 on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less and SH on the indoor unit is 5°C [9°F] or less.
Wait until the TH3-TH6 reaches 5°C [9°F] or above and the SH of the indoor unit is between 5 and 15°C [9 and 27°F] to
determine that the refrigerant amount is adequate.
3) High pressure must be at least 2.0MPa[290psi] to enable a proper adjustment of refrigerant amount to be made.
4) Refrigerant amount adjust mode automatically ends 90 minutes after beginning. When this happens, by turning off the SW43 and turning them back on, the unit will go back into the refrigerant amount adjust mode.

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH4
1 2 3 4 5

6

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH3

7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5

ON

Self-diagnosis swithes on TH6
1 2 3 4 5

6

7 8 9 10

Self-diagnosis swithes on Tc

7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5

ON

HWE08040

6

ON

6

7 8 9 10

ON

- 120 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

Start
Turn on SW4-3 on the OC.

YES
NO

Put all indoor units in the test run mode
and run the units in cooling mode.

Has the initial start-up
mode been completed?

*Refer to the previous page for *Notes 1-4 in the chart.

NO

YES
Has it been at least
30 minutes since
start up?

NO

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1,
OS2 at or below 100°C [212°F]?
Note 1

NO

YES
Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the lowpressure side.

YES

Has the operating frequency
of the compressor on the OC, OS1,
and OS2 become stable?
Note 3

NO

YES
Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after
adjusting the refrigerant amount to
determine its adequacy.
Note 2

Does 8°C [14.4°F] Tc-TH3 12°C [21.6°F] hold true?
(Use the largest “Tc - TH3” value of the
OC, OS1, and OS2.)

NO

Note 1

YES
Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

NO

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes
after adjusting the refrigerant amount
and check(Tc-TH3) Note 2

Does Tc-TH6 20°C [36°F] hold true?
(Check this item on the unit whose “Tc – TH3” value was
used in the step above.)
Note 1

YES

Does the following hold true?
Tc-TH3 8°C [14.4°F]

NO

YES

Keep the unit running for 5 minutes after adjusting the
refrigerant amount to determine its adequacy. Note 2
Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

NO

Is the TH4 value of the OC, OS1,
OS2 at or below 95°C [203°F]

Gradually add refrigerant from
the service port on the low
pressure side.

Gradually draw out
refrigerant from the service
port on the low pressure side.

YES

Adjustment complete
Turn off SW4-3 on the OC.
Note 4

CAUTION
Do not release the extracted refrigerant into the air.

CAUTION
Charge liquid refrigerant (as opposed to gaseous refrigerant) into the system.
If gaseous refrigerant is charged into the system, the composition of the refrigerant in the cylinder will change and may
result in performance loss.

HWE08040

- 121 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[6] The following symptoms are normal.

Symptoms

Remote controller
display

The indoor unit does not start
after starting cooling (heating)
operation.

"Cooling (heating)"
icon blinks on the
display.

The auto vane adjusts its position by itself.
Normal display

Cause
The unit cannot perform a heating (cooling) operation when other indoor
units are performing a cooling (heating) operation.
After an hour of cooling operation with the auto vane in the vertical position, the vane may automatically move into the horizontal position.
Louver blades will automatically move into the horizontal position while
the unit is in the defrost mode, pre-heating stand-by mode, or when the
thermostat triggers unit off.

The fan stops during heating
operation.

Defrost

The fan keeps running after
the unit has stopped.

Unlit

When the auxiliary heater is turned on, the fan operates for one minute
after stopping to dissipate heat.

STAND BY

The fan operates at extra low speed for 5 minutes after it is turned on or
until the pipe temperature reaches 35°C[95°F], then it operates at low
speed for 2 minutes, and finally it operates at the set speed.
(Pre-heating stand-by)

The fan speed does not reach
the set speed when operation
switch is turned on.
When the main power is
turned on, the display shown
on the right appears on the indoor unit remote controller for
5 minutes.
The drain pump keeps running after the unit has
stopped.

"HO" or "PLEASE
WAIT" icons blink
on the display.

Unlit

The drain pump is running
while the unit is stopped.
Indoor unit and BC controller
make noise during cooling/
heating changeover.
Sound of the refrigerant flow is
heard from the indoor unit immediately after starting operation.
Warm air sometimes comes
out of the indoor units that are
not in the heating mode.

HWE08040

The fan remains stopped during defrost operation.

The system is starting up. Wait until the blinking display of "HO" or
"PLEASE WAIT" go off.

The drain pump stays in operation for three minutes after the unit in the
cooling mode is stopped.
When drain water is detected, the drain pump goes into operation even
while the unit is stopped.
This noise is made when the refrigerant circuit is reversed and is normal.

Normal display

Normal display

Normal display

This is caused by the transient instability of the refrigerant flow and is normal.

This is due to the fact that the LEVs on some of the indoor units are kept
slightly open to prevent the refrigerant in the indoor units that are not operating in the heating mode from liquefying and accumulating in the compressor. It is part of a normal operation.

- 122 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]

[7] Standard Operation Data (Reference Data)
1. Single unit
(1) Cooling operation
Outdoor unit model
Operation
PUHY-P72THMU-A

PUHY-P96THMU-A

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]

2

2

2

2

36/36

48/48

5 [16-3/8 ]

5 [16-3/8 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

25 [82]

25 [82]

-

Hi

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

11 [24]

11 [24]

Electric current

A

14.6

23.4

Voltage

V

230

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

52

65

325/325

387/387

80

100

1400

1400

2.59/10.96 [376/139]

2.83/0.84 [410/122]

Ambient
temperature

Indoor
DB/WB
Outdoor
No. of connected
units

Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

Unit
No. of units in operation
Model

-

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed
Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

Outdoor
unit

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

69 [156]

74 [165]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

44 [111]

46 [115]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

24 [75]

26 [79]

Compressor inlet

17 [63]

14 [57]

Compressor shell
bottom

47 [117]

38 [100]

LEV inlet

23 [73]

25 [77]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

Pulse

°C [°F]

- 123 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation
PUHY-P120THMU-A
Ambient
temperature

Indoor

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]
DB/WB

Outdoor

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

3
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

3
-

36/36/36

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

Temp. of
each section

kg
[lbs-oz]

15 [33]

A

28.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

74
325/325/325

Pulse

Outdoor
unit

100
1400

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

2.92/0.90 [424/131]

Discharge (TH4)

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

Hi

Electric current

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

35 [114-13/16 ]

20 [68]

°C [°F]

Compressor inlet

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

42 [108]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

- 124 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating operation
Outdoor unit model
Operation
Ambient Indoor
temperaOutdoor
ture

PUHY-P72THMU-A

PUHY-P96THMU-A

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]

8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

2

2

2

2

36/36

48/48

5 [16-3/8 ]

5 [16-3/8 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

10 [32-3/4 ]

25 [82]

25 [82]

Hi

Hi

DB/WB

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

Unit
No. of units in operation
Model

-

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

m [ft]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

kg
[lbs-oz]

11

15.8

24.0

Voltage

V

230

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

53

71

332/332

406/406

0

0

1400

1400

2.59/0.67 [376/97]

2.85/0.64 [413/93]

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

Discharge (TH4)

Outdoor
unit

72 [162]

75 [167]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

0 [32]

-2 [28]

Accumulator inlet

0 [32]

-2 [28]

0 [32]

-2 [28]

0 [32]

-2 [28]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

37 [99]

Heat exchanger
inlet

70 [158]

73 [163]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

[24]

A

LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2

Temp. of
each section

11

Electric current

Indoor unit

Pressure

[24]

°C [°F]

- 125 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation
PUHY-P120THMU-A
Ambient Indoor
temperaOutdoor
ture

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
DB/WB
8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

3
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

3
-

36/36/36

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

Temp. of
each section

kg
[lbs-oz]

15

[33]

A

25.8

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

81
332/332/332

Pulse

Outdoor
unit

0
1400

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

2.70/0.65 [392/94]

Discharge (TH4)

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

-1 [30]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

Hi

Electric current

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

35 [114-13/16 ]

-1 [30]
°C [°F]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

69 [156]

- 126 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
2. 2-unit combination
(1) Cooling operation
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P144TSHMU-A
PUHY-P72THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

26.7 °C /19.4 °C [80 °F/67 °F]
DB/WB

Outdoor

35 °C / - [95 °F/ - ]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/36/36

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

19 [42]

Electric current

A

30.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

48

48
325/325/325/325

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

190

190

1400

1400

2.59/0.96 [376/139]

2.59/0.96 [376/139]

Discharge (TH4)

69 [156]

69 [156]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

44 [111]

44 [111]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

24 [75]

24 [75]

Compressor inlet

17 [63]

17 [63]

Compressor shell
bottom

47 [117]

47 [117]

LEV inlet

23 [73]

23 [73]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

45 [147-5/8]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHY-P72THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 127 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P168TSHMU-A
PUHY-P72THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

26.7 °C /19.4 °C [80 °F/67 °F]
DB/WB

Outdoor

35 °C / - [95 °F/ - ]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

19 [42]

Electric current

A

39.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

52

60
325/325/387/387

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

190

190

1400

1400

2.71/0.90 [393/131]

2.71/0.90 [393/131]

Discharge (TH4)

69 [156]

74 [165]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

44 [111]

46 [115]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

24 [75]

26 [79]

Compressor inlet

17 [63]

14 [57]

Compressor shell
bottom

47 [117]

38 [100]

LEV inlet

23 [73]

25 [77]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

45 [147-5/8]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHY-P96THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 128 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P192TSHMU-A
PUHY-P72THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

26.7 °C /19.4 °C [80 °F/67 °F]
DB/WB

Outdoor

35 °C / - [95 °F/ - ]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

22 [49]

Electric current

A

44.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

52

74
387/387/387/387

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

100

100

1400

1400

2.76/0.93 [400/135]

2.76/0.93 [400/135]

Discharge (TH4)

69 [156]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

44 [111]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

24 [75]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

17 [63]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

47 [117]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

23 [73]

[19] [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

[10] [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

45 [147-5/8]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHY-P120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 129 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P216TSHMU-A
PUHY-P96THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

26.7 °C /19.4 °C [80 °F/67 °F]
DB/WB

Outdoor

35 °C / - [95 °F/ - ]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

06/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25 [55]

Electric current

A

53.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

65

71
222/325/325/325/387/387

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

159

237

1400

1400

2.88/0.87 [417/126]

2.88/0.87 [417/126]

Discharge (TH4)

74 [165]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

46 [115]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

26 [79]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

14 [57]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

38 [100]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

25 [77]

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHY-P120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 130 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P240TSHMU-A
PUHY-P120THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

26.7 °C /19.4 °C [80 °F/67 °F]
DB/WB

Outdoor

35 °C / - [95 °F/ - ]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

18/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25 [55]

Electric current

A

58.0

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

74

74
362/325/325/325/387/387

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

237

237

1400

1400

2.92/0.90 [424/131]

2.92/0.90 [424/131]

Discharge (TH4)

73 [163]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

20 [68]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

15 [59]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

42 [108]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHY-P120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 131 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating operation
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P144TSHMU-A
PUHY-P72THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
DB/WB

Outdoor

8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/36/36

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed
Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

45 [147-5/8]
-

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

19 [42]

Electric current

A

32.6

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

51

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

Outdoor
unit

0

MPa
[psi]

HWE08040

1400

1400

2.59/0.67 [376/97]

2.59/0.67 [376/97]

72 [162]

72 [162]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

0 [32]

0 [32]

Accumulator inlet

0 [32]

0 [32]

0 [32]

0 [32]

0 [32]

0 [32]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

70 [158]

70 [158]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

51
332/332/332/332

Discharge (TH4)

Temp. of
each section

PUHY-P72THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 132 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P168TSHMU-A
PUHY-P72THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
DB/WB

Outdoor

8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

19 [42]

Electric current

A

41.0

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

45 [147-5/8]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

53

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

Outdoor
unit

0

MPa
[psi]

HWE08040

1400

1400

2.72/0.66 [395/95]

2.72/0.66 [395/95]

72 [162]

75 [167]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

0 [32]

2 [28]

Accumulator inlet

0 [32]

2 [28]

0 [32]

2 [28]

0 [32]

2 [28]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

37 [99]

Heat exchanger
inlet

70 [158]

73 [163]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

64
332/332/406/406

Discharge (TH4)

Temp. of
each section

PUHY-P96THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 133 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P192TSHMU-A
PUHY-P72THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
DB/WB

Outdoor

8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

4
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

4
-

48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

22 [49]

Electric current

A

42.8

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

45 [147-5/8]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

71

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

Outdoor
unit

0

MPa
[psi]

HWE08040

1400

1400

2.65/0.66 [384/96]

2.65/0.66 [384/96]

72 [162]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

0 [32]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

0 [32]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

70 [158]

69 [156]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

71
406/406/406/406

Discharge (TH4)

Temp. of
each section

PUHY-P120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 134 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P216TSHMU-A
PUHY-P96THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
DB/WB

Outdoor

8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

06/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25 [55]

Electric current

A

51.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

75

75
229/332/332/332/406/406

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

0

MPa
[psi]

1400

1400

2.78/0.65 [402/94]

2.78/0.65 [402/94]

Discharge (TH4)

75 [167]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

37 [99]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

73 [163]

69 [156]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHY-P120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 135 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
Operation

PUHY-P240TSHMU-A
PUHY-P120THMU-A

Ambient
temperature

Indoor

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
DB/WB

Outdoor

8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit
Operating
conditions

6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

18/36/36/36/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

25 [55]

Electric current

A

53.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

85

85
373/332/332/332/406/406

Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

0

MPa
[psi]

1400

1400

2.70/0.65 [392/94]

2.70/0.65 [392/94]

Discharge (TH4)

70 [158]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

69 [156]

69 [156]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHY-P120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 136 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
3. 3-unit combination
(1) Cooling operation
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P264TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P72THMU-A
Ambient
temperature

Indoor

Operating
conditions

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Outdoor

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

36/36/48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

31 [68]

Electric current

A

59.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

52

52

74

325/325/387/387/387/387
Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

105

105

105

1400

1400

1400

2.70/0.94

2.70/0.94

2.70/0.94

[392/136]

[392/136]

[392/136]

Discharge (TH4)

69 [156]

69 [156]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

44 [111]

44 [111]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

24 [75]

24 [75]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

17 [63]

17 [63]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

47 [117]

47 [117]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

23 [73]

23 [73]

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB
No. of connected
units

Indoor
unit

PUHY-P72THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 137 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P288TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P72THMU-A
Ambient
temperature

Indoor

Operating
conditions

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Outdoor

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

48/48/48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

34 [75]

Electric current

A

68.3

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

52

65

74

387/387/387/387/387/387
Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

141

185

185

1400

1400

1400

2.78/0.90

2.78/0.90

2.78/0.90

[403/131]

[403/131]

[403/131]

Discharge (TH4)

69 [156]

74 [165]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

44 [111]

46 [115]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

24 [75]

26 [79]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

17 [63]

14 [57]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

47 [117]

38 [100]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

23 [73]

25 [77]

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB
No. of connected
units

Indoor
unit

PUHY-P96THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 138 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P312TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P72THMU-A
Ambient
temperature

Indoor

Operating
conditions

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Outdoor

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

48/48/48/54/54/54

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

34 [75]

Electric current

A

73.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

52

74

74

387/387/387/310/310/310
Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

141

185

185

1400

1400

1400

2.81/0.92

2.81/0.92

2.81/0.92

[408/133]

[408/133]

[408/133]

Discharge (TH4)

69 [156]

73 [163]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

44 [111]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

24 [75]

20 [68]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

17 [63]

15 [59]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

47 [117]

42 [108]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

23 [73]

19 [66]

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB
No. of connected
units

Indoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 139 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P336TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P96THMU-A
Ambient
temperature

Indoor

Operating
conditions

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Outdoor

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

54/54/54/54/54/54

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

37 [82]

Electric current

A

82.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

65

72

72

395/395/395/395/395/395
Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

171

171

171

1400

1400

1400

2.89/0.88

2.89/0.88

2.89/0.88

[419/128]

[419/128]

[419/128]

Discharge (TH4)

74 [165]

73 [163]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

46 [115]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

26 [79]

20 [68]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

14 [57]

15 [59]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

38 [100]

42 [108]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

25 [77]

19 [66]

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB
No. of connected
units

Indoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 140 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P360TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHYP120THMU-A
Ambient
temperature

Indoor

Operating
conditions

26.7°C/19.4°C [80°F/67°F]

Outdoor

35°C/ - [95°F/ - ]
7
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

7
-

48/48/48/54/54/54/54

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

39 [86]

Electric current

A

87.1

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

74

74

74

325/325/325/387/387/387/387
Pulse

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

171

171

171

1400

1400

1400

2.92/0.90

2.92/0.90

2.92/0.90

[424/131]

[424/131]

[424/131]

Discharge (TH4)

73 [163]

73 [163]

73 [163]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

40 [104]

40 [104]

40 [104]

Accumulator inlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

Accumulator outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

20 [68]

20 [68]

20 [68]

Compressor inlet

15 [59]

15 [59]

15 [59]

Compressor shell
bottom

42 [108]

42 [108]

42 [108]

LEV inlet

19 [66]

19 [66]

19 [66]

Heat exchanger
outlet

10 [50]

10 [50]

10 [50]

SCC outlet (TH6)

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

75 [246-1/16]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB
No. of connected
units

Indoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 141 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
(2) Heating operation
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P264TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P72THMU-A
Ambient Indoor
temperaOutdoor
ture

Operating
conditions

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

36/36/48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

31 [ 68]

Electric current

A

59.2

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

53

Pulse

0

0

1400

1400

1400

2.63/0.66

2.63/0.66

2.63/0.66

[381/96]

[381/96]

[381/96]

72 [162]

72 [162]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

0 [32]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

0 [32]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

36 [97]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

70 [158]

70 [158]

69 [156]

MPa
[psi]

HWE08040

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

77

0

Discharge (TH4)

Temp. of
each section

53
332/332/406/406/406/406

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit

PUHY-P72THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 142 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P288TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P72THMU-A
Ambient Indoor
temperaOutdoor
ture

Operating
conditions

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

48/48/48/48/48/48

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

34 [75]

Electric current

A

67.6

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

53

Pulse
1160

1280

1280

2.71/0.65

2.71/0.65

2.71/0.65

[394/95]

[394/95]

[394/95]

72 [162]

75 [167]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

0 [32]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

0 [32]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

37 [99]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

70 [158]

73 [163]

69 [156]

MPa
[psi]

HWE08040

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

75

0

Discharge (TH4)

Temp. of
each section

71
332/332/406/406/406/406

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit

PUHY-P96THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 143 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P312TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P72THMU-A
Ambient Indoor
temperaOutdoor
ture

Operating
conditions

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

48/48/48/54/54/54

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

34 [75]

Electric current

A

69.5

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

53

Pulse
1160

1280

1280

2.66/0.66

2.66/0.66

2.66/0.66

[386/95]

[386/95]

[386/95]

72 [162]

70 [158]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

0 [32]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

0 [32]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

0 [32]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

36 [97]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

70 [158]

69 [156]

69 [156]

MPa
[psi]

HWE08040

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

81

0

Discharge (TH4)

Temp. of
each section

81
406/406/406/414/414/414

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 144 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P336TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHY-P96THMU-A
Ambient Indoor
temperaOutdoor
ture

Operating
conditions

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]
6
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

6
-

54/54/54/54/54/54

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

37 [82]

Electric current

A

77.9

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

71

74

74

414/414/414/414/414/414
Pulse

0
1280

1280

1280

2.75/0.65

2.75/0.65

2.75/0.65

[399/94]

[399/94]

[399/94]

Discharge (TH4)

75 [167]

70 [158]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-2 [28]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

37 [99]

36 [97]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

73 [163]

69 [156]

69 [156]

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

65 [213-1/4]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 145 -

GB

[ VIII Test Run Mode ]
Outdoor unit model
PUHY-P360TSHMU-A

Operation
PUHYP120THMU-A
Ambient Indoor
temperaOutdoor
ture

Operating
conditions

21.1°C/ - [70°F/ - ]
8.3°C/6.1°C [47°F/43°F]
7
Unit

No. of units in operation
Model

7
-

48/48/48/54/54/54/54

Main pipe
Piping

Branch pipe

5 [16-3/8 ]
m [ft]

10 [32-3/4 ]

Total pipe length
Fan speed

Hi

kg
[lbs-oz]

39 [86]

Electric current

A

79.7

Voltage

V

230

Compressor frequency

Hz

Indoor unit
LEV openSC (LEV1)
ing
LEV2
Pressure

Temp. of
each section

Outdoor
unit

78

78

78

332/332/332/406/406/406/406
Pulse

0
1280

1280

1280

2.70/0.65

2.70/0.65

2.70/0.65

[392/94]

[392/94]

[392/94]

Discharge (TH4)

70 [158]

70 [158]

70 [158]

Heat exchanger outlet (TH3)

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Accumulator inlet

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

-1 [30]

Compressor shell
bottom

40 [104]

40 [104]

40 [104]

LEV inlet

36 [97]

36 [97]

36 [97]

Heat exchanger
inlet

69 [156]

69 [156]

69 [156]

High pressure (after O/S)/low
pressure (before accumulator)

MPa
[psi]

Accumulator outlet
Compressor inlet

Indoor
unit

HWE08040

75 [246-1/16]
-

Amount of refrigerant

Outdoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

DB/WB

No. of connected
units
Indoor
unit

PUHYP120THMU-A

°C [°F]

- 146 -

GB

IX Troubleshooting
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]

HWE08040

Error Code Lists ............................................................................................................. 149
Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller................................................. 152
Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise......................................................... 231
Troubleshooting Principal Parts ..................................................................................... 234
Refrigerant Leak ............................................................................................................265
Compressor Replacement Instructions.......................................................................... 267
Troubleshooting Using the Outdoor Unit LED Error Display.......................................... 269

- 147 -

GB

- 148 -

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
IX Troubleshooting

[1] Error Code Lists

0403

4300
4305

01
05
(Note)

0900

-

-

Test run

1102

1202

-

Discharge temperature fault

O

1301

-

-

Low pressure fault

O

1302

1402

-

High pressure fault

O

1500

1600

-

Refrigerant overcharge

O

-

1605

-

Preliminary suction pressure fault

O

2500

-

-

Drain sensor submergence

O

2502

-

-

Drain pump fault

O

2503

-

-

Drain sensor (Thd) fault

O

2600

-

-

Water leakage

O

2601

-

-

Water supply cutoff

O

4102

4152

-

Open phase

O

4106

-

-

Transmission power supply fault

O

4115

-

-

Power supply signal sync error

O

4116

-

4220
4225
(Note)

4320
4325
(Note)

-

Error code definition

Serial communication error

O

RPM error/Motor error

O

[108]

Abnormal bus voltage drop

O

[109]

Abnormal bus voltage rise

O

[111]

Logic error

O

[131]

Low bus voltage at startup

O

4330

-

Heatsink overheat protection

O

4240

4340

-

Overload protection

O

[101]

IPM error

O

[104]

Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault

O

[105]

Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor

O

[106]

Instantaneous overcurrent

O

[107]

Overcurrent

O

Heatsink overheat protection at startup

O

4260

5101

HWE08040

4350
4355
(Note)

-

1202

-

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Notes

O

4230

4250
4255
(Note)

LOSSNAY

Error
(preliminary)
detail
code

Indoor unit

Preliminary
error
code

Outdoor unit

Error
Code

Remote controller

Searched unit

Return air temperature
(TH21)
OA processing unit inlet
temperature (TH4)

- 149 -

O

O

O
O

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Indoor unit pipe temperature (TH22)
5102

1217

-

Temperature sensor
fault

O
O

Indoor unit gas-side pipe
temperature (TH23)

5103

1205

00

Temperature sensor
fault

O

OA processing unit gasside pipe temperature
(TH3)
Pipe temperature at
heatexchanger outlet
(TH3)

O

O

OA processing unit intake
air temperature (TH1)

5104

1202

-

Temperature sensor
fault

O

Outside temperature
(TH24)

Detectable
only by the AllFresh type indoor units

O

Outdoor unit discharge
temperature (TH4)

O

5105

1204

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Accumulator inlet temperature (TH5)

O

5106

1216

-

Temperature sensor
fault

HIC circuit outlet temperature (TH6)

O

5107

1221

-

Temperature sensor
fault

Outside temperature (TH7)

O

5110

1214

01

Temperature sensor
fault

Heatsink temperature
(THHS)

O

5201

-

-

5301

High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1)

O

[115]

ACCT sensor fault

O

[117]

ACCT sensor circuit fault

O

[119]

Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector

O

[120]

Faulty ACCT wiring

O

4300

5701

-

-

Loose float switch connector

6201

-

-

Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory
error)

O

6202

-

-

Remote controller board fault (clock IC error)

O

6600

-

-

Address overlap

O

6601

-

-

Polarity setting error

O

6602

-

-

Transmission processor hardware error

6603

-

-

6606

-

6607

-

HWE08040

Notes

O

OA processing unit pipe
temperature (TH2)
HIC bypass circuit outlet
temperature (TH2)

Remote controller

Error code definition

LOSSNAY

Error
(preliminary)
detail
code

Indoor unit

Error
Code

Preliminary
error
code

Outdoor unit

Searched unit

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

O

Transmission line bus busy error

O

O

O

O

-

Communication error between device and transmission processors

O

O

O

O

-

No ACK error

O

O

O

O

- 150 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Searched unit

-

No response error

6831

-

-

MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception)

O

O

6832

-

-

MA remote controller signal transmission error
(Synchronization error)

O

O

6833

-

-

MA remote controller signal transmission error
(Hardware error)

O

O

6834

-

-

MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error)

O

O

7100

-

-

Total capacity error

Remote controller

-

LOSSNAY

6608

Error code definition

Indoor unit

Error
(preliminary)
detail
code

Outdoor unit

Error
Code

Preliminary
error
code

O

O

O

O

Notes

O

7101

-

-

Capacity code setting error

O

7102

-

-

Wrong number of connected units

O

7105

-

-

Address setting error

O

7106

-

-

Attribute setting error

7110

-

-

Connection information signal transmission/reception error

7111

-

-

Remote controller sensor fault

7113

-

-

Function setting error

O

7117

-

-

Model setting error

O

7130

-

-

Incompatible unit combination

O

O

O

O
O
O

O

The last digit in the check error codes in the 4000's and 5000's and two-digit detail codes indicate if the codes apply to compressor inverter on fan inverter.
Example
Code 4225 (detail code 108): Bus voltage drop in the fan inverter system
Code 4230 : Heatsink overheat protection in the compressor inverter system

HWE08040

The last digit

Inverter system

0 or 1

Compressor inverter system

5

Fan inverter system

- 151 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller
1. Error Code

0403

(THMU-A)

Serial communication error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Serial communication error between the control board and the INV board on the compressor, and between the control board
and the Fan board
Detail code 01: Between the control board and the INV board
Detail code 05: Between the control board and the Fan board
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Faulty wiring
Check the following wiring connections.
1) Between Control board and Fan board
Control board FAN board
CN2
CN21
CN4
CN4
CN332

CN18V

2) Between Fan board and INV board
FAN board
CN22

INV board
CN2
CN5V

CN4
CN4
(2) INV board failure, Fan board failure and Control board failure
Replace the INV board or the Fan board or control board when the power turns on automatically, even if the power source is
reset.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 152 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

0403

(YHMU-A)

Serial communication error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Serial communication error between the control board and the INV board on the compressor, and between the control board
and the Fan board
Detail code 01: Between the control board and the INV board
Detail code 05: Between the control board and the Fan board
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Faulty wiring
Check the following wiring connections.
1) Between Control board and Fan board
Control board FAN board
CN2
CN21
CN4
CN5
CN332

CN18V

2) Between Fan board and INV board
FAN board
CN22

INV board
CN2
CN5V

CN4
CN4
(2) INV board failure, Fan board failure and Control board failure
Replace the INV board or the Fan board or control board when the power turns on automatically, even if the power source is
reset.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 153 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1102
Discharge temperature fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If the discharge temperature of 120 °C [248°F] or more is detected during the above operation (the first detection), the outdoor
unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically.
2) If the discharge temperature of 120° C [248°F] or more is detected again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the
second stop of the outdoor unit described above, the mode will be changed to 3 - minute restart mode, then the outdoor unit
will restart in 3 minutes.
3) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected (the 30th detection) within 30 minutes after the stop of the
outdoor unit described above (regardless of the first or the 29th stop), the outdoor unit will make an error stop, and the error
code "1102" will be displayed.
4) If the discharge temperature of 120°C [248°F] or more is detected more than 30 minutes after the previous stop of the outdoor
unit, the detection is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start.
5) For 30 minutes after the stop (the first stop or the second stop) of the outdoor unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the
LED display.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Gas leak, gas shortage

Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
evaluation.(page 117)

(2)

Overload operation

Check operating conditions and operation status of indoor/
outdoor units.

(3)

LEV failure on the indoor unit

(4)

Outdoor unit LEV1 actuation failure
Outdoor unit LEV2a, b actuation failure

Perform a cooling or heating operation to check the operation.
Cooling: Indoor unit LEV
LEV1
LEV2a,b
Heating: Indoor unit LEV
LEV2a,b
Refer to the section on troubleshooting the LEV.(page 238)

(5)

Closed refrigerant service valve

Confirm that the refrigerant service valve is fully open.

(6)

Outdoor fan (including fan parts) failure, motor failure, or fan controller malfunction
Rise in discharge temp. by low pressure
drawing for (3) - (6).

Check the fan on the outdoor unit.
Refer to the section on troubleshooting the outdoor unit
fan.(page 237)

(7)

Gas leak between low and high pressures
(4-way valve failure, Compressor failure, Solenoid valve (SV1a) failure)

Perform a cooling or heating operation and check the operation.

(8)

Thermistor failure
(TH4)

Check the thermistor resistor.(page 185)

(9)

Input circuit failure on the controller board
thermistor

Check the inlet air temperature on the LED monitor.

HWE08040

- 154 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1301
Low pressure fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
When starting the compressor from Stop Mode for the first time if low pressure reads 0.098MPa [14psi] immediately before
start-up, the operation immediately stops.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Inner pressure drop due to a leakage.

(2)

Low pressure sensor failure

(3)

Short-circuited pressure sensor cable due to
torn outer rubber

(4)

A pin on the male connector is missing.

(5)

Disconnected wire

(6)

Failure of the low pressure input circuit on the
controller board

HWE08040

Check method and remedy
Refer to the section on troubleshooting the low pressure
sensor.(page 235)

- 155 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1302
High pressure fault 1 (Outdoor unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor during operation (the first detection), the outdoor stops once, turns to antirestart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes automatically.
2) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor again (the second detection) within 30 minutes after the first stop of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit stops once, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts
after 3 minutes automatically.
3) If the pressure of 3.87MPa [561psi] or higher is detected by the pressure sensor (the third detection) within 30 minutes of the
second stop of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit will make an error stop, and the error code "1302" will be displayed.
4) If the pressure of 3.78MPa [548psi] or higher is detected more than 30 minutes after the stop of the outdoor unit, the detection
is regarded as the first detection, and the operation described in step 1 above will start.
5) For 30 minutes after the stop of the outdoor unit, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
6) The outdoor unit makes an error stop immediately when not only the pressure sensor but also the pressure switch detects
4.15+0,-0.15 MPa [601+0,-22 psi]
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Indoor unit LEV2a, b actuation failure -> Cooling
Indoor unit LEV actuation failure -> Heating

Perform a cooling or heating operation to check the operation.
Cooling: Indoor unit LEV2a, b
Heating: Indoor unit LEV
Refer to the section on troubleshooting the
LEV.(page 238)

(2)

Closed refrigerant service valve

Confirm that the refrigerant service valve is fully open.

(3)

Short cycle on the indoor unit side

(4)

Clogged filter on the indoor unit

Check the indoor units for problems and correct them, if
any.

(5)

Reduced air flow due to dirty fan on the indoor
unit fan

(6)

Dirty heat exchanger of the indoor unit

(7)

Indoor fan (including fan parts) failure or motor
failure
Rise in high pressure caused by lowered condensing capacity in heating operation for (2) - (7).

(8)

Short cycle on the outdoor unit

(9)

Dirty heat exchanger of the outdoor unit

(10)

Outdoor fan (including fan parts) failure, motor
failure, or fan controller malfunction
Rise in discharge temp. by low pressure drawing
for (8) - (10).

Check the fan on the outdoor unit.
Refer to the section on troubleshooting the outdoor unit
fan.(page 237)

(11)

Solenoid valve (SV1a) malfunction (The by-pass
valve (SV1a) can not control rise in high pressure).

Refer to the section on troubleshooting the solenoid valve.

(12)

Thermistor failure (TH3, TH7)

Check the thermistor resistor.(page 185)

(13)

Pressure sensor failure

Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high pressure sensor. (page 234)

(14)

Failure of the thermistor input circuit and pressure sensor input circuit on the controller board

Check the temperature and the pressure of the sensor
with LED monitor.

(15)

Thermistor mounting problem (TH3, TH7)

(16)

Disconnected male connector on the pressure
switch (63H1) or disconnected wire

Check the temperature and the pressure of the sensor
with LED monitor.

HWE08040

Check the outdoor units for problems and correct them, if
any.

- 156 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

1302
High pressure fault 2 (Outdoor unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the pressure of 0.098MPa [14psi] or lower is registered on the pressure sensor immediately before start-up, it will trigger an
abnormal stop, and error code "1302" will be displayed.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inner pressure drop due to a leakage.

Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of the high
pressure sensor.(page 234)

(2)

Pressure sensor failure

(3)

Shorted-circuited pressure sensor cable due to torn
outer rubber

(4)

A pin on the male connector on the pressure sensor
is missing or contact failure

(5)

Disconnected pressure sensor cable

(6)

Failure of the pressure sensor input circuit on the
controller board

1. Error Code

1500
Refrigerant overcharge
2. Error definition and error detection method
An error can be detected by the discharge temperature superheat (TdSH).
1) If the formula "TdSH 10°C [18°F]" is satisfied during operation (first detection), the outdoor unit stops, goes into the 3-minute
restart mode, and starts up in three minutes.
2) If a TdSH of 10°C [18°F] or below is detected again (second detection) within 30 minutes of the first stoppage of the outdoor
unit as described above, the outdoor unit stops again, goes into the 3-minute restart mode, and restarts after three minutes.
3) If a TdSH of 10°C [18°F] or below is detected (sixth detection) within 30 minutes of the fifth stoppage of the outdoor unit as
described above, the unit comes to an abnormal stop, and "1500" appears on the display.
4) If a TdSH of 10°C [18°F] or below is detected after 30 minutes have elapsed after a stoppage of the outdoor unit, the unit will
follow the same sequence as the first detection of the condition as described in section 1) above.
5) The period of 30 minutes after a stoppage of the outdoor unit is regarded as a preliminary error, and a preliminary error code
appears on the LED display.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Overcharged refrigerant

Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
evaluation.(page 117)

(2)

Thermistor input circuit failure on the control board

Check the temperature and pressure readings on the sensor that are displayed on the LED monitor.

(3)

Faulty mounting of thermistor (TH4)

Check the temperature and pressure readings on the thermistor that are displayed on the LED monitor.

(4)

Outdoor unit LEV2a, b actuation failure -> Heating

Refer to the section on troubleshooting the LEV.
(page 238)

HWE08040

- 157 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2500
Drain sensor submergence (Models with a drain sensor)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If an immersion of the drain sensor in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and
when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being
detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on.(Applicable to the units manufactured in or after October 2006)
2) If the immersion of the sensor in the water is detected four consecutive times at an hour interval, this is considered water leakage, and "2500" appears on the monitor.
3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped.
4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met:
One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON.
The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry.
The liquid pipe temperature minus the inlet temperature is -10°C [-18°F] or less.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping
Backflow of drain water from other units

Check for proper drainage.

(2)

Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor
Trickling of water along the lead wire
Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging

1)

Check for proper lead wire installation.

2)

Check for clogged filter.

(3)

Failure of the relay circuit for the solenoid valve

Replace the relay.

(4)

Indoor unit control board failure
Drain sensor circuit failure

If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit
control board.

HWE08040

- 158 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2500
Drain sensor submergence (Models with a float switch)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) If an immersion of the float switch in the water is detected while the unit is in any mode other than the Cool/Dry mode and
when the drain pump goes from OFF to ON, this condition is considered preliminary water leakage. While this error is being
detected, humidifier output cannot be turned on.
2) If the drain pump turns on within one hour after preliminary water leakage is detected and the above-mentioned condition is
detected two consecutive times, water leakage error water leakage is detected, and "2500" appears on the monitor.
3) Detection of water leakage is also performed while the unit is stopped.
4) Preliminary water leakage is cancelled when the following conditions are met:
One hour after the preliminary water leakage was detected, it is not detected that the drain pump goes from OFF to ON.
The operation mode is changed to Cool/Dry.
The liquid pipe temperature minus the inlet temperature is - 10°C [ -18°F] or less.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping
Backflow of drain water from other units

Check for proper drainage.

(2)

Stuck float switch
Check for slime in the moving parts of the float
switch.

Check for normal operation of the float switch.

(3)

Float switch failure

Check the resistance with the float switch turned on and
turned off.


Drain pump operation triggered by a submergence of the liquid level sensor
(except during the Cooing/Dry mode)
6 minutes

6 minutes

ON

Drain pump
output
OFF
ON

Float switch
OFF
input

15
seconds

15
seconds

15
seconds

Submergence of
Sensor in the air
the sensor
Preliminary water leakage
Within 1-hour period

HWE08040

- 159 -

Submergence of
the sensor

15
seconds

Sensor in the air

15
seconds

Submergence of
the sensor
Water leakage

Within 1-hour period

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2502
Drain pump fault (Models with a drain sensor)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) Make the drain sensor thermistor self-heat. If the temperature rise is small, it is interpreted that the sensor is immersed in
water. This condition is considered to be a preliminary error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode.
2) If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain pump error, and
"2502" appears on the monitor.
3) This error is always detected while the drain pump is in operation.
4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit (system stoppage) are met.
"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature
-10°C [ -18 °F] " has been detected for 30 minutes.
The immersion of drain sensor is detected 10 consecutive times.
The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage
of the outdoor unit.
5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the outdoor unit in the same refrigerant
circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the outdoor unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant
circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop. "2502" appears on the monitor of the units that came to
an error stop.
6) Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit
Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.
7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit
Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the outdoor unit that is connected to the same refrigerant circuit.
Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller.
(Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other.
The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit)
that caused the error.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain pump failure

Check for proper functioning of the drain pump.

(2)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping

Check for proper drainage.

(3)

Adhesion of water drops to the drain sensor
Trickling of water along the lead wire
Rippling of drain water caused by filter clogging

1)

Check for proper lead wire installation.

2)

Check for clogged filter.

(4)

Indoor unit control board failure
Drain pump drive circuit failure
Drain heater output circuit failure

If the above item checks out OK, replace the indoor unit
control board.

(5)

Items (1) through (4) above and an indoor unit electronic valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultaneously.

Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for leaks.

HWE08040

- 160 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2502
Drain pump fault (Models with a float switch)
2. Error definition and error detection method
1) The immersion of sensor tip in water is detected by the ON/OFF signal from the float switch.
Submergence of the sensor
When it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is immersed in
water.
Sensor in the air
When it is detected that the float switch has been OFF for 15 seconds, it is interpreted that the sensor tip is not immersed
in water.
2) If it is detected that the float switch has been ON for 3 minutes after the immersion of the sensor tip was detected, this is considered a drain pump failure, and "2502" appears on the monitor.
The total time it takes for this error to be detected is 3 minutes and 15 seconds, including the time it takes for the first immersion of the sensor tip to be detected.
3) Detection of drain pump failure is performed while the unit is stopped.
4) The following criteria are met when the criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit (system stoppage) are met.
"Liquid pipe temperature - inlet temperature
- 10°C [ -18°F] " has been detected for 30 minutes.
It is detected by the float switch that the sensor tip has been immersed in water for 15 minutes or more.
The conditions that are listed under items 1) through 3) above are always met before the criteria for the forced stoppage
of the outdoor unit.
5) The indoor unit that detected the conditions that are listed in item 4) above brings the outdoor unit in the same refrigerant
circuit to an error stop (compressor operation prohibited), and the outdoor unit brings all the indoor units in the same refrigerant
circuit that are in any mode other than Fan or Stop to an error stop.
6) Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit
Detection timing: The error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.
This error is detected whether the unit is in operation or stopped.
7) Ending criteria for the forced stoppage of outdoor unit
Power reset the indoor unit that was identified as the error source and the outdoor unit that is connected to the same refrigerant circuit.
Forced stoppage of the outdoor unit cannot be cancelled by stopping the unit via the remote controller.
(Note) Items 1) - 3) and 4) - 7) are detected independently from each other.
The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller are those of the indoor unit (or OA processing unit)
that caused the error.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Drain pump failure

Check for proper functioning of the drain pump
mechanism

(2)

Drain water drainage problem
Clogged drain pump
Clogged drain piping

Check for proper drainage.

(3)

Stuck float switch
Check for slime in the moving parts of the float switch.

Check for normal operation of the float switch.

(4)

Float switch failure

Check the resistance with the float switch turned
on and turned off.

(5)

Indoor unit control board failure
Drain pump drive circuit failure
Float switch input circuit failure

Replace indoor unit control board.

(6)

Items (1) through (5) above and an indoor unit electronic
valve closure failure (leaky valve) occurred simultaneously.

Check the solenoid valves on the indoor unit for
leaks.

HWE08040

- 161 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2503
Drain sensor (Thd) fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the open or short circuit of the thermistor has been detected for 30 seconds, this condition is considered to be a preliminary
error, and the unit goes into the 3-minute restart delay mode.
If another episode of the above condition is detected during the preliminary error, this is considered a drain sensor error.(If
the short or open circuit of the thermistor is no longer detected, normal operation will be restored in 3 minutes.)
This error is detected when one of the following conditions are met.
During Cool/Dry operation
Liquid pipe temperature minus inlet temperature is equal to or smaller than - 10°C [ -18°F] (except during the defrost cycle)
When the liquid temperature thermistor or suction temperature thermistor or short or open circuited.
Drain pump is in operation.
One hour has elapsed since the drain sensor went off.
Short: 90°C [194 °F] or above
Open: - 20°C [-4 °F] or below
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Faulty connector (CN31) insertion.

1)

Check for connector connection failure.
Reinsert the connector, restart the operation, and check for
proper operation.

(2)

Broken or semi-broken thermistor wire

2)

Check for a broken thermistor wire.

(3)

Thermistor failure

3)

Check the resistance of the thermistor.
0°C[32 °F]:6.0k
10°C[50 °F]:3.9k
20°C[68°F]:2.6k
30°C[86°F]:1.8k
40°C[104 °F]:1.3k

(4)

Indoor unit control board (error detection circuit)
failure

4)

Replace the indoor unit control board if the problem recurs
when the unit is operated with the No.-1 and No.-2 pins on
the drain sensor connector (CN31) being short-circuited.
If the above item checks out OK, there are no problems with
the drain sensor.
Turn off the power and turn it back on.

HWE08040

- 162 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

2600
Water leakage
2. Cause, check method and remedy
Check that water does not leak from the pipes in such as the humidifier.

1. Error Code

2601
Water supply cutoff
2. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

The water tank of the humidifier is empty.

Check the amount of supply water.
Check for the solenoid valve and for the connection.

(2)

The solenoid valve for humidification is OFF.

Check the connector.

(3)

Disconnected float switch

Check the connecting part.

(4)

Poor operation of float switch

Check for the float switch.

(5)

Frozen water tank

Turn off the power source of the water tank to defrost, and
turn it on again.

HWE08040

- 163 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4102

(THMU-A)

Open phase
2. Error definition and error detection method
An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on.
The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range.
The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy
Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1.

(1)

Power supply problem
Open phase voltage of the power supply
Power supply voltage drop

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Wiring failure

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is
188 V or above.
If the voltage is below 188V, check the wiring connection between
the noise filter board CN02 and control board CNAC.
P72 and P96 models
Confirm that the wiring between TB23 and INV board SC-T is put
through CT3.
P120 model
Confirm that the wiring between the coil L3 and TB23 is put
through ACCT3.

(4)

Blown fuse

Check that F01 on the control board is not blown.
->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault
of the actuator.

(5)

CT3 failure

P72 and P96 models
Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compressor has gone into operation.
P120 model
Replace the ACCT3 if this problem is detected after the compressor has gone into operation.

(6)

Control board failure

Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the
problem.

HWE08040

Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is 188 V or
above.

- 164 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4102

(YHMU-A)

Open phase
2. Error definition and error detection method
An open phase of the power supply (L1 phase, L2 phase) was detected at power on.
The L3 phase current is outside of the specified range.
The open phase of the power supply may not always be detected if a power voltage from another circuit is applied.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy
Check the input voltage to the power supply terminal block TB1.

(1)

Power supply problem
Open phase voltage of the power supply
Power supply voltage drop

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Wiring failure

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is
190 V or above.
If the voltage is below 190, check the wiring between noise filter
CN6, noise filter CN2, transformer box, and control board CNAC.
Confirm that the wiring between noise filter TB23 and INV board
SC-L3 is put through CT3.

(4)

Blown fuse

Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a blown fuse.
->If a blown fuse is found, check for a short-circuiting or earth fault
of the actuator.

(5)

CT3 failure

Replace the inverter if this problem is detected after the compressor has gone into operation.

(6)

Control board failure

Replace the control board if none of the above is causing the
problem.

HWE08040

Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on the noise filter
board is 414V or above.

- 165 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4106

2. Error definition and error detection method
Transmission power output failure
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)

Cause
Wiring failure
Transmission power supply cannot output voltage because overcurrent was detected.
Voltage cannot be output due to transmission power supply problem.
Transmission voltage detection circuit failure

4. Check method and remedy
Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) on all outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit.


2.

Error definition and error detection method
Transmission power reception failure

3.

Cause
One of the outdoor units stopped supplying power, but no other outdoor units start supplying power.

4.

Check method and remedy
Check the items in IX [4] -7- (2) on all outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit.

HWE08040

- 166 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4115

(THMU-A)

Power supply signal sync error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Power supply error

Check the voltage of the power supply terminal
block (TB1).

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Faulty wiring

Check fuse F01 on the control board (or F1, F2).

(4)

Wiring failure
Between noise filter board CN02 and control board
CNAC

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 188 V or above.

(5)

Control board failure

If none of the items described above is applicable,
and if the trouble reappears even after the power is
switched on again, replace the control board.

Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Confirm that the voltage at the CN02 connector is
188 V or above.

1. Error Code

4115

(YHMU-A)

Power supply signal sync error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The frequency cannot be determined when the power is switched on.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Power supply error

(2)

Noise filter problem
Coil problem
Circuit board failure

(3)

Faulty wiring

Check F01 on the control board, F4, and F5 for a
blown fuse.

(4)

Wiring failure
Between noise filter CN3, noise filter CN2, transformer
box, and control board CNAC

Confirm that the voltage at the control board connector CNAC is 190 V or above.

(5)

Control board failure

If none of the items described above is applicable,
and if the trouble reappears even after the power is
switched on again, replace the control board.

HWE08040

Check the voltage of the power supply terminal
block (TB1).
Check the coil connections.
Check for coil burnout.
Check that the voltage across TB21 and TB22 on
the noise filter board is 414V or above.

- 167 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4116
RPM error/Motor error
2. Error definition and error detection method
LOSSNAY
The motor keep running even if the power is OFF.
The thermal overload relay is ON. (Only for the three-phase model)
Indoor unit
If detected less than 180rpm or more than 2000rpm, the indoor unit will restart and keep running for 3 minutes.If detected
again, the display will appear.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Board failure

Replace the board.

(2)

Motor malfunction

Check for the motor and the solenoid switch.

(3)

Solenoid switch malfunction

HWE08040

- 168 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220
4225

(THMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 160V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Power supply environment
Check whether the unit makes an instantaneousstop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs.
Check whether the power voltage is 188V or less across all phases.
(2) Voltage drop detected
4220
P72 and P96 models
Check the voltage between the tab terminal TB-P and TB-N on the INV board while the inverter is stopped. -> Check the following items if it is 253V or above.
1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 160 V.
Replace the INV board if it is below 160 V.
2) Check the voltage at CN505 on the control board. ->Go to (3).
3) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout.
4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections
Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL. Between the INV board and C1.
Replace 72C if no problems are found.-> Check the following items if the voltage is below 253V.
1) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout.
2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board.
3) Check the connection to SC-P1 and SC-P2 on the INV board.
4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. Replace the INV board if no problems are found.
P120 model
Check the voltage between SC-P1 and IPM N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped.
-> Check the following items if it is 253V or above.
1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 160 V.
Replace the INV board if it is below 160 V.
2) Check the voltage at CN505 on the control board. ->Go to (3).
3) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and coil burnout.
4) Check the resistance of the diode stack. ->Refer to [4] -6- (6).(page 251)
5) Check the wiring connections between the following sections:
Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and C1.
Replace the noise filter board if no problems are found.
-> Check the following items if the voltage is below 253 V.
1) Check the connection to SC-P1 and IPM N on the INV board.
2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board.
3) Check the resistance of the diode stack. ->Refer to [4] -6- (6).(page 251)
4) Check the in-rush current resistor value. ->Refer to [4] -6- (4).(page 249)
5) Replace the noise filter board.
4225
Check the voltage at CNVDC on the Fan board while the inverter is stopped.
->Check the following items if it is 253 V or above.
1) Check the voltage at CN505 on the control board. ->Go to 3).
2) Check the coil connections (L1 - L3) and for coil burnout.
3) Check the wiring connections.
Replace 72C if no problems are found.
(P120 model: Replace the noise filter board.)
If the problem recurs after replacing 72C, replace the Fan board.
-> Check the following items if the voltage is below 253V.
1) Check the CNVDC connector connection.
(3) Control board failure
Confirm that a voltage of 208-230 VAC is applied to the connector CN505 on the control board during inverter operation.
->If voltage is absent, check the fuse F01. If no problems are found, replace the control board.
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)
HWE08040

- 169 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220
4225

(YHMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage drop (Detail code 108)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 289V or less is detected during Inverter operation. (S/W detection)
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Power supply environment
Check whether the unit makes an instantaneous stop when the detection result is abnormal or a power failure occurs.
Check whether the power voltage (Between L1 and L2, L2 and L3, and L1 and L3) is 414V or less across all phases.
(2) Voltage drop detected
4220
Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V or
above, check the following items.
1) Confirm on the LED monitor that the bus voltage is above 414V.
Replace the INV board if it is below 289 V.
2) Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board. ->Go to (3).
3) Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout.
4) Check the wiring connections between the following sections
Between the noise filter board and INV board. Between the INV board and DCL.
Replace 72C if no problems are found.
5) Check the IGBT module resistance on the INV board (Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module).
Check the voltage between the FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than
420 V, check the following items.
1) Check the coil connections and for coil burnout on the noise filter.
2) Check the wiring between the noise filter board and INV board.
3) Check the connection to SCP1 and SC-P2 on the INV board.
4) Check the in-rush current resistor value.
5) Check the 72C resistance value.
6) Check the DCL resistance value.
Replace the INV board if no problems are found.
4225
Check the voltage at CNVDC on the Fan board while the inverter is stopped and if it is 420 V or above, check the following
items.
1) Check the voltage at CN72 on the control board. ->Go to 3).
2) Check the noise filter coil connections and for coil burnout.
3) Check the wiring connections between the following sections
Between the INV board and the Fan board.
4) Check contents 4220
Replace the Fan board if no problems are found.
Check the voltage at CNVDC on the Fan board while the inverter is stopped and if it is less than 420 V, check the following
items.
1) Check the state of the wiring connections between the INV board and the Fan board.
2) Check contents 4220
Replace the Fan board if no problems are found.
(3) Control board failure
Check that 12VDC is applied to connector CN72 on the control board while the inverter is operating. If voltage is absent or
the wrong voltage is applied, check the fuse F01. Replace the control board if no problems are found with the fuse.
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 170 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220
4225

(THMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 400V is detected during inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Different voltage connection
Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1).
(2) INV board failure
If the problem recurs, replace the INV board.
In the case of 4220: INV board
In the case of 4225: Fan board
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

1. Error Code

4220
4225

(YHMU-A)

Abnormal bus voltage rise (Detail code 109)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If Vdc 830V is detected during inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Different voltage connection
Check the power supply voltage on the power supply terminal block (TB1).
(2) INV board failure
If the problem recurs, replace the INV board.
In the case of 4220: INV board
In the case of 4225: Fan board
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 171 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220
4225

(THMU-A)

(P120 model)

VDC error (Detail code 110)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Bus voltage abnormality If Vdc 400V or Vdc

160V is detected. (H/W detection)

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Same as detail code No.108 and 109 of 4220 error
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 172 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220
4225

(THMU-A)

Logic error (Detail code 111)
2. Error definition and error detection method
H/W error
If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.
3. Cause, Check method and remedy
In the case of 4220
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

External noise

(2)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1].(page 246)

(3)

IPM failure (P120 model only)

Replace the IPM.

(4)

DCCT failure (P120 model only)

Replace the DCCT.

In the case of 4225
Cause
(1)

External noise

(2)

Fan board failure

Check method and remedy

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [6].(page 247)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 173 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4220
4225

(YHMU-A)

Logic error (Detail code 111)
2. Error definition and error detection method
H/W error
If only the H/W error logic circuit operates, and no identifiable error is detected.
3. Cause, Check method and remedy
In the case of 4220
Cause
(1)

External noise

(2)

INV board failure

Check method and remedy

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1].(page 254)

In the case of 4225
Cause
(1)

External noise

(2)

Fan board failure

Check method and remedy

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [6].(page 255)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

1. Error Code

4220
4225

(YHMU-A)

Low bus voltage at startup (Detail code 131)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When Vdc 160 V is detected just before the inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Inverter main circuit failure
Same as detail code 108 of 4220 error
Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 174 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4230

(THMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH is detected.
Model

TOH

P72, P96 models

100°C [212°F]

P120 model

90°C [194°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Fan board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [6].(page 247)

(2)

Outdoor unit fan failure

Check the outdoor unit fan operation.
If any problem is found with the fan operation, check the fan motor. ->Refer to
IX [4] -6- (2) [5].(page 247)

(3)

Air passage blockage

Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(4)

THHS failure

P72 and P96 models
1)

Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper installation of the IGBT heatsink.)

2)

Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT.
->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board.
P120 model

3)

Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor.
->If an abnormal value appears, check the sensor resistance, and replace the
sensor as necessary.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 175 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4230

(YHMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the heat sink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] is detected.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Fan board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [6].(page 255)

(2)

Outdoor unit fan failure

Check the outdoor unit fan operation.
If any problem is found with the fan operation, check the fan motor. ->Refer to
IX [4] -6- (2) [5].(page 255)

(3)

Air passage blockage

Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(4)

THHS failure

1)

Check for proper installation of the INV board IGBT. (Check for proper installation of the IGBT heatsink.)

2)

Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor.
->If an abnormal value appears, replace the INV board.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 176 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4240

(THMU-A)

Overload protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > TOL" is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during inverter
operation.
Model

Imax(Arms)

P72, P96 models

35

P120 model

53

Model

TOL

P72, P96 models

95°C [203°F]

P120 model

80°C [175°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Air passage blockage

Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2)

Power supply environment

Power supply voltage is 188 V or above.

(3)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 244)

(4)

Current sensor (ACCT) failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (4).

(5)

Compressor failure

Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation.
-> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section).
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 177 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4240

(YHMU-A)

Overload protection
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the output current of "(Iac) >Imax (Arms)" or "THHS > 95°C [203°F] " is continuously detected for 10 minutes or more during
inverter operation.
Model

Imax(Arms)

P72, P96 models

19

P120 model

27

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Air passage blockage

Check that the heat sink cooling air passage is not blocked

(2)

Power supply environment

Power supply voltage is 414 V or above.

(3)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 252)

(4)

Compressor failure

Check that the compressor has not overheated during operation.
-> Check the refrigerant circuit (oil return section).
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 254)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 178 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250
4255

(THMU-A)

IPM error (Detail code 101)
2. Error definition and error detection method
In the case of 4250
P72, P96 models
Overcurrent is detected by the overcurrent detection resistor (RSH) on the INVboard.
P120 model
IPM error signal is detected.
In the case of 4255
IPM error signal is detected.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
In the case of 4250
P72 and P96 models
Cause
(1)

Inverter output related

Check method and remedy
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1] - [4].(page 246)

P120 model
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter output related

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1] - [4].(page 246)

(2)

Same as 4230 error

Same as 4230 error

In the case of 4255
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Fan motor abnormality

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [5].(page 247)

(2)

Fan board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [6].(page 247)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 179 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250
4255

(YHMU-A)

IPM error (Detail code 101)
2. Error definition and error detection method
In the case of 4250
Overcurrent is detected by the overcurrent detection resistor (RSH) on the INV board.
In the case of 4255
IPM error signal is detected.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
In the case of 4250
Cause
(1)

Inverter output related

Check method and remedy
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1] - [4].(page 254)
Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board, if no
problems are found.
(Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module)

In the case of 4255
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Fan motor abnormality

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [5].(page 255)

(2)

Fan board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [6].(page 255)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 180 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250

(THMU-A)

ACCT overcurrent (H/W detection) (Detail code 102)
DCCT overcurrent (H/W detection) (Detail code 103)
Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106)
Overcurrent (Detail code 107)
2. Error definition and error detection method
P76 and P96 models
Overcurrent 88 Apeak or 42 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
P120 model
Overcurrent 128 Apeak or 60 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Inverter output related

Check method and remedy
Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1] - [4].(page 246)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 181 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250

(YHMU-A)

Instantaneous overcurrent (Detail code 106)
Overcurrent (Detail code 107)
2. Error definition and error detection method
P72 and P96 models
Overcurrent 94 Apeak or 22 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
P120 model
Overcurrent 94 Apeak or 35 Arms and above is detected by the current sensor.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Check method and remedy

Inverter output related

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1] - [4].(page 254)
Check the IGBT module resistance value of the INV board, if no
problems are found.
(Refer to the Trouble shooting for IGBT module)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

1. Error Code

4250
4255
Short-circuited IPM/Ground fault (Detail code 104)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When IPM/IGBT short damage or grounding on the load side is detected just before starting the inverter.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
In the case of 4250
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Grounding fault compressor

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(2)

Inverter output related

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1] - [4].

In the case of 4255
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Grounding fault of fan motor

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [5].

(2)

Fan board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [6].

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

HWE08040

- 182 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

4250
4255
Overcurrent error due to short-circuited motor (Detail code 105)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When a short is detected on the load side just before starting the inverter operation.
3. Cause, Check method and remedy
In the case of 4250
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Short - circuited compressor

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

(2)

Output wiring

Check for a short circuit.

In the case of 4255
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Short - circuited fan motor

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [5].

(2)

Output wiring

Check for a short circuit.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.

1. Error Code

4260

(THMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection at startup
2. Error definition and error detection method
The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above TOH for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.
Model

TOH

P72, P96 models

100°C [212°F]

P120 model

90°C [194°F]

3. Cause, check method and remedy
Same as 4230 error

1. Error Code

4260

(YHMU-A)

Heatsink overheat protection at startup
2. Error definition and error detection method
The heatsink temperature (THHS) remains at or above 100°C [212°F] for 10 minutes or more at inverter startup.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Same as 4230 error

HWE08040

- 183 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5101
Return air temperature sensor (TH21) fault (Indoor unit)
Return air temperature sensor (TH4) fault (OA processing unit)

5102
Pipe temperature sensor (TH22) fault (Indoor unit)
Pipe temperature sensor (TH2) fault (OA processing unit)

5103
Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH23) fault (Indoor unit)
Gas-side pipe temperature sensor (TH3) fault (OA processing unit)

5104
Intake air temperature sensor (TH1) fault (OA processing unit)
Intake air temperature sensor (TH24) fault (All-fresh (100% outdoor air) type indoor unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If a short or an open is detected during thermostat ON, the outdoor unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes. When the
error is not restored after 3 minutes (if restored, the outdoor unit runs normally), the outdoor unit makes an error stop.
Short: detectable at 90°C [194°F] or higher
Open: detectable at -40°C [-40°F] or lower
Sensor error at gas-side cannot be detected under the following conditions.
During heating operation
During cooling operation for 3 minutes after the compressor turns on.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Thermistor failure

(2)

Connector contact failure

(3)

Disconnected wire or partial disconnected
thermistor wire

(4)

Unattached thermistor or contact failure

(5)

Indoor board (detection circuit) failure

HWE08040

Check method and remedy
Check the thermistor resistor.
0°C [32°F]: 15 kohm
10°C [50°F]: 9.7 kohm
20°C [68°F] : 6.4 kohm
30°C [86°F] : 4.3 kohm
40°C [104°F] : 3.1 kohm
Check the connector contact.
When no fault is found, the indoor board is a failure.

- 184 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5102
HIC bypass circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH2) fault (Outdoor unit)

5103
Heat exchanger outlet temperature sensor (TH3) fault (Outdoor unit)

5104
Discharge temperature sensor (TH4) fault (Outdoor unit)

5105
Accumulator inlet temperature sensor (TH5) fault (Outdoor unit)

5106
HIC circuit outlet temperature sensor (TH6) fault (Outdoor unit)

5107
Outside temperature sensor (TH7) fault (Outdoor unit)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When a short (high temperature intake) or an open (low temperature intake) of the thermistor is detected (the first detection),
the outdoor unit stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts when the detected temperature of the thermistor.
When a short or an open is detected again (the second detection) after the first restart of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit
stops, turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts in 3 minutes when the detected temperature is within the normal
range.
When a short or an open is detected again (the third detection) after the previous restart of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit
makes an error stop.
When a short or an open of the thermistor is detected just before the restart of the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit makes an
error stop, and the error code "5102", "5103", 5104", "5105", "5106"or "5107" will appear.
During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
A short or an open described above is not detected for 10 minutes after the compressor start, during defrost mode, or for 3
minutes after defrost mode.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Thermistor failure

Check thermistor resistance.

(2)

Pinched lead wire

Check for pinched lead wire.

(3)

Torn wire coating

Check for wire coating.

(4)

A pin on the male connector is missing or
contact failure

Check connector.

(5)

Disconnected wire

Check for wire.

(6)

Thermistor input circuit failure on the control
board

Check the intake temperature of the sensor with the LED
monitor.
When the temperature is far different from the actual temperature, replace the control board.



TH2
TH3
TH4
TH5
TH6
TH7

HWE08040

Short detection
70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k )
110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )
240 C [464 F ] and above (0.57 k )
70 C [158 F ] and above (0.4 k )
70 C [158 F ] and above (1.14 k )
110 C [230 F ] and above (0.4 k )

-40
-40
0
-40
-40
-40

C [ -40
C [ -40
C [ 32
C [ -40
C [ -40
C [ -40

- 185 -

Open detection
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (698 k
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (130 k
F ] and below (130 k

)
)
)
)
)
)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5110

(THMU-A)

(P120 model only)

Heatsink temperature sensor (THHS) fault (Detail code 01)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
P72 and P96 models
Cause
(1)

INV board failure

Check method and remedy
If the problem recurs when the unit is put into operation, replace
the INV board.

P120 model
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

THHS sensor failure

Check the THHS sensor reading on the LED monitor.
Replace the sensor if it reads below - 30°C[ -22°F] or above
150°C[302°F].

(2)

Contact failure

Check the connector connection (CNTH) on the INV board.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 186 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5110

(YHMU-A)

Heatsink temperature sensor (THHS) fault (Detail code 01)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When a short or an open of THHS is detected just before or during the inverter operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
(1)

Check method and remedy

INV board failure

If the problem recurs when the unit is put into operation, replace
the INV board.

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

1. Error Code

5201
High-pressure sensor fault (63HS1)
2. Error definition and error detection method
If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less during the operation, the outdoor unit stops once, turns to antirestart mode for 3 minutes, and restarts after 3 minutes when the detected high pressure sensor is 0.098MPa [14psi] or more.
If the high pressure sensor detects 0.098MPa [14psi] or less just before the restart, the outdoor unit makes an error stop, and
the error code "5201" will appear.
During 3-minute antirestart mode, preliminary errors will be displayed on the LED display.
A error is not detected for 3 minutes after the compressor start, during defrost operation, or 3 minutes after defrost operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

High pressure sensor failure

(2)

Pressure drop due to refrigerant leak

(3)

Torn wire coating

(4)

A pin on the male connector is missing or contact failure

(5)

Disconnected wire

(6)

High pressure sensor input circuit failure on the control board

HWE08040

Refer to the page on the troubleshooting of
the high pressure sensor.
(IX [4] -1- (page 234))

- 187 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5301

(THMU-A)

ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the formula "output current < 2 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
P72 and P96 models
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter open output phase

Check the output wiring connections.

(2)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

(3)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].(page 246)

P120 model
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter open output phase

Check the output wiring connections.

(2)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

(3)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].(page 246)

(4)

Contact failure

Check the connection of the connector (CNCT2) on the INV boardINV board.

(5)

ACCT sensor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (4).

Refer to section -6-"Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 188 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5301

(YHMU-A)

ACCT sensor fault (Detail code 115)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the formula "output current < 1.5 Arms" remains satisfied for 10 seconds while the inverter is in operation.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter open output phase

Check the output wiring connections.

(2)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 254)

(3)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].(page 254)

Refer to section -6-"Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

1. Error Code

5301

(THMU-A)

(P120 model only)

DCCT sensor fault (Detail code116)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When the bus current less than 18 Apeak is detected at startup (6Hz)
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Contact failure

Check the contact of the connector (CNCT) on the INV board, and the
contact the connector on DCCT side.

(2)

Misorientation

Check the installation direction of DCCT.

(3)

DCCT sensor failure

Replace the DCCT sensor.

(4)

INV board failure

Replace the INV board.

Refer to section -6-"Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

1. Error Code

5301
ACCT sensor circuit fault (Detail code 117)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When an error value is detected with the ACCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].

(2)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].

Refer to section -6-"Inverter" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the inverter.
HWE08040

- 189 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5301

(THMU-A)

(P120 model only)

DCCT sensor circuit fault (Detail code118)
2. Error definition and error detection method
When an error value is detected with the DCCT detection circuit just before the inverter starts
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Contact failure

Check for good contact of the INV board connector CNCT and the connector on the DCCT side.

(2)

INV board failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [1], [3], [4].(page 246)

(3)

DCCT sensor failure

Replace the DCCT sensor.

(4)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

(5)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6-.(page 244)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

1. Error Code

5301

(THMU-A)

Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector (Detail code 119)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
P72 and P96 models
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter output wiring problem

Check output wiring connections.
Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12
and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [3], [4].(page 247)

(3)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

P120 model
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

ACCT sensor disconnection

Check the connection of the connector (CNCT2) on the INV board.
Check for proper mounting of ACCT.

(2)

ACCT sensor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (4).(page 249)

(3)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [3], [4].(page 247)

(4)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 190 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5301

(YHMU-A)

Open-circuited IPM/Loose ACCT connector (Detail code 119)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Presence of enough current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before inverter startup.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter output wiring problem

Check output wiring connections.
Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12
and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [3], [4].(page 255)

(3)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 254)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

1. Error Code

5301

(THMU-A)

Faulty ACCT wiring (Detail code 120)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before startup. (Detection of
improperly mounted ACCT sensor)
3. Cause, check method and remedy
P72 and P96 models
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter output wiring problem

Check output wiring connections.
Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12
and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [3], [4].(page 247)

(3)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

(4)

INV board failure

Replace the INV board.

P120 model
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Wrongly mounted ACCT sensor

Check for proper mounting of ACCT.
Refer to IX [4] -6- (4).

(2)

ACCT sensor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (4).(page 249)

(3)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [3], [4].(page 247)

(4)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 246)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (THMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 244)

HWE08040

- 191 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5301

(YHMU-A)

Faulty ACCT wiring (Detail code 120)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Presence of target current cannot be detected during the self-diagnostic operation immediately before startup.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Inverter output wiring problem

Check output wiring connections.
Confirm that the U- and W-phase output cables are put through CT12
and CT22 on the INV board respectively.

(2)

Inverter failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [3], [4].(page 255)

(3)

Compressor failure

Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [2].(page 254)

Refer to section -6- "Inverter (YHMU-A)" under part [4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts for error codes related to the
inverter.(page 252)

HWE08040

- 192 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

5701
Loose float switch connector
2. Error definition and error detection method
Detection of the disconnected float switch (open-phase condition) during operation
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) CN4F disconnection or contact failure
Check for disconnection of the connector (CN4F) on the indoor unit control board.

1. Error Code

6201
Remote controller board fault (nonvolatile memory error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
This error is detected when the data cannot be read out from the built-in nonvolatile memory on the remote controller.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Remote controller failure
Replace the remote controller.

1. Error Code

6202
Remote controller board fault (clock IC error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
This error is detected when the built-in clock on the remote controller is not properly functioning.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
(1) Remote controller failure
Replace the remote controller.

HWE08040

- 193 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6600
Address overlap
2. Error definition and error detection method
An error in which signals from more than one indoor units with the same address are received
The address and attribute that appear on the remote controller indicate the controller that detected the error.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

Two or more of the following have the same address:
Outdoor units, indoor units, LOSSNAY units, controllers such as M-NET remote controllers.

6600 "01" appears on the remote controller
Unit #01 detected the error.
Two or more units in the system have 01 as their address.

Find the unit that has the same address as that of the
error source.
Once the unit is found, correct the address. Then,
turn off the outdoor units, indoor units, and LOSSNAY units, keep them all turned off for at least five
minutes, and turn them back on.

1. Error Code

6601
Polarity setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error detected when transmission processor cannot distinguish the polarities of the M-NET transmission line.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

No voltage is applied to the M-NET transmission line
that G(B)-50A is connected to.

(2)

M-NET transmission line to which G(B)-50A is connected is short-circuited.

HWE08040

- 194 -

Check if power is supplied to the M-NET transmission
line of the G(B)-50A, and correct any problem found.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6602
Transmission processor hardware error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Although "0" was surely transmitted by the transmission processor, "1" is displayed on the transmission line.
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause
1) When the wiring work of or the polarity of either the indoor or outdoor transmission line is performed or is changed while the
power is on, the transmitted data will collide, the wave shape will be changed, and an error will be detected.
2) Grounding fault of the transmission line
3) When grouping the indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units, the male power supply connectors on the multiple
outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40).
4) When the power supply unit for transmission lines is used in the system connected with MELANS, the male power supply
connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the outdoor unit.
5) Controller failure of the source of the error
6) When the transmission data is changed due to the noise on the transmission line
7) Voltage is not applied on the transmission line for centralized control (in case of grouped indoor units connected to different
outdoor units or in case of the system connected with MELANS)
4. Check method and remedy
YES

Is the transmission line work
performed while the power is on?

Turn off the power source of outdoor/indoor
units, and turn them on again.

NO
Check the power source of the indoor unit.
NO

188 / 253V?

Faulty power source work

YES
Check the transmission line work is performed
and the shielded wire is treated properly.
Grounding fault or does the shielded
wire contact with the transmission line?

YES

Improper transmission line work

NO
System ?

Single-outdoor-unit system

Multiple-outdoor-unit system

System with the power supply
unit for transmission lines

Confirm that the power supply
connector on the outdoor
unit is not plugged into CN40.

Confirm that the power supply
connector on the outdoor
unit is not plugged into CN40.

Is the male power supply connector
connected to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) on only one
of the outdoor unit?

YES

NO
Tightly reconnect the male power
supply connector to the female
power supply switch connector (CN40).

Investigation into the
transmission line noise

Noise exist?

NO

Is the male power supply connector
connected to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) ?
YES
Disconnect the male
power supply on
CN40 and connect it to CN41

*For the investigation method, follow

YES

Investigation into the
cause of the noise

NO
Controller failure of the
source of the error

Correct the error.

HWE08040

- 195 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6603
Transmission line bus busy error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted for 4-10 minutes in a row due to bus-busy
Generated error when the command cannot be transmitted to the transmission line for 4-10 minutes in a row due to noise
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

The transmission processor cannot be transmitted as the short-wavelength voltage like noise exists consecutively on the transmission line.

(2)

Error source controller failure

No noise indicates that the error source controller is a failure. If noise exists, investigate the noise.
-> No noise indicates that the error source controller is a
failure.
-> If noise exists, investigate the noise.

1. Error Code

6606
Communication error between device and transmission processors
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication error between the main microcomputer on the indoor unit board and the microcomputer for transmission
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Data is not properly transmitted due to accidental
erroneous operation of the controller of the error
source.

(2)

Error source controller failure

HWE08040

- 196 -

Turn off the power source of the outdoor and the indoor
units.(When the power source is turned off separately, the
microcomputer will not be reset, and the error will not be
corrected.)
-> If the same error occurs, the error source controller is
a failure.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(1) System with one outdoor unit
Error
source address
Outdoor
unit (OC)

Indoor unit
(IC)

LOSSNAY
(LC)

M-NET remote controller (RC)

HWE08040

Error display

Detection
method

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to OC

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at RC
transmission to IC

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to LC

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to RC

Cause
(1)

Contact failure of transmission
line of OC or IC

(2)

Decrease of transmission line
voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission
wiring.
Farthest:200 m [656ft] or less
Remote controller wiring:
10m [32ft] or less

(3)

Erroneous sizing of transmission
line (Not within the range below).
Wire diameter:
1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more

(4)

Indoor unit control board failure

(1)

When IC unit address is changed
or modified during operation.

(2)

Faulty or disconnected IC transmission wiring

(3)

Disconnected IC connector
(CN2M)

(4)

Indoor unit controller failure

(5)

M-NET remote controller failure

(1)

The power source of LOSSNAY
has been shut off.

(2)

When the address of LOSSNAY
is changed in the middle of the
operation

(3)

Faulty or disconnected transmission wiring of LOSSNAY

(4)

Disconnected connector (CN1)
on LOSSNAY

(5)

Controller failure of LOSSNAY

(1)

Faulty transmission wiring at IC
unit side.

(2)

Faulty wiring of the transmission
line for M-NET remote controller

(3)

When the address of M-NET remote controller is changed in the
middle of the operation

(4)

M-NET remote controller failure

- 197 -

Check method and remedy
Turn off the power source of the
outdoor unit, and turn it on
again.
If the error is accidental, it will
run normally. If not, check the
causes (1) - (4).

Turn off the outdoor/indoor units
for 5 or more minutes, and turn
them on again.
If the error is accidental, they
will run normally.
If not, check the causes (1) - (5).

Turn off the power source of
LOSSNAY and turn it on again.
If the error is accidental, it will
run normally.
If not, check the causes (1) - (5).

Turn off the power source of the
outdoor unit for 5 minutes or
more, and turn it on again.
If the error is accidental, it will
run normally.
If not, check the causes (1) - (4).

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple outdoor units
Error
source
address

Error display

Detection
method

Outdoor
unit
(OC)

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
OC

Indoor
unit
(IC)

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at RC
transmission to
IC

Cause

Check method and remedy

Same cause as that for system with one outdoor unit

Same remedy as that for system with one outdoor unit

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (5) for 1)
system with one outdoor unit

Turn off the power sources of
the outdoor and indoor units
for 5 or more minutes, and turn
them on again. If the error is
accidental, the will run normally.If not, check the cause 2).

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit 2)
of the transmission line for
the outdoor unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7)

Check the causes of (1) - (5). If
the cause is found, correct it. If
no cause is found, check 3).

(3)

When multiple outdoor units 3)
are connected and the power source of one of the outdoor units has been shut off.

Check the LED displays for
troubleshooting on other remote controllers whether an
error occurs.

(4)

The male power supply connector of the outdoor unit is
not connected to the female
power supply switch connector (CN40).

(5)

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more outdoor
units are connected to the female power supply switch
connector (CN40) for centralized control.

If an error is found,
-> If an error is found, check
the check code definition, and
correct the error.
If no error is found,
-> Indoor unit board failure

If an error occurs, after the
unit runs normally once, the
following causes may be
considered.
Total capacity error
(7100)
Capacity code error
(7101)
Error in the number of
connected units (7102)
Address setting error
(7105)

HWE08040

- 198 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple outdoor units
Error
source
address
LOSSNAY
(LC)

Error display

Detection
method

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
LC

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Factors (1) through (5) in the 1)
"Factors in system with one
outdoor unit" (When performing an interlocked operation
of the LOSSNAY unit and the
indoor units that are connected to different outdoor units.)

Turn off the power source of
LOSSNAY for 5 or more minutes, and turn it on again. If the
error is accidental, it will run
normally.If not, check the
cause 2).

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit 2)
of the transmission line for
the outdoor unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7)

Check the causes of (1) - (5). If
the cause is found, correct it. If
no cause is found, check 3).

(3)

When multiple outdoor units
are connected and the power
source of one of the outdoor
units has been shut off.

Same cause as that for indoor
unit described in 3)

(4)

The male power supply connector of the outdoor unit is
not connected to the female
power supply switch connector (CN40).

(5)

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more outdoor
units are connected to the female power supply switch
connector (CN40) for centralized control.

3)

If an error occurs, after the
unit runs normally once, the
following causes may be considered.
Total capacity error
(7100)
Capacity code error
(7101)
Error in the number of
connected units (7102)
Address setting error
(7105)

HWE08040

- 199 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(2) Grouping of units in a system with multiple outdoor units
Error
source
address
M-NET remote controller
(RC)

Error display

Detection
method

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
RC

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (4) for
system with one outdoor unit

1)

Turn off the power source of
LOSSNAY for 5 or more minutes, and turn it on again. If the
error is accidental, it will run
normally.If not, check the
cause 2).

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit 2)
of the transmission line for
the outdoor unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection (TB7)

Check the causes of (1) - (5). If
the cause is found, correct it. If
no cause is found, check 3).

(3)

When multiple outdoor units
are connected and the power
source of one of the outdoor
units has been shut off.

Same cause as that for indoor
unit described in 3)

(4)

The male power supply connector of the outdoor unit is
not connected to the female
power supply switch connector (CN40).

(5)

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more outdoor
units are connected to the female power supply switch
connector (CN40) for centralized control.

3)

If the problem recurs after
normal operation is restored,
the problem is caused by one
of the following factors:
Total capacity error
(7100)
Capacity code setting
error (7101)
Error in the number of
connected units (7102)
Address setting error
(7105)

HWE08040

- 200 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)
Error
source
address

Error display

Detection
method

Cause

Check method and remedy

Outdoor
unit
(OC)

M-NET remote
controller (RC)
System controller (SC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to OC

Same cause as that for system with one
outdoor unit

Same remedy as that for
system with one outdoor
unit

Indoor
unit
(IC)

M-NET remote
controller (RC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at RC
transmission to IC

Same as grouping of units in a system
with multiple outdoor units

Same remedy as that for
grouping of units in a system with multiple outdoor
units

Error occurrence on some IC

Same remedy as that for
system with one outdoor
unit

System control- No acknowl- 1.
ler (SC)
edgement
(ACK) at SC (1)
transmission to IC
2.

HWE08040

Same cause as that for system with one
outdoor unit
Error occurrence on all IC in the system
with one outdoor unit

(1)

Total capacity error (7100)

(2)

Capacity code error (7101)

(3)

Error in the number of connected units
(7102)

1) Check the LED display
for troubleshooting on the
outdoor unit.
If an error is found,
check the check code
definition, and correct
the error.
If no error is found,
check 2).

(4)

Address setting error (7105)

(5)

Disconnection or short circuit of the trans- 2) Check (5) - (7) on the left.
mission line for the outdoor unit on the terminal block for centralized control line
connection (TB7)

(6)

Turn off the power source of the outdoor
unit

(7)

Malfunction of electrical system for the
outdoor unit

3.

Error occurrence on all IC

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (7) described in 2.

(2)

The male power supply connectors on 2
or more outdoor units are connected to
the female power supply switch connector
(CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control.

(3)

Disconnection or shutdown of the power
source of the power supply unit for transmission line

(4)

System controller (MELANS) malfunction
- 201 -

Check voltage of the
transmission line for centralized control.
20V or more: Check (1)
and (2) on the left.
Less than 20V: Check
(3) on the left.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)
Error
source
address
M-NET remote controller
(RC)

Error display

Detection
method

M-NET remote controller
(RC)
System controller (SC)
MA remote
controller (MA)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
RC

System controller
(SC)

No acknowledgement
(ACK) at
MELANS
transmission to
RC

Cause

1.

Check method and remedy

Same as grouping of units in a system with multiple outdoor units

Same remedy as that for
grouping of units in a system
with multiple outdoor units

Error occurrence on some IC

Same remedy as that for
system with one outdoor unit

(1) Same cause as that for system
with one outdoor unit
2.

Error occurrence on all IC in the
system with one outdoor unit

1)

 If an error is found, check
the check code definition,
and correct the error.
If no error is found, check
the cause 2).

(1) An error is found by the outdoor
unit.
Total capacity error (7100)
Capacity code error (7101)
Error in the number of connected
units (7102)
Address setting error (7105)
(2) Disconnection or short circuit of the
transmission line for the outdoor
unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection
(TB7)

Check the LED display for
troubleshooting on the outdoor unit.

2)

Check (2) - (4) on the left.

(3) Turn off the power source of the
outdoor unit
(4) Malfunction of electrical system for
the outdoor unit
3.

Error occurrence on all IC

Check (1) - (4) on the left.

(1) Same causes as (1) - (4) described
in 2.
(2) When the power supply unit for
transmission lines is used and the
male power supply connector is
connected to the female power
supply switch connector (CN40) for
the transmission line for centralized control
(3) Disconnection or shutdown of the
power source of the power supply
unit for transmission line
(4) System controller (MELANS) malfunction
HWE08040

- 202 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(3) System connected to the system controllers (MELANS)
Error
source
address
System
controller
(SC)

HWE08040

Error display
M-NET remote controller
(RC)
MA remote
controller
(MA)

Detection
method
No acknowledgement
(ACK) at IC
transmission to
SC

Cause
1.

Error display on some displays on
M-NET remote controllers

(1)

Faulty wiring of the transmission
line for M-NET remote controller

(2)

Disconnection or contact failure of
the transmission connector for MNET remote controller

(3)

M-NET remote controller failure

2.

Error occurrence on all IC in the
system with one outdoor unit

(1)

An error is found by the outdoor
unit.
Total capacity error (7100)
Capacity code error (7101)
Error in the number of connected
units (7102)
Address setting error (7105)

(2)

Disconnection or short circuit of the
transmission line for the outdoor
unit on the terminal block for centralized control line connection
(TB7)

(3)

Turn off the power source of the
outdoor unit

(4)

Malfunction of electrical system for
the outdoor unit

3.

Error display on all displays on MNET remote controllers

(1)

Same causes as (1) - (4) described
in 2.

(2)

When the power supply unit for
transmission lines is used and the
male power supply connector is
connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the
transmission line for centralized
control

(3)

Disconnection or shutdown of the
power source of the power supply
unit for transmission line

(4)

System controller (MELANS) malfunction
- 203 -

Check method and remedy
Check (1) - (3) on the left.

1) Check the LED display for
troubleshooting on the outdoor unit.
 If an error is found, check
the check code definition,
and correct the error.
If no error is found, check
the cause 2)

2) Check (2) - (4) on the left.

Check (1) - (4) on the left

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6607
No ACK error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The error is detected when no acknowledgement (ACK signal) is received after the transmission. (eg. When the data is transmitted six times in a row with 30 seconds interval, the error is detected on the transmission side.)

The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller which did not provide
the response (ACK).
3. System configuration
(4) Errors that are not limited to a particular system
Error
source address
Address
which
should not
be existed

Error display

Detection
method

-

-

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Although the address of MNET remote controller has
been changed after the group
is set using M-NET remote
controller, the indoor unit is
keeping the memory of the
previous address. The same
symptom will appear for the
registration with SC.

Delete unnecessary information of non-existing address
which some indoor units have.
Use either of the following two
methods for deletion.

(2)

1)
Although the address of
LOSSNAY has been changed
after the interlock registration
of LOSSNAY is made using MNET remote controller, the indoor unit is keeping the memory of the previous address.

Address deletion by M-NET remote controller
Delete unnecessary address information using the manual setting function of M-NET remote
controller. Refer to this service
handbook "IV [2] Group Settings and Interlock Settings via
the ME Remote Controller 1. (3)
Address deletion".

2)

Deletion of connection information of the outdoor unit by the
deleting switch
Note that this switch deletes
all the group information set
via M-NET remote controller
and all the interlock information of LOSSNAY and the indoor unit.
Turn off the power source of
the outdoor unit, and wait for
5 minutes.
Turn on the dip switch (SW22) on the outdoor unit control
board.
Turn on the power source of
the outdoor unit, and wait for
5 minutes.
Turn off the power source of
the outdoor unit, and wait for
5 minutes.
Turn off the dip switch (SW22) on the outdoor unit control
board.
 Turn on the power source of
the outdoor unit.

HWE08040

- 204 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6608
No response error
2. Error definition and error detection method
When no response command is returned although acknowledgement (ACK) is received after transmission, an error is detected.
When the data is transmitted 10 times in a row with 3 seconds interval, an error is detected on the transmission side.
The address/attribute appeared on the display on the remote controller indicates the controller where an error occurred.
3. Cause
1) The transmission line work is performed while the power is on, the transmitted data will collide, and the wave shape will be
changed.
2) The transmission is sent and received repeatedly due to noise.
3) Decrease of transmission line voltage/signal by exceeding acceptable range of transmission wiring.
Farthest:200m [656ft] or less
Remote controller wiring:12m [39ft] or less
4) The transmission line voltage/signal is decreased due to erroneous sizing of transmission line.
Wire diameter: 1.25mm2[AWG16] or more
4. Check method and remedy
1) When an error occurs during commissioning, turn off the power sources for the outdoor unit, indoor unit, and LOSSNAY for 5
or more minutes, and then turn them on again.
 When they return to normal operation, the cause of the error is the transmission line work performed with the power on.
If an error occurs again, check the cause 2).
2) Check 3) and 4) above.
If the cause is found, correct it.
 If no cause is found, check 3).
3) Check transmission wave shape/ noise on trans-mission line by followingIX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise(page 231).
Noise is the most possible cause of the error "6608".

HWE08040

- 205 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6831
MA controller signal reception error (No signal reception)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
No proper data has been received for 3 minutes.
3.
1)
2)
3)

4)
5)
6)
7)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit.
All the remote controllers are set to SUB.
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off.
Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines
Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller
Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NO]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 231)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE08040

- 206 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6832
MA remote controller signal transmission error (Synchronization error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
Failure to detect opening in the transmission path and unable to send signals
Indoor unit : 3 minutes
Remote controller : 6 seconds
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit
2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN
Overlapped indoor unit address
Noise interference on the remote controller lines
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NO]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 231)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE08040

- 207 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6833
MA remote controller signal transmission error (Hardware error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
An error occurs when the transmitted data and the received data differ for 30 times in a row.
3.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit
2 or more remote controllers are set to MAIN
Overlapped indoor unit address
Noise interference on the remote controller lines
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
6) Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller
4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NO]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 231)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on.
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE08040

- 208 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

6834
MA controller signal reception error (Start bit detection error)
2. Error definition and error detection method
Communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is not done properly.
No proper data has been received for 2 minutes.
3.
1)
2)
3)

4)
5)
6)
7)

Cause
Contact failure of the remote controller lines of MA remote controller or the indoor unit.
All the remote controllers are set to SUB.
Failure to meet wiring regulations
Wire length
Wire size
Number of remote controllers
Number of indoor units
The remote controller is removed after the installation without turning the power source off.
Noise interference on the remote controller transmission lines
Faulty circuit that is on the indoor board and performs transmission/ reception of the signal from the remote controller
Problems with the circuit on the remote controller that sends or receives the signals from the remote controller

4.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

Check method and remedy
Check for disconnected or loose transmission lines for the indoor units or MA remote controllers.
Confirm that the power is supplied to the main power source and the remote controller line.
Confirm that MA remote controller's capacity limit is not exceeded.
Check the sub/main setting of the MA remote controllers.One of them must be set to MAIN.
Diagnose the remote controller (described in the remote controller installation manual).
[OK]: no problems with the remote controller (check the wiring regulations)
[NO]: Replace the MA remote controller.
[6832, 6833, ERC]: Due to noise interference 
6) Check wave shape/noise on MA remote controller line by following "IX [3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/
Noise".(page 231)
7) When no problems are found with items 1) through 6), replace the indoor unit board or the MA remote controller.
The following status can be confirmed on LED1 and 2 on the indoor unit board.
If LED1 is lit, the main power source of the indoor unit is turned on
If LED2 is lit, the MA remote controller line is being powered.

HWE08040

- 209 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7100
Total capacity error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The model total of indoor units in the system with one outdoor unit exceeds limitations.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy,
Error source
Outdoor unit

Cause
(1)

The model total of indoor units in the sys- 1)
tem with one outdoor unit exceeds the following table.

Check the model total (capacity code total) of indoor units connected.

2)

Check the model name (capacity code) of the
connected indoor unit set by the switch (SW2 on
indoor unit board).

Capacity Total

Model

(2)

Check method and remedy

72 model

96

96 model

124

120 model

156

144 model

187

168 model

218

192 model

249

216 model

280

240 model

312

264 model

343

288 model

374

312 model

405

336 model

436

360 model

468

When the model name set by the switch is different from that of the unit connected, turn off the
power source of the outdoor and the indoor units,
and change the setting of the model name (capacity code).

The model selection switches (SW5-1 - 54) on the outdoor unit are set incorrectly.

Model
1

SW5
2
3

Check the setting for the model selection switch
on the outdoor unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 5-4 on
the outdoor unit control board).

4

72 model OFF ON OFF OFF
96 model ON

ON OFF OFF

120 model OFF OFF ON

(3)

HWE08040

OFF

The outdoor unit and the auxiliary unit
(OS) that is connected to the same system
are not properly connected.

- 210 -

Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are
properly connected.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7101
Capacity code setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Connection of incompatible (wrong capacity code) indoor unit or outdoor unit
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit

Cause
(1)

Check method and remedy

The model name (capacity code) set by
the switch (SW2) is wrong.
*The capacity of the indoor unit can be
confirmed by the self-diagnosis function
(SW1 operation) of the outdoor unit.

Outdoor unit

(2)

The model selection switches (SW5-1 5-4) on the outdoor unit are set incorrectly.

Model
1

SW5
2
3

1)

Check the model name (capacity code) of the indoor unit which has the error source address set by
the switch (SW2 on indoor unit board).
When the model name set by the switch is different
from that of the unit connected, turn off the power
source of the outdoor and the indoor units, and
change the setting of the capacity code.
Check the setting for the model selection switch on
the outdoor unit (Dipswitches SW5-1 - 5-4 on the
outdoor unit control board).

4

72 model OFF ON OFF OFF
96 model ON

ON OFF OFF

120 model OFF OFF ON

HWE08040

OFF

- 211 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7102
Wrong number of connected units
2. Error definition and error detection method
The number of connected indoor units is "0" or exceeds the allowable value.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Outdoor unit

Cause
(1)

Check method and remedy

Number of indoor units connected to the outdoor
terminal block (TB3) for indoor/ outdoor transmission lines exceeds limitations described below.
Number of units

Restriction on the number of units

Total number of
indoor units

15 : P72 model

1)

Check whether the number of units
connected to the outdoor terminal
block (TB3) for indoor/ outdoor
transmission lines does not exceed
the limitation. (See (1) and (2) on
the left.)

20 : P96 model
26 : P120 model
31 : P144 model
36 : P168 model
41 : P192 model
46 : P216 model
50 : P240 - 360 models

Total number of
LOSSNAY units
(During auto
address
start-up only)
Total number of
outdoor units

0 or 1

1 : 72 - 120 models
2 : 144 - 240 models
3 : P264 - 360 models

(2)

Disconnected transmission line of the outdoor unit 2)

Check (2) - (3) on the left.

(3)

Short-circuited transmission line
When (2) and (3) apply, the following display will
appear.

3)

Check whether the transmission
line for the terminal block for centralized control (TB7) is not connected to the terminal block for the
indoor/outdoor transmission line
(TB3).

4)

Check the setting for the model selection switch on the outdoor unit
(Dipswitches SW5-7 on the outdoor
unit control board).

M-NET remote controller
Nothing appears on the remote controller because it is not powered.
MA remote controller
"HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" blinks.

HWE08040

(4)

The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the outdoor unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to ON)

(5)

Outdoor unit address setting error
The outdoor units in the same refrigerant circuit do
not have sequential address numbers.

- 212 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7105
Address setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Erroneous setting of OC unit address
3. Cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Outdoor unit

Cause

Check method and remedy

Erroneous setting of OC unit address
The address of outdoor unit is not being set to 51 100.

Check that the address of OC unit is set to 51100.
Reset the address if it stays out of the range,
while shutting the power source off.

1. Error Code

7106
Attribute setting error
2. Error definition and error detection method
Error source
-

HWE08040

Cause

Check method and remedy

A remote controller for use with indoor
units, such as the MA remote controller, is
connected to the OA processing unit whose
attribute is FU.

- 213 -

To operate the OA processing unit directly via a remote controller for use with indoor units, such as the
MA remote controller, set the DIP SW 3-1 on the OA
processing unit to ON.
Operation Method

SW3-1

Interlocked operation
with the indoor unit

OFF

Direct operation via the
MA remote controller

ON

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7110
Connection information signal transmission/reception error
2. Error definition and error detection method
The given indoor unit is inoperable because it is not properly connected to the outdoor unit in the same system.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Outdoor unit

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Power to the transmission booster is cut off.

1)

Confirm that the power to the transmission
booster is not cut off by the booster being
connected to the switch on the indoor unit.
(The unit will not function properly unless the
transmission booster is turned on.)

(2)

Power resetting of the transmission booster
and outdoor unit.

(3)

Wiring failure between OC and OS

2)

Confirm that the TB3 on the OC and OS are
properly connected.

(4)

Broken wire between OC and OS.

3)

(5)

The model selection switch (SW5-7) on the
outdoor unit is set to OFF. (Normally set to
ON)

Check the model selection switch on the outdoor unit (Dipswitch SW5-7 on the control
board.).

->Reset the power to the outdoor unit.

1. Error Code

7111
Remote controller sensor fault
2. Error definition and error detection method
This error occurs when the temperature data is not sent although the remote controller sensor is specified.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Indoor unit
OA processing unit

HWE08040

Cause

Check method and remedy

The remote controller without the temperature
sensor (the wireless remote controller or the
M-NET compact remote controller (mounted
type)) is used and the remote controller sensor for the indoor unit is specified. (SW1-1 is
ON.)

- 214 -

Replace the remote controller with the one
with built-in temperature sensor.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7113
Function setting error (incorrect resistor connection)

2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Outdoor unit

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Wiring fault

(Detail code 15)

(2)

Loose connectors, short-circuit, con- 1)
tact failure

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

(Detail code 14)
(3)

(4)

Incompatible control board and INV 1)
board (replacement with a wrong circuit board)
2)

Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for
proper connection.

DIP SW setting error on the control
board

Check the settings of SW5-1 through SW5-4 on the
control board.

3)

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

(Detail code 12)
1)

Check the connector CNTYP2 on the control board for
proper connection.

2)

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

3)

Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for
proper connection.

4)

Check the settings of SW5-1 through SW5-4 on the
control board.

(Detail code 16)
1)

Check the connector CNTYP on the INV board for
proper connection.

2)

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

3)

Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for
proper connection.

4)

Check the settings of SW5-1 through SW5-4 on the
control board.

5)

Check the wiring between the control board and INV
board. (Refer to the section on Error code 0403.)

(Detail code 00, 01, 05)
1)

Check the wiring between the control board and INV
board. (Refer to the section on Error code 0403.)

2)

Check the settings of SW5-1 through SW5-4 on the
control board.

3)

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

4)

Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for
proper connection.

(Detail code Miscellaneous)
*If a set-model-name identification error occurs, check
the detail code on the unit on which the error occurred.
The detail code that appears on other units will be different from the ones shown above.

HWE08040

- 215 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7117
Model setting error

2. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Outdoor unit

Cause

Check method and remedy

(1)

Wiring fault

(Detail code 15)

(2)

Loose connectors, short-circuit, con- 1)
tact failure

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

(Detail code 14)
1)

Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for
proper connection.

(Detail code 12)
1)

Check the connector CNTYP2 on the control board for
proper connection.

2)

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

(Detail code 16)
1)

Check the connector CNTYP on the INV board for
proper connection.

2)

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

3)

Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for
proper connection.

4)

Check the wiring between the control board and INV
board. (Refer to the section on Error code 0403.)

(Detail code 00, 01, 05)
1)

Check the wiring between the control board and INV
board. (Refer to the section on Error code 0403.)

2)

Check the settings of SW5-1 through SW5-4 on the
control board.

3)

Check the connector CNTYP5 on the control board for
proper connection.

4)

Check the connector CNTYP4 on the control board for
proper connection.

(Detail code Miscellaneous)
*If a set-model-name identification error occurs, check
the detail code on the unit on which the error occurred.
The detail code that appears on other units will be different from the ones shown above.

HWE08040

- 216 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
1. Error Code

7130
Incompatible unit combination
2. Error definition and error detection method
The check code will appear when the indoor units with different refrigerant systems are connected.
3. Error source, cause, check method and remedy
Error source
Outdoor unit

HWE08040

Cause

Check method and remedy

The connected indoor unit is for use with R22
or R407C. Incorrect type of indoor units are
connected.
The M-NET connection adapter is connected
to the indoor unit system in a system in which
the Slim Model (A control) of units are connected to the M-NET.

- 217 -

Check the connected indoor unit model.
Check whether the connecting adapter for
M-NET is not connected to the indoor unit.
(Connect the connecting adapter for M-NET
to the outdoor unit.)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-1- Troubleshooting according to the remote controller malfunction or the external input error
In the case of MA remote controller
1. Phenomena
Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running.(Power indicator
does not appear on the screen.)
(1) Cause
1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit.
The main power of the indoor unit is not on.
The connector on the indoor unit board has come off.
The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted.
Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit.
2) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
Short-circuited MA remote controller wiring
Incorrect wiring of the MA remote controller cables
Incorrect connection of the MA remote wiring to the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) on the indoor unit
Wiring mixup between the MA remote controller cable and power supply cable
Reversed connection of the wire for the MA remote controller and the M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit
3) The number of the MA remote controllers that are connected to an indoor unit exceeds the allowable range (2 units).
4) The length or the diameter of the wire for the MA remote controller are out of specification.
5) Short circuit of the wire for the remote display output of the outdoor unit or reversed polarity connection of the relay.
6) The indoor unit board failure
7) MA remote controller failure
(2) Check method and remedy
1) Measure voltages of the MA remote controller terminal (among 1 to 3).
If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12V, the remote controller is a failure.
If no voltage is applied, check the causes 1) and 3) and if the cause is found, correct it.
If no cause is found, refer to 2).
2) Remove the wire for the remote controller from the terminal block (TB13) on the MA remote controller for the indoor unit, and
check voltage among 1 to 3.
If the voltage is between DC 9 and 12 V, check the causes 2) and 4) and if the cause is found, correct it.
If no voltage is applied, check the cause 1) and if the cause is found, correct it.
If no cause is found, check the wire for the remote display output (relay polarity).
If no further cause is found, replace the indoor unit board.

HWE08040

- 218 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In the case of MA remote controller
2. Phenomena
When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, the operation status briefly appears on the display, then it goes off,
and the display lights out immediately, and the unit stops.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Cause
The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the outdoor unit.
Short circuit of the transmission line.
Incorrect wiring of the M-NETtransmission line on the outdoorunit.
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).
The male power supply connectors on the multiple outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector
(CN40).
In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the outdoor unit.
4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit side.
5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or
disconnected connector.
(2) Check method and remedy
1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED.

Same symptom for all units in a
system with one outdoor unit?

NO
Measure voltages of the
terminal block for transmission
line (TB5) on the indoor unit.

YES
Check the
self-diagnosis LED

NO
Check 4.

Is the error code 7102
displayed?

YES

Check for
2 and 3.

17 - 30V?

YES
Check 5.

NO
Check 1).

YES
Correct
the error.

Error found?

NO
Indoor unit board or
MA remote controller failure

Correct the error.

Refer to section IX [4] -7- (2) for how to check the first item in the flowchart above.(page 261)(page 264)

HWE08040

- 219 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In the case of MA remote controller
3. Phenomena
"HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button
is pressed. ("HO" or "PLEASE WAIT" display will normally turn off 5 minutes later after the power on.)
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Cause
The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the outdoor unit.
Short-circuited transmission line
Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the outdoor unit.
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).
The male power supply connectors on the multiple outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector
(CN40).
In the system to which the power supply unit for transmission lines is connected, the male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) on the outdoor unit
4) Disconnected M-NET transmission line on the indoor unit.
5) Disconnected wire between the terminal block for M-NET line (TB5) of the indoor unit and the indoor unit board (CN2M) or
disconnected connector.
6) Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller
Short-circuited wire for the MA remote controller
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller (No.2) and disconnected line to the terminal block.
Reversed daisy-chain connection between groups
Incorrect wiring for the MA remote controller to the terminal block for transmission line connection (TB5) on the indoor unit
The M-NET transmission line is connected incorrectly to the terminal block (TB13) for the MA remote controller.
7) The sub/main setting of the MA remote controller is set to sub.
8) 2 or more main MA remote controllers are connected.
9) Indoor unit board failure (MA remote controller communication circuit)
10) Remote controller failure
11) Outdoor unit failure (Refer toIX [7] Troubleshooting Using the Outdoor Unit LED Error Display.)(page 269)
(2) Check method and remedy
1) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED.

Same symptom for all units in a
system with one outdoor unit?

NO
Measure voltages of the
terminal block for transmission
line (TB5) on the indoor unit.

YES
Check the self-diagnosis LED
Check 4.
Is the error code 7102
displayed?

YES

NO

Check
2 and 3.

YES
Check for 5 and 6.

NO
YES
Error found?

17 - 30V?

YES

Correct
the error.

Replace the M-NET remote
controller with the MA
remote controller

Error found?

NO
Indoor unit board or
MA remote controller failure

NO
Check (1).
Correct
the error.

Refer to section IX [4] -7- (2) for how to check the first item in the flowchart above.(page 261)(page 264)

HWE08040

- 220 -

GB

HWE08040

YES

YES

YES

- 221 -

In the case of
MA remote controller
To 1.

NO

All the indoor unit
power failure?

NO

Is LED1 on the indoor
unit control board lit?

YES

NO

NO

Power on

YES

YES

Replace the MA remote controller.

In the case of
MA remote controller
To 1. - 2.

NO

Check the voltage between
the MA remote controller
terminals (A and B).
9-13VDC if the voltage is applied
and 0V if no voltage is applied.

NO

Blinking?
(Turns on momentarily
approximately every
20 seconds)

Replace the MA
remote controller.

NO

Does the MA remote controller
work properly when it is connected
to the specified indoor unit?

Check the
power supply.

Check whether the screw
on the wire is not loose.

Does the indoor unit make
an instantaneous stop?

YES

Does the unit work properly
when the wire for the MA
remote controller is
daisy-chained again?

NO

Is there an indoor unit on
which LED2 is turned off?

NO

YES

Power on

NO

Is "Centralized"
displayed?

NO

Error display?

NO

When the unit is operated with
the remote controller, will "ON"
appear on the display?

NO

Check the wire for
the remote controller.

Check the
power supply.

NO

Power supply voltage
AC188~253V?

YES

Use the wire that meets the specification.

YES

YES

YES

Keep the operation.

NO

Does an error occur when
the power is reset?

YES

Replace the indoor
unit control board.

Check the equipment
package indoor unit.

YES

Normal
(Is the thermo OFF
signal input?)

Normal

Replace the remote controller or
the indoor control board.

YES

When no error occurs

YES

Check for the wire for
the remote controller.
Replace the indoor unit control board.

NO

NO

No fault with the equipment
package indoor unit?

In the case of
MA remote controller
To 3.

In the case of
MA remote controller
To 2.
No.1 Refrigerant circuit check

NO

Is only the power source of the
indoor unit turn turned on again?

NO

If operated afterwards,
error 6602 or
6607 occurs.

NO

Is operation possible?

YES

Check for the M-NET
transmission line.

NO

Although No.1 refrigerant circuit
is normal, No.2 or No.3
refrigerant circuit remain stopped.

Refer to the error code list.

YES

Normal
"Centralized" is displayed.

YES

Turns off within approximately 5 minutes.
After the main power on, start the MA remote
controller. "HO" display will appear.

Keep displaying
for 5 or more minutes.

"HO"/"PLEASE WAIT" keeps
blinking on the MA remote controller.

Refer to the self-diagnosis list for
the displayed error code.

Normal

Set the SWA to "1".

YES

YES

YES

YES

Replace the indoor unit control board.

NO

Is the compulsory
thermo OFF (SWA)
switch set to "2" or "3"?

NO

External thermo
input setting?
(SW3-3=ON)

NO

DEMAND by MELANS?

NO

Error display?

NO

Thermo is OFF?

Check that no error occurs in other indoor units.

Short circuit of the
remote controller?

Connect 2 remote controllers or less.

YES

Replace the wire for the MA remote controller.

NO

Are the length or the diameter
of the wire for MA remote controller
out of specification?

NO

Disconnected wire for
the remote controller?
Disconnected wire to
the terminal block?
Disconnected relay connector?

NO

Check the voltage
between the MA remote controller
terminal blocks (TB15) (A and B).
9-13VDC if the voltage
is applied and 0V if no voltage
is applied.

YES

Replace the indoor unit control board.

NO

Is LED1 on the indoor unit
control board lit?
(Blinks for 2 or 3 seconds
approximately every
20 seconds)

NO

YES

Replace the remote controller
or the indoor control board.

YES

Normal
(Operate the unit with
external control equipment)

Is the unit grouped
with the equipment package
indoor unit?

Keep the operation.

Replace the remote controller
or the indoor control board.

YES

YES

NO

Does an error occur when
the power is reset?

NO

YES

Refer to the self-diagnosis list
for the displayed error code.

Is the operation by MELANS
forbidden or the input from external control
equipment allowed (SWC=ON)?

YES

YES

YES

Replace the indoor unit control
board where an error occurs.

Keep the operation.

NO

Does the number of the MA
remote controllers that are
connected to an indoor
unit exceed the allowable
range (2 units)?

YES

YES

YES

Does an error occur when
the power is reset?

Running group operation with
To 4.(1) 1
the MA remote controller?
*After correcting the error, daisy-chain
the wire for the MA remote controller again.
NO
YES

YES

When all wires used for
grouping are disconnected, is at
least one of the LED2 on the
grouped indoor units lit?

NO

All the indoor unit
power failure?

NO

Is LED2 on the indoor unit
control board blinking?

Replace the indoor
unit control board.

YES

After more than 20 seconds since
turning the power on, is LED2 check
of the indoor control board still
displayed?

NO

YES

Check the indoor unit on
which LED2 is lit.

NO

Running group operation with
the MA remote controller?

NO

Is " " displayed on
the remote controller?

NO

Blinking?

After turning the power on, check whether "HO"/
"PLEASE WAIT" is displayed on the remote controller.

In the case of
MA remote controller
To 2.
Check the malfunctioning
refrigerant circuit.

YES

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Flow chart
Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the indoor and the outdoor units do not start running.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of M-NET remote controller
1. Phenomena
Even if the operation button on the remote controller is pressed, the display remains unlit and the unit does not start running.
(Power indicator does not appear on the screen.)
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Cause
The power for the M-NET transmission line is not supplied from the outdoor unit.
Short circuit of the transmission line.
Incorrect wiring of the M-NET transmission line on the outdoor unit.
Disconnected wire for the MA remote controller or disconnected line to the terminal block.
The indoor transmission line is connected incorrectly to the transmission terminal block for centralized controller (TB7).
4) Disconnected transmission line on the remote controller.
5) Remote controller failure
6) Outdoor unit failure (Refer to 9 [7] Troubleshooting Using the Outdoor Unit LED Error Display.)(page 269)
(2) Check method and remedy
1) Check voltage of the transmission terminal block for of the M-NET remote controller.
If voltage between is 17V and 30V -> M-NET remote controller failure
 When voltage is 17V or less -> Refer to IX [4] -7- (2) "Outdoor unit transmission power source circuit failure judgment".
2) When 2) and 3) above apply, check code 7102 will be displayed on the self-diagnosis LED.

HWE08040

- 222 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of M-NET remote controller
2. Phenomena
When the remote controller operation SW is turned on, a temporary operation display is indicated, and the display lights out
immediately.
(1) Cause
1) The power is not supplied to the indoor unit.
The main power of the indoor unit (AC208/230V) is not on.
The connector on the indoor unit board has come off.
The fuse on the indoor unit board has melted.
Transformer failure and disconnected wire of the indoor unit
The indoor unit board failure
2) The outdoor control board failure
As the indoor unit does not interact with the outdoor unit, the outdoor unit model cannot be recognized.
(2) Check method and remedy
Check voltage of the power supply
terminal on the indoor unit.

Check LED1 on the
indoor unit control board.

NO

AC208/230V?

Is it lit?
When it is lit

Check the main power of
the power supply wire

YES

Turn on the
power again.

When it is off
Check the fuse on
or cannot be checked the circuit board.

YES

Melted?

Check 200V circuit for
short circuit and ground fault

NO
Check the connection
of the connector.

YES

Disconnected?

NO

*1

*1

Check the resistance value
of the transformer

NO

Within specification?

YES
Check for the change of LED
display by operating dip
switch SW1 for self-diagnosis.

Connector contact failure

Check the cause of the
disconnected transformer.
Ground fault on the circuit board
Ground fault of the sensor and the LEV

Check self-diagnosis function
of outdoor unit

NO

Changed?

YES

Check self-diagnosis function of
outdoor unit after the power on.
Changed?

NO

YES Indoor unit control

Accidental
error
Outdoor unit board failure

board failure

Correct
the error.

*1. Refer to the parts catalog “transformer check”.

HWE08040

- 223 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of M-NET remote controller
3. Phenomena
"HO" display on the remote controller does not disappear, and no operation is performed even if the button is pressed.
(1) Cause
Without using MELANS
1) Outdoor unit address is set to "00"
2) A wrong address is set.
The address of the indoor unit that is connected to the remote controller is incorrect. (It should equal the M-NET remote controller address plus 100.)
A wrong address is set to the M-NET remote controller. (100 must be added to the address of the indoor unit.)
3) Faulty wiring of the terminal block for transmission line (TB5) of the indoor unit in the same group with the remote controller.
4) The centralized control switch (SW2-1) on the outdoor unit is set to ON.
5) Disconnection or faulty wiring of indoor unit transmission line.
6) Disconnection between the terminal block for M-NET line connection (TB5) of the indoor unit and the male connector (CN2M)
7) The male power supply connectors on 2 or more outdoor units are connected to the female power supply switch connector
(CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control.
8) Outdoor unit control board failure
9) Outdoor unit control board failure
10) Remote controller failure
Interlocking control with MELANS
1) No group registration is made using MELANS. (The indoor unit and the M-NET remote controller are not grouped.)
2) Disconnected transmission line for centralized control (TB7) of the outdoor unit
3) The male power supply connector is connected to CN40 on more than one outdoor unit, or the connector is connected to CN40
on the outdoor unit in the system to which a power supply unit for transmission line is connected.
Using MELANS
1) When MELANS is used, "HO" display on the remote controller will disappear when the indoor unit and the local remote controller (M-NET remote controller) are grouped.
If "HO" does not disappear after the registration, check the causes (2) 1) - 3).
(2) Check method and remedy
Without using MELANS

NO

Are all the units in the system
experiencing the same problem?

YES

Check the address of the M-NET remote controller
on which "HO" is displayed.

Check the address of
the outdoor unit.
A wrong address is
set to the M-NET
remote controller.

*1
51 - 100?

NO

A wrong address is
set to the outdoor unit.

NO

YES

YES

Check the address of the
indoor unit to be coupled.

Check the centralized centralized
switch (SW2-1) on the outdoor unit.

NO
ON?

NO

Indoor unit + 100?

YES

A wrong address is
set to the indoor unit.

Wrong switch setting
Change it from
ON to OFF.

M-NET remote controller
- 100?

YES
Measure voltages of the terminal
block for M-NET transmission line
on the indoor unit.

Indoor unit control board failure
Wrong wiring of the
M-NET transmission
line of the indoor unit

NO

17 - 30V?

YES
Check connection between indoor M-NET
transmission terminal block (TB5) and the
male connector (CN2M)

Disconnected
connector (CN2M)

YES

Disconnected?

NO

Indoor unit board or
remote controller failure
Correct
the error.

*1. When the indoor unit address is set to 1 - 50, the address will be forcibly set to 100.

HWE08040

- 224 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

In case of M-NET remote controller
4. Phenomena
"88" appears on the remote controller when the address is registered or confirmed.
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

An error occurs when the address is registered or confirmed. (common)
1.

A wrong address is set to the unit to be coupled.

(1)

Confirm the address of unit to be coupled.

2.

The transmission line of the unit to be coupled is dis- (2)
connected or is not connected.

Check the connection of transmission line.

3.

Circuit board failure of the unit to be coupled

(3)

Check voltage of the terminal block for transmission
line of the unit to be coupled.

1)

Normal if voltage is between DC17 and 30V.

2)

Check (5) in case other than 1).

(4)

Check for the main power of LOSSNAY.

4.

Improper transmission line work

Generates at interlocking registration between LOSSNAY and the indoor unit
5.

The power of LOSSNAY is OFF.

Generates at confirmation of controllers used in the
system in which the indoor units connected to different outdoor units are grouped
6.

The power of the outdoor unit to be confirmed has
been cut off.

(5)

Check the power supply of the outdoor unit which is
coupled with the unit to be confirmed.

7.

Transmission line is disconnected from the terminal
block for central control system connection (TB7) on
the outdoor unit.

(6)

Check that the transmission line for centralized
control (TB7) of the outdoor unit is not disconnected.

8.

When the indoor units connected to different outdoor (7)
units are grouped without MELANS, the male power
supply connector is not connected to the female
power supply switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for centralized control.

Check voltage of the transmission line for centralized control.

9.

The male power supply connectors on 2 or more out- 1)
door units are connected to the female power supply
switch connector (CN40) for the transmission line for
centralized control.

Normal when voltage is between 10V and 30V

10.

In the system to which MELANS is connected, the
2)
male power supply connector is connected to the female power supply switch connector (CN40) for the
transmission line for centralized control.

Check 8 - 11 described on the left in case other than
1).

11.

Short circuit of the transmission line for centralized
control

HWE08040

- 225 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Both for MA remote controller and M-NET remote controller
1. Phenomena
Although cooling operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
1.

Check method and remedy

Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.
Faulty detection of pressure sensor.
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high discharge temperature
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high pressure
Pressure drops excessively.

(1)

Check pressure difference between the detected
pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual
pressure with self-diagnosis LED.
-> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check
the pressure sensor. (Refer to the page on Troubleshooting of Pressure Sensor).

Note:

Lower inlet pressure by the low pressure sensor
than the actual pressure causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
High pressure sensor

SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Low pressure sensor

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

(2)

Check temperature difference between the evaporating temperature (Te) and the target evaporating
temperature (Tem) with self-diagnosis LED.

Note:

Higher Te than Tem causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
Evaporating temperature Te
SW1

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Target evaporating temperature Tem
SW1

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Note:

2.

Indoor unit LEV malfunction
Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction (not enough opening) or protection works and
compressor frequency does not rise due to pressure drop.
Refrigerant leak from LEV on the stopping unit
causes refrigerant shortage on the running unit.

3.

RPM error of the outdoor unit FAN
Motor failure or board failure, or airflow rate decrease due to clogging of the heat exchanger
The fan is not properly controlled as the outdoor
temperature cannot be precisely detected by the
temperature sensor.
The fan is not properly controlled as the pressure
cannot be precisely detected by the pressure sensor.

HWE08040

- 226 -

Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise even at higher Te than Tem due to high discharge temperature and high pressure.
At high discharge temperature:
Refer to 1102.(page 154)
At high pressure:
Refer to 1302.(page 156)
Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting ([4] -5).(page 238)

Refer to the page on troubleshooting of the outdoor
unit fan.
Refer to 5106.(page 185)
Refer to 1302.(page 156)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Cause

Check method and remedy

4.

Long piping length
The cooling capacity varies greatly depending on the
pressure loss. (When the pressure loss is large, the
cooling capacity drops.)

5.

Piping size is not proper (thin)

Check the piping length to determine if it is contributing to performance loss.
Piping pressure loss can be estimated from the
temperature difference between the indoor unit
heat exchanger outlet temperature and the saturation temperature (Te) of 63LS. ->Correct the piping.

6.

Insufficient refrigerant amount
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high discharge temperature.

Refer to 1-1. (Compressor frequency does not rise
sufficiently.)Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
adjustment

7.

Clogging by foreign object

Check the temperature difference between in front
of and behind the place where the foreign object is
clogging the pipe (upstream side and downstream
side). When the temperature drops significantly, the
foreign object may clog the pipe.
-> Remove the foreign object inside the pipe.

8.

The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively.
(Less than 15°C [59°F] WB)

Check the inlet air temperature and for short cycling. Change the environment where the indoor
unit is used.

9.

Compressor failure
The amount of circulating refrigerant decreases due
to refrigerant leak in the compressor.

Check the discharge temperature to determine if
the refrigerant leaks, as it rises if there is a leak.

10.

LEV1 malfunction
Sufficient liquid refrigerant is not be supplied to the
indoor unit as sufficient sub cool cannot be secured
due to LEV1 malfunction.

Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting
([4] -5-).(page 238)
It most likely happens when there is little difference
or no difference between TH3 and TH6.

11.

TH3, TH6 and 63HS1 sensor failure or faulty wiring
LEV1 is not controlled normally.

12.

LEV2 actuation failure
A drop in the low pressure that is caused either by a
blockage of liquid pipe or by a pressure loss and the
resultant slowing of refrigerant flow causes a tendency for the discharge temperature to rise.

HWE08040

- 227 -

Check the thermistor.
Check wiring.
Refer to the page on troubleshooting the LEV ([4] 5-).(page 238)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
2. Phenomena
Although heating operation starts with the normal remote controller display, the capacity is not enough.
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause
1.

Check method and remedy

Compressor frequency does not rise sufficiently.
Faulty detection of pressure sensor.
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high discharge temperature
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to high pressure.

(1)

Check pressure difference between the detected
pressure by the pressure sensor and the actual
pressure with self-diagnosis LED.
-> If the accurate pressure is not detected, check
the pressure sensor.(Refer to the page on Troubleshooting of Pressure Sensor)

Note:

Higher inlet pressure by the high pressure sensor
than the actual pressure causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
High pressure sensor

SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Low pressure sensor

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

(2)

Check the difference between the condensing temperature (Tc) and the target condensing temperature (Tcm) with self-diagnosis LED.

Note:

Higher Tc than Tcm causes insufficient capacity.
SW1 setting
Condensing temperature Tc
SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Target condensing temperature Tcm
SW1
1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ON

Note:

HWE08040

- 228 -

Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise even at lower Tc than Tcm due to high discharge temperature and high pressure.
At high discharge temperature:
Refer to 1102.(page 154)
At high pressure:
Refer to 1302.(page 156)

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Cause

Check method and remedy

2.

Indoor unit LEV malfunction
Insufficient refrigerant flows due to LEV malfunction
(not enough opening).

Refer to the page of LEV troubleshooting ([4] -5).(page 238)

3.

Temperature reading error on the indoor unit piping
temperature sensor
If the temperature reading on the sensor is higher
than the actual temperature, it makes the subcool
seem smaller than it is, and the LEV opening decreases too much.

Check the thermistor.

4

RPM error of the outdoor unit FAN

Refer to the page on outdoor unit fan ([4] -4).(page 237)

Motor failure or board failure, or airflow rate decrease, pressure drop due to clogging of the heat
exchanger leading to high discharge temperature
The fan is not properly controlled as the temperature cannot be precisely detected with the piping
sensor.
5.

Insulation failure of the refrigerant piping

6.

Long piping length
Excessively long piping on the high pressure side
causes pressure loss leading to increase in the high
pressure.

7.

Piping size is not proper (thin)

8.

Clogging by foreign object

Check the temperature difference between the upstream and the downstream of the pipe section that
is blocked. Since blockage in the extended section
is difficult to locate, operate the unit in the cooling
cycle, and follow the same procedures that are
used to locate the blockage of pipe during cooling
operation.
->Remove the blockage in the pipe.

9.

The indoor unit inlet temperature is excessively
high.(exceeding 28°C [82°F])

Check the inlet air temperature and for short cycling. Change the environment where the indoor
unit is used.

10.

Insufficient refrigerant amount
Protection works and compressor frequency does
not rise due to low discharge temperature
Refrigerant recovery operation is likely to start.

Refer to 2 - 1. (Compressor frequency does not rise
sufficiently.)(page 226)
Refer to the page on refrigerant amount
adjustment.(page 117)

11.

Compressor failure (same as in case of cooling)

Check the discharge temperature.

12.

LEV2 actuation failure
A drop in the low pressure that is caused either by a
blockage of liquid pipe or by a pressure loss and the
resultant slowing of refrigerant flow causes a tendency for the discharge temperature to rise.

Refer to the page on troubleshooting the LEV ([4] 5-).(page 238)

HWE08040

- 229 -

Confirm that the characteristic of capacity drop due
to piping length.
-> Change the pipe

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
3. Phenomena
Outdoor unit stops at times during operation.
(1) Cause, check method and remedy
Cause

Check method and remedy

The first stop is not considered as an error, as the
(1)
unit turns to anti-restart mode for 3 minutes as a preliminary error.

Check the mode operated in the past by displaying
preliminary error history on LED display with SW1.

Error mode

Reoperate the unit to find the mode that stops the
unit by displaying preliminary error history on LED
display with SW1.
Refer to the reference page for each error mode.

(2)

1)

Abnormal high pressure

2)

Abnormal discharge air temperature

3)

Heatsink thermistor failure

4)

Thermistor failure

5)

Pressure sensor failure

6)

Over-current break

7)

Refrigerant overcharge

Note1:

Frost prevention tripping only under cooling mode
may be considered in addition to the above. (Freeze
protection is detected by one or all indoor units.)

Note2:

Even the second stop is not considered as an error
when some specified errors occur. (eg. The third
stop is considered as an error when the thermistor
error occurs.)

HWE08040

*Display the indoor piping temperature table with
SW1 to check whether the freeze proof operation
runs properly, and check the temperature.

- 230 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[3] Investigation of Transmission Wave Shape/Noise
1. M-NET transmission
Control is performed by exchanging signals between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit (M-NET remote controller) through
M-NET transmission. Noise interference on the transmission line will interrupt the normal transmission, leading to erroneous
operation.
(1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line
Cause

Noise interference on
the transmission line

Erroneous operation

Error code

Error code definition

Signal is transformed and will be misjudged as the
signal of another address.

6600

Address overlap

Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to
the noise creating a new signal

6602

Transmission processor hardware error

Transmission wave pattern is transformed due to
the noise, and will not be received normally leading
to no acknowledgement (ACK).

6607

No ACK error

Transmission cannot be performed due to the fine
noise.

6603

Transmission line
bus busy error

Transmission is successful; however, the acknowledgement (ACK) or the response cannot be received normally due to the noise.

6607
6608

No ACK error
No response error

(2) Wave shape check

No fine noise
allowed
VHL
VBN

52

[With transmission]

52

Logic "0"

52

52

52

Logic "1"

No fine noise allowed

[Without transmission]
Wave shape check
Check the wave pattern of the transmission line with an oscilloscope. The following conditions must be met.
1) Small wave pattern (noise) must not exist on the transmission signal. (Minute noise (approximately 1V) can be generated by
DC-DC converter or the inverter operation; however, such noise is not a problem when the shield of the transmission line is
grounded.)
2) The sectional voltage level of transmission signal should be as follows.

HWE08040

Logic

Voltage level of the transmission line

0

VHL = 2.5V or higher

1

VBN = 1.3V or below

- 231 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(3) Check method and remedy
1) Measures against noise
Check the followings when noise exists on the wave or the errors described in (1) occur.
Error code definition
Check that the wiring 1. The transmission line and
work is performed acthe power line are not
cording to wiring
wired too closely.
specifications.
2. The transmission line is
not bundled with that for
another systems.

Check that the
grounding work is
performed according
to grounding specifications.

Remedy
Isolate the transmission line from the power line (5cm [1-31/32"] or
more). Do not insert them in the same conduit.
The transmission line must be isolated from another transmission
line.
When they are bundled, erroneous operation may be caused.

3. The specified wire is used
for the transmission line.

Use the specified transmission line.
Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For M-NET remote
controller)
Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more
(Remote controller wire: 0.3 - 1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])

4. When the transmission
line is daisy-chained on
the indoor unit terminals,
are the shields daisychained on the terminals,
too?

The transmission is two-wire daisy-chained. The shielded wire
must be also daisy-chained.
When the shielded cable is not daisy-chained, the noise cannot be
reduced enough.

5. Is the shield of the indooroutdoor transmission cable grounded to the earth
terminal on the outdoor
unit?

Connect the shield of the indoor-outdoor transmission cable to the
earth terminal ( ) on the outdoor unit.
If no grounding is provided, the noise on the transmission line cannot escape leading to change of the transmission signal.

6. Check the treatment method of the shield of the
transmission line (for centralized control).

The transmission cable for centralized control is less subject to
noise interference if it is grounded to the outdoor unit whose power
jumper cable was moved from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit.
The environment against noise varies depending on the distance
of the transmission lines, the number of the connected units, the
type of the controllers to be connected, or the environment of the
installation site. Therefore, the transmission line work for centralized control must be performed as follows.
1.

When no grounding is provided:
Ground the shield of the transmission cable by connecting to
the outdoor unit whose power jumper connector was moved
from CN41 to CN40 or to the power supply unit.

2.

When an error occurs even though one point grounding is
provided: Ground the shield on all outdoor units.

2) Check the followings when the error "6607" occurs, or "HO" appears on the display on the remote controller.
Error code definition

Remedy

7.

The farthest distance of transmission line is
200m [656ft] or longer.

Check that the farthest distance from the outdoor unit to the indoor
unit and to the remote controller is within 200m [656ft].

8.

The types of transmission lines are different.

Use the specified transmission line.
Type: Shielded wire CVVS/CPEVS/MVVS (For M-NET remote controller)
Diameter: 1.25mm2 [AWG16] or more
(Remote controller wire: 0.3-1.25mm2 [AWG22-16])

9.

Outdoor unit circuit board failure

Replace the outdoor unit control board or the power supply board
for the transmission line.

10. Indoor unit circuit board failure or remote controller failure

Replace the indoor unit circuit board or the remote controller.

11. The MA remote controller is connected to the M- Connect the MA remote controller to the terminal block for MA reNET transmission line.
mote controller (TB15).

HWE08040

- 232 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
2. MA remote controller transmission
The communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit is performed with current tone burst.
(1) Symptoms caused by noise interference on the transmission line
If noise is generated on the transmission line, and the communication between the MA remote controller and the indoor unit
is interrupted for 3 minutes in a row, MA transmission error (6831) will occur.
(2) Confirmation of transmission specifications and wave pattern

TB15

A
B

1
2

A, B : No polarity
Across terminal No. 1-2

Indoor unit

MA remote controller

: Power supply (9V to 12VDC)

Transmission waveform (Across terminal No.1 - 2)
Satisfies the formula
DC9~12V

12 msec/bit

5%

Voltage among terminals must

HWE08040

Logic 1

Logic 0

Logic 1

Logic 1

12msec

12msec

12msec

12msec

- 233 -

be between DC9 and 12 V.

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[4] Troubleshooting Principal Parts
-1- High-Pressure Sensor (63HS1)
1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the high pressure sensor, and the high-pressure gauge pressure to check
for failure.
By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the highpressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board.
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

(1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or
be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4).
3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], go to (3).
4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2).
(2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running. (Compare them by MPa [psi] unit.)
1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.098MPa [14psi], both the high pressure sensor and the control board
are normal.
2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem. (performance deterioration)
3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the high pressure sensor has a problem.
(3) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure on the self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the high pressure sensor has a
problem.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 4.15MPa [601psi], the control board has a problem.
(4) Remove the high pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors
(63HS1) to check the pressure with self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 4.15MPa [601psi], the high pressure sensor has a problem.
2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.
2. High-pressure sensor configuration
The high pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC 5V is applied between the red and the black
wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage
will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.071V per 0.098MPa [14psi].
The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side
is different from that on the control board side.
Body side

Control board side

Vcc

Pin 1

Pin 3

Vout

Pin 2

Pin 2

GND

Pin 3

Pin 1

63HS1
123

Pressure 0 ~ 4.15 MPa [601psi]
Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V
0.071 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

Connector

Pressure (MPa [psi])

4.5 [653]
4.0 [580]
3.5 [508]
3.0 [435]
2.5 [363]
2.0 [290]
1.5 [218]

1
2
3

GND (Black)

1.0 [145]

Vout (White)

0.5 [73]
0

Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red)

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

Output voltage (V)

HWE08040

- 234 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-2- Low-Pressure Sensor (63LS)
1. Compare the pressure that is detected by the low pressure sensor, and the low pressure gauge pressure to check
for failure.
By configuring the digital display setting switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below, the pressure as measured by the lowpressure sensor appears on the LED1 on the control board.
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

(1) While the sensor is stopped, compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the gauge pressure is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], internal pressure is caused due to gas leak.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the connector may be defective or
be disconnected. Check the connector and go to (4).
3) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], go to (3).
4) If other than 1), 2) or 3), compare the pressures while the sensor is running. Go to (2).
(2) Compare the gauge pressure and the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 while the sensor is running.(Compare them by MPa [psi] unit.)
1) When the difference between both pressures is within 0.03MPa [4psi], both the low pressure sensor and the control board are
normal.
2) When the difference between both pressures exceeds 0.03MPa [4psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem. (performance
deterioration)
3) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 does not change, the low pressure sensor has a problem.
(3) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1 display.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 is between 0 and 0.098MPa [14psi], the low pressure sensor has a
problem.
2) When the pressure displayed on self-diagnosis LED1 is approximately 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem.
When the outdoor temperature is 30°C [86°F] or less, the control board has a problem.
When the outdoor temperature exceeds 30°C [86°F], go to (5).
(4) Remove the low pressure sensor from the control board, and short-circuit between the No.2 and 3 connectors
(63LS:CN202) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the low pressure sensor has a problem.
2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.
(5) Remove the high pressure sensor (63HS1) from the control board, and insert it into the connector for the low pressure sensor (63LS) to check the pressure with the self-diagnosis LED1.
1) When the pressure displayed on the self-diagnosis LED1 exceeds 1.7MPa [247psi], the control board has a problem.
2) If other than 1), the control board has a problem.
2. Low-pressure sensor configuration
The low pressure sensor consists of the circuit shown in the figure below. If DC5V is applied between the red and the black
wires, voltage corresponding to the pressure between the white and the black wires will be output, and the value of this voltage
will be converted by the microcomputer. The output voltage is 0.173V per 0.098MPa [14psi].
The pressure sensor on the body side is designed to connect to the connector. The connector pin number on the body side
is different from that on the control board side.
Body side

Control board side

Vcc

Pin 1

Pin 3

Vout

Pin 2

Pin 2

GND

Pin 3

Pin 1

63LS
123

Pressure 0 ~ 1.7 MPa [247psi]
Vout 0.5 ~ 3.5 V
0.173 V / 0.098 MPa [14 psi]

Pressure (MPa [psi])

1.8 [261]
1.6 [232]
1.4 [203]
1.2 [174]
1.0 [145]
0.8 [116]

Connector
0.6 [87]

1
2
3

0.4 [58]

GND (Black)

0.2 [29]

Vout (White)

0
0

Vcc (DC 5 V)(Red)

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

Output voltage (V)

HWE08040

- 235 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-3- Solenoid Valve
Check whether the output signal from the control board and the operation of the solenoid valve match.
Setting the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) as shown in the figure below causes the ON signal of each relay to be output to the LED's.
Each LED shows whether the relays for the following parts are ON or OFF. LEDs light up when relays are ON.
The circuits on some parts are closed when the relays are ON. Refer to the following instructions.
Display
SW1
LD1
Upper

LD2

21S4a

LD3

LD4

CH11

LD5

LD6

LD7

LD8

SV1a

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

Lower

21S4b

Upper

SV5b

SV5c

21S4c

SV9

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

Lower

When a valve malfunctions, check if the wrong solenoid valve coil is not attached the lead wire of the coil is not disconnected, the
connector on the board is not inserted wrongly, or the wire for the connector is not disconnected.
(1) In case of 21S4a (4-way switching valve)
About this 4-way valve
When not powered:
Conducts electricity between the oil separator outlet and heat exchanger, and between the gas ball valve (BV1) and the accumulator to complete the circuit for the cooling cycle.
When powered:
The electricity runs between the oil separator and the gas ball valve, and between the heat exchanger and the accumulator.
This circulation is for heating.
Check the LED display and the intake and the discharge temperature for the 4-way valve to check whether the valve has no
faults and the electricity runs between where and where.Do not touch the pipe when checking the temperature, as the pipe
on the oil separator side will be hot.
Do not give an impact from outside, as the outer hull will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve.
(2) In case of 21S4b (4-way switching valve), 21S4c (4-way switching valve) (only for P120 model)
About this 4-way valve
When not powered:
Conducts electricity between the oil separator outlet and the heat exchaner1 (the top heat exchanger) and opens and closes
the heat exchanger circuit for the heating and cooling cycles.
When powered:
The electricity runs between the heat exchanger and the accumulator, and the valve opens or closes the heat exchanger circuit when cooling or heating.
Whether the valve has no fault can be checked by checking the LED display and the switching sound; however, it may be
difficult to check by the sound, as the switching coincides with 21S4b or 21S4c. In this case, check the intake and the discharge temperature for the 4-way valve to check that the electricity runs between where and where.
Do not touch the valve when checking the temperature, as it will be hot.
Do not give an impact from outside, as the outer hull will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve.

HWE08040

- 236 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(3) In case of SV1a (Bypass valve)
This solenoid valve opens when powered (Relay ON).
1) At compressor start-up, the SV1a turns on for 4 minutes, and the operation can be checked by the self-diagnosis LED display
and the closing sound.
2) To check whether the valve is open or closed, check the change of the SV1a downstream piping temperature while the valve
is being powered.Even when the valve is closed, high-temperature refrigerant flows inside the capillary next to the valve.
(Therefore, temperature of the downstream piping will not be low with the valve closed.)
(4) In the case of SV5b (Solenoid valve) , SV5c (Solenoid valve) (only for P120 model)
This solenoid valve is a switching valve that opens when energized. Proper operation of this valve can be checked on the LED
and by the switching sound. During the cooling mode, SV5b and 21S4b, SV5c and 21S4c, are switched simultaneously, which
may make it difficult to check for proper operation of the SV5b or SV5c by listening for the switching sound. If this is the case,
the temperature before and after SV5b or SV5c can be used to determine if the refrigerant is the pipe.
(5) In the case of SV9 (Solenoid valve)
This solenoid valve is a switching valve that opens when energized. Proper operation of this valve can be checked on the LED
display and by the switching sound.
Do not give an impact from outside, as the outer hull will be deformed leading to the malfunction of the inner valve.

-4- Outdoor Unit Fan
To check the revolution of the fan, check the inverter output state on the self-diagnosis LED, as the inverter on the outdoor
fan controls the revolutions of the fan.
When starting the fan, the fan runs at full speed for 5 seconds.
When setting the DIP SW1 as shown in the figure below, the inverter output [%] will appear. 100% indicates the full speed
and 0% indicates the stopping.
SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

As the revolution of the fan changes under control, at the interphase or when the indoor unit operation capacity is low, the
revolution of the fan may change.
If the fan does not move or it vibrates, Fan board problem or fan motor problem is suspected. Refer to IX [4] -6- (2) [5] "Check
the fan motor ground fault or the winding." and IX [4] -6- (2) [6] "Check the Fan board failure."

HWE08040

- 237 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

-5- LEV
LEV operation
LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve), LEV2a, and LEV2b (Outdoor unit: Linear expansion valve) are stepping-motor-driven valves that operate by receiving the pulse signals from the indoor and outdoor unit control boards.
(1) Indoor LEV and Outdoor LEV (LEV2a, LEV2b)
The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses.
1) Indoor and outdoor unit control boards and the LEV (Indoor unit: Linear expansion valve)
Outdoor control board
Intermediate connector

LEV
4

M

6

5

2
3

1

Blue

DC12V

2

Brown

6

5

Red

5

Drive circuit

Brown

4

1

Blue

4

4

Yellow

3

3

Orange

3

3

2

4

Yellow

2

2

1

6

White

1

1

White Red Orange

Note. The connector numbers on the intermediate connector and the connector on the control board differ. Check the color of the lead wire
to judge the number.

2) Pulse signal output and valve operation

Output
(phase)
number

Output state

1

1
ON

2
OFF

3
OFF

4
ON

2
3

ON
OFF

ON
ON

OFF
ON

OFF
OFF

4

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Output pulses change in the following orders when the
Valve is closed; 1
2
3
4
1
3
2
1
4
Valve is open; 4
*1. When the LEV opening angle does not change,
all the output phases will be off.
*2. When the output is open phase or remains ON,
the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates.

3) LEV valve closing and opening operation

Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate)

D

C

*When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 2200 pulses
will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position.
It must be fixed at point A.
When the valve operates smoothly, no sound from LEV or no vibration
occurs, however, when the pulses change from E to A in the chart or
the valve is locked, a big sound occurs.
*Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by
holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle.

Valve closed

Valve open
A

Fully open: 1400 pulses

E

B

Pulses

80 - 100 pulses

HWE08040

- 238 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(2) Outdoor LEV (LEV1)
The valve opening changes according to the number of pulses.
1) Connections between the outdoor control board and LEV1 (outdoor expansion valve)
Outdoor control board
DC 12V

LEV

6

Red

6

5

Brown

5

4

Blue

4

4

3

Orange

3

3

2

Yellow

2

2

1

White

1

1

Drive circuit

4
6

M
5

1

2
3

2) Pulse signal output and valve operation

Output state

Output
(phase)
number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON

2

ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

3

OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

4

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF

Output pulses change in the following orders when the
Valve is open; 1
2
3
4 5 6 7 8
Valve is closed; 8
7
6
5 4 3 2 1

1
8

*1. When the LEV opening angle does not change,
all the output phases will be off.
*2. When the output is open phase or remains ON,
the motor cannot run smoothly, and rattles and vibrates.

3) LEV valve closing and opening operation

Valve opening (refrigerant flow rate)

B

*When the power is turned on, the valve closing signal of 520 pulses
will be output from the indoor board to LEV to fix the valve position.
It must be fixed at point A.
(Pulse signal is output for approximately 17 seconds.)
When the valve operates smoothly, there is no sound from the LEV and no
vibration occurs, but when the valve is locked, noise is generated.
*Whether a sound is generated or not can be determined by
holding a screwdriver against it, then placing your ear against the handle.

Valve closed
*If liquid refrigerant flows inside the LEV, the sound may become smaller.

Valve open
Fully open: 480 pulses
A

Pulses

HWE08040

- 239 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(3) Judgment methods and possible failure mode
The specifications of the outdoor unit (outdoor LEV) and the indoor unit (indoor LEV) differ.Therefore, remedies for each failure
may vary. Check the remedy specified for the appropriate LEV as indicated in the right column.
Malfunction
mode
Microcomputer
driver circuit failure

Judgment method

Remedy

Disconnect the control board connector and connect
the check LED as shown in the figure below.
6

Target
LEV

When the drive circuit has a
problem, replace the control
board.

Indoor
Outdoor

5
4
3
2
1k

LED

1

resistance : 0.25W 1k
LED : DC15V 20mA or more
When the main power is turned on, the indoor unit circuit board outputs pulse signals to the indoor unit LEV
for 10 seconds, and the outdoor unit circuit board outputs pulse signals to the outdoor unit LEV for 17 seconds.
If any of the LED remains lit or unlit, the drive circuit is
faulty.
LEV mechanism
is locked

If the LEV is locked, the drive motor runs idle, and
makes a small clicking sound.
When the valve makes a closing and opening sound,
the valve has a problem.

Replace the LEV.

Indoor
Outdoor

Disconnected or
short-circuited
LEV motor coil

Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red
-orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester.
They are normal if resistance is 150ohm 10%.

Replace the LEV coils.

Indoor
Outdoor
(LEV2a,
LEV2b)

Measure resistance between the coils (red - white, red
-orange, brown - yellow, brown - blue) using a tester.
They are normal if resistance is 46ohm 3%.

Replace the LEV coils.

Outdoor
(LEV1)

If there is a large amount of
Incomple sealing When checking the refrigerant leak from the indoor
(leak from the
LEV, run the target indoor unit in the fan mode, and the leakage, replace the LEV.
valve)
other indoor units in the cooling mode. Then, check the
liquid temperature (TH22) with the self-diagnosis LED.
When the unit is running in the fan mode, the LEV is fully closed, and the temperature detected by the thermistor is not low. If there is a leak, however, the
temperature will be low. If the temperature is extremely
low compared with the inlet temperature displayed on
the remote controller, the LEV is not properly sealed,
however, if there is a little leak, it is not necessary to replace the LEV when there are no effects to other parts.

Indoor

Thermistor
(liquid piping
temperature detection)
Linear Expansion Valve

Faulty wire connections in the
connector or
faulty contact

HWE08040

1.

Check for loose pins on the connector and check
the colors of the lead wires visually

2.

Disconnect the control board's connector and
conduct a continuity check using a tester.

- 240 -

Check the continuity at the
points where an error occurs.

Indoor
Outdoor

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(4) Outdoor unit LEV (LEV1) coil removal procedure
1) LEV component
As shown in the figure, the outdoor LEV is made in such a way that the coils and the body can be separated.
Body

Coils

Stopper

Lead wire

2) Removing the coils
Fasten the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then pull out the coils toward the
top.If the coils are pulled out without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent.

Part A

3) Installing the coils
Fix the body tightly at the bottom (Part A in the figure) so that the body will not move, then insert the coils from the top, and
insert the coil stopper securely in the pipe on the body. Hold the body when pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe
will not be bent.
If the coils are pushed without the body gripped, undue force will be applied and the pipe will be bent. Hold the body when
pulling out the coils to prevent so that the pipe will not be bent.

Part A

HWE08040

- 241 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
(5) Outdoor unit LEV (LEV2a,2b) coil removal procedure

Motor
Driver
Locknut

Bellows

Valve assembling

Refrigerant Circuit

Valve body side
Orifice

Notes on the procedure
1) Do not put undue pressure on the motor.
2) Do not use motors if dropped.
3) Do not remove the cap until immediately before the procedure.
4) Do not wipe off any molybdenum.
5) Do not remove the packing.
6) Do not apply any other than specified liquid such as screw lock agent, grease and etc.

Molybdenum

Motor
Packing

HWE08040

Cap

- 242 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
Replacement procedure
1) Stop the air conditioner. After checking that the air conditioner is stopped, turn off the power of the outdoor unit.
2) Prepare two spanners. Hold the valve body with one spanner and loosen the locknut with another one.
Turning the locknut counter-clockwise from motor side view can loosen it.
Two spanners must be used.
Do not hold the motor with one hand and loosen the locknut with only one spanner.
3) Turning the locknut several times. The locknut will come off and then the motor can be removed.
4) Prepare a motor replacement. Use only factory settings, which the head part of the driver does not come out.Use of
other than factory settings may result in malfunction and failure of valve flow rate control.
5) Keep dust, contaminants, and water out of the space between the motor and the valve body during replacement. (The
space is the mechanical section of the valve.) Do not damage the junction with tools.
After removing the motor, blow N2 gas or etc. into bellows in order to blow off water from inside.
6) Remove the cap of the motor replacement. Joint the axis of the motor and the one of the valve body with the locknut to
stick precisely. Apply screw lock agent to whole part of the screw. Do not introduce screw lock agent into the
motor.
Use new motors if problems are found on the motor during the replacement.
7) After rotating the locknut 2~3 times by hands, hold the valve body with the spanner, and tighten the locknut with the
specified torque with a torque wrench. Apply the tightening torque of 15N m (150kgf cm) (administration value
15
1 N m (150
10kgf cm)).
Note that undue tightening may cause breaking a flare nut.
8) When tightening the locknut, hold the motor with hands so that undue rotary torque and load can not be applied.
9) The differences of relative position after assembling the motor and the valve body do not affect the valve control and
the switching function.
Do not relocate the motor and the valve body after tightening the locknut. Even the relative position is different from
before and after assembling.
Difference in rotational direction is acceptable.

The motor may not be fixed with clamp because of the changing of the motor configuration. However, the fixing is not
necessary due to the pipe fixing.
10) Connect the connector. Do not pull hard on the lead wire. Make sure that the connector is securely inserted into the
specified position, and check that the connector does not come off easily.
11) Turn on the indoor unit, and operate the air conditioner. Check that no problems are found.

HWE08040

- 243 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]

-6- Inverter (THMU-A)
Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the
compressor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrent is detected, protecting the inverter
from damage.)
Replace only the fan motor if only the fan motor is found to be defective. (Overcurrent will flow through the inverter if the fan
motor is damaged, however, the power supply is automatically cut when overcurrrent is detected, protecting the inverter from
damage.)
Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective.
If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices.
(1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies
1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is
turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Before inspecting the inverter-related items, turn off the main power, wait for 5 to 10
minutes, and confirm that the voltage at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor has dropped to a sufficiently low level.
2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some
of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors,
and Faston terminals.
3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned
on.
4) Current sensors become damaged if electricity is passed through without them being connected to the circuit board.
Connect the current sensor to the appropriate connectors on the circuit board before operating the inverter.
5) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.
Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

6) When the IPM, diode stack, or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these
parts. Wipe off any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure.
7) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence.

HWE08040

- 244 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
Error display/failure condition
[1]

Inverter related errors
4250, 4255, 4220, 4225, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403

[2]

Main power breaker trip

Measure/inspection item
Check the details of the inverter error in the error log at 10.[1] Table of
LED codes.
Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in accordance with 9. [2] Self-diagnosis on the basis of Error Display on Remote Controller and Remedy for Error.
<1> Check the breaker capacity.
<2> Check whether the electrical system is short-circuited or groundfaulted.
<3> If items cause is not <1>or <2> are not the causes of the problem,
see (3)-[1].

[3]

Main power earth leakage breaker trip

<1> Check the earth leakage breaker capacity and the sensitivity current.
<2> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter
<3> If the cause is not <1>or <2>, see (3)-[1]

[4]

Only the compressor does not operate.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) [4] if the compressor is in operation.

[5]

The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound.

See (2)-[4].

[6]

Only the fan motor does not operate.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2)[6] if the fan motor is in operation.

[7]

The fan motor shakes violently at all times or makes an abnormal
sound.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2)[6] if the fan motor is in operation.

[8]

Noise is picked up by the peripheral device

<1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not
run close to the power supply wiring of the outdoor unit.
<2> Check that the inverter output wiring is not in close contact with the
power supply wiring and the transmission lines.
<3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter
<5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for details of the service part settings.)
<6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other
electric appliances.
<7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output
can be considered. See (2)-[4].
*Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[9]

Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.)

<1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly.
<2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or
does not run through the same conduit pipe.
* Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

HWE08040

- 245 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(2) Inverter output related troubles
Items to be checked
[1]
Check the INV
board error
detection circuit.



Replace the INV board.

(1) Disconnect the invert- 2)
er output wire from
the terminals of the
INV board (SC-U,
SC-V, SC-W).

Logic error
Error code: 4220
Detail code: No. 111

Replace the INV board.

(2) Put the outdoor unit
into operation.

3)

ACCT sensor circuit failure
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.117

Replace the INV board.

4)

IPM open
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.119

Normal

1)

IPM/overcurrent breaker trip
Error code: 4250
Detail code: No. 101, 102, 103, 104,
105, 106, and 107

See the section "Troubleshooting
the IPM" ( Refer to - 6 - [5] ).
Replace the IPM, and put the outdoor unit back into operation.
If the problem persists, replace the
INV board.

(1) Disconnect the invert- 2)
er output wire from
the output terminals
(U, V, W) of the IPM.

Logic error
Error code: 4220
Detail code: No. 111

See the section "Troubleshooting
the IPM" ( Refer to - 6 - [5] ).
Replace the IPM, and put the outdoor unit back into operation.
If the problem persists, replace the
INV board.
Replace the INV board, and put
the outdoor unit back into operation.
If the problem persists, replace the
DCCT.

(2) Put the outdoor unit
into operation.

3)

ACCT sensor circuit failure
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.117

Replace the INV board.

4)

DCCT sensor circuit failure
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.118

Replace the DCCT board.
Replace the DCCT, and put the
outdoor unit back into operation.
If the problem persists, replace the
INV board.

5)

IPM open
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.119

Normal

1)

Compressor Meg failure
Error if less than 1 Mohm.
When no liquid refrigerant in the
compressor

Replace the compressor
Check that no liquid refrigerant in
the compressor.

2)

Compressor coil resistance failure
Coil resistance value of 0.3 ohm
(20°C [68°F]) : -P96 models
Coil resistance value of 0.3 ohm
(20°C [68°F]) : P120 model

HWE08040

Disconnect the compressor wiring, and check the
compressor Meg, and coil
resistance.

1)

Remedy

IPM/overcurrent breaker trip
Error code: 4250
Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105, 106,
and 107



[2]
Check for
compressor
ground fault or
coil error.

Phenomena

- 246 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
Items to be checked
[3]
Check whether
the inverter is
damaged.
(No load)

Phenomena

Remedy



1)

Inverter-related problems are detected.

Connect the short-circuit connector to CN6, and go to section [1].

(1)

Disconnect the inverter
output wire from the terminals of the INV board
(SC-U, SC-V, SC-W).

2)

Inverter voltage is not output.

Replace the INV board.

(2)

Disconnect the short-circuit connector from CN6
on the INV board.

3)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

(3)

Put the outdoor unit into 4)
operation.
Check the inverter output
voltage after the inverter
output frequency has stabilized.

There is no voltage imbalance between the wires.

Normal
*Reconnect the short-circuit
connector to CN6 after checking the voltage.



1)

Inverter-related problems are detected.

Turn off SW1-1 and go to [1]

(1)

Disconnect the inverter
output wire from the output terminals (U, V, W) of
the IPM.

2)

Inverter voltage is not output.

Check the connection between the IPM and the
CNIPM on the INV board.
Replace the IPM.
If the problem persists, replace the INV board.

(2)

Turn on SW1-1 on the
INV board.

3)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the IPM.
If the problem persists, replace the INV board.

(3)

Put the outdoor unit into
operation.

4)

There is no voltage imbalance between the wires.

Normal
*Turn off SW1-1

[4]
Check whether
the inverter is
damaged.
(During compressor operation)

Put the outdoor unit into operation.
Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output
frequency has stabilized.

1)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V


Replace the INV board.

Replace the IPM.
If the problem persists, replace the INV board.
If the problem persists after
replacing the above parts, go
to section [2].

[5]
Check the fan
motor ground
fault or the
winding.

Remove the wire for the outdoor fan motor, and check the
fan motor megger and the
winding resistance.

1)

Fan motor megger failure
Failure when the megger is 1Mohm
or less.

Replace the fan motor.

2)

Fan motor disconnection
Standard: The winding resistance
is approximately several ohm.
(It varies depending on the temperature, or while the inner thermo is
operating, it will be ohm)

[6]
Check the FAN
board failure.

(1)

Check the fan output wir- Connector contact failure
ing.
Board side (CNINV)
Fan motor side

Connect the connector.

(2)

Check the connector CN- Cnnector contact failure
VDC connection.

Connect the connector.

(3)

Check the FAN board
failure.

HWE08040

1)

The voltage imbalance among
Replace the FAN board.
each motor wiring during operation
(The voltage imbalance is greater
than the larger of the values represented by 5% or 5 V.)

2)

The same error occurs even after
the operation is restarted.

- 247 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped.
Items to be checked

Phenomena

[1]

Perform Meg check between the
terminals on the power terminal
block TB1.

[2]

Turn on the power again and
check again.

1)

Turn on the outdoor unit and check
that it operates normally.

1)

Operates normally without tripping
the main breaker.

2)

Main power breaker trip

[3]

HWE08040

2)

Remedy

Zero to several ohm, or Meg failure Check each part in the main inverter
circuit.
*Refer to "Simple checking Procedures for individual components of
Main power breaker trip
main inverter circuit".
Diode stack
No remote control display
IPM
Rush current protection resistor
Electromagnetic relay
DC reactor

- 248 -

a) The wiring may have been shortcircuited. Search for the wire that
short-circuited, and repair it.
b) If item a) above is not the cause of
the problem, the compressor may
have a problem.
A compressor ground fault can be considered. Go to (2)-[2].

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(4) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit
Before checking, turn the power off and remove the parts to be checked from the control box.
Part name

Judgment method

Diode stack

Refer to "Diode stack" ( 9 [2] - 6 - (6) )

IPM (Intelligent
power module)

Refer to "Intelligent power module (IPM)" ( 9 [2] - 6 - (5) )

Rush current
protection resistor
R1(R2)


Measure the resistance between terminals: 22 ohm 10%

Measure the resistance between the + terminal on the diode stack and terminal TB31. (*Can be measured without the need to remove the noise filter board): 22 ohm 10%

Electromagnetic
relay
72C

This electromagnetic relay is rated at 200VAC and is driven by a coil. The resistance between the
coils in row A cannot be measured with a tester.Check only for shorting.



Installation direction

Check point

Row Row Row Row Row
A B C D E
A2

44 34

Coil

Row A

24 14

Checking criteria
Not to be short-circuited
With the test button
turned off :

Contact Row B to Row E With the test button

turned on : 0

A1

43 33 23 13


Test button

Check point

Coil

Contact

Checking criteria

Between No. 1 pin and
No. 3 pin of the CN03 on Not to be short-circuited
the noise filter board
+ terminal on the diode
stack and terminal
TB31 on the noise filter

With the test button
turned off :
With the test button
turned on : 0

DC reactor DCL

Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm)
Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis:

Current sensor
ACCT


Disconnect the CNCT2 connector and measure the resistance between terminals: 280 ohm
1 - 2 PIN (U-phase),3 - 4 PIN (W-phase)
IPM
U
W
V

ACCT-W

W

U

30 ohm

ACCT-U

*Check the ACCT connection phase and the
direction of the connection

HWE08040

- 249 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(5) Intelligent power module (P120 model)
Measure resistances between each pair of terminals on the IPM with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting.
1) Notes on measurement
Check the polarity before measuring. (On the tester, black normally indicates plus.)
Check that the resistance is not open ( ohm) or not shorted (to 0 ohm).
The values are for reference, and the margin of errors is allowed.
The result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed.
2) Tester restriction
Use the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1.5V or greater
Use the dry-battery-powered tester.
(The accurate diode-specific resistance cannot be measured with the button-battery-powered card tester, as the applied voltage is low.)
Use a low-range tester if possible. A more accurate resistance can be measured.
Judgment value (reference)
Black ( + )

Red (-)

P

N

P

-

-

N

-

-

U
5 - 200 ohm

V
5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

U

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

V

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

W

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

External view

Internal circuit diagram
3

1

W

4

7

10

16

2

P
Drive circuit

B
1

U

6

P
5

N

Drive circuit

4

W

V

U

V

9
8

Drive circuit
7

W

11
13

Drive circuit

10

14

15

Drive circuit

Drive circuit

12

B

Temperature
sensor
16

HWE08040

N

Overheating -protection
circuit

- 250 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(6) Diode stack (P120 model)
Measure resistances between each pair of terminals on the diode stack with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting.Refer to (5) " Intelligent power module (IPM) " for notes on measurement and tester selection.
Judgment value (reference)
Black ( + )
+ (P)

- (N)

+ (P)

-

-

- (N)

-

-

External view

to (L1)

to (L2)

to (L3)

5 - 200
ohm

5 - 200
ohm

5 - 200
ohm

L1

to (L1)
Red (-)

to (L2)
to (L3)

5 - 200
ohm

-

5 - 200
ohm

-

5 - 200
ohm

-

-

L2

L3

Internal circuit diagram

-

-

+
-

L1
L2
L3

-

HWE08040

- 251 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]

-6- Inverter (YHMU-A)
Replace only the compressor if only the compressor is found to be defective.
Replace only the fan motor if only the fan motor is found to be defective.
Replace the defective components if the inverter is found to be defective.
If both the compressor and the inverter are found to be defective, replace the defective component(s) of both devices.
(1) Inverter-related problems: Troubleshooting and remedies
1) The INV board has a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor, in which residual voltage remains even after the main power is
turned off, posing a risk of electric shock. Turn off the unit, leave it turned off for at least 10 minutes, and check that the voltage
across FT-P and FT-N terminals on the INV board or the terminals at both ends of the electrolytic capacitor is 20V or below
before checking inside the control box.
(It takes about 10 minutes to discharge electricity after the power supply is turn off.)
2) The IPM on the inverter becomes damaged if there are loose screws are connectors. If a problem occurs after replacing some
of the parts, mixed up wiring is often the cause of the problem. Check for proper connection of the wiring, screws, connectors,
and Faston terminals.
3) To avoid damage to the circuit board, do not connect or disconnect the inverter-related connectors with the main power turned
on.
4) Faston terminals have a locking function. Make sure the terminals are securely locked in place after insertion.
Press the tab on the terminals to remove them.

5) When the IPM or IGBT is replaced, apply a thin layer of heat radiation grease that is supplied evenly to these parts. Wipe off
any grease that may get on the wiring terminal to avoid terminal contact failure.
6) Faulty wiring to the compressor damages the compressor. Connect the wiring in the correct phase sequence.

HWE08040

- 252 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
Error display/failure condition

Measure/inspection item

[1]

Inverter related errors
4250, 4255, 4220, 4225, 4230, 4240,4260, 5301, 0403

Check the details of the inverter error in the error log at 10.[1] Table of
LED codes.
Take appropriate measures to the error code and the error details in accordance with 9. [2] Self-diagnosis on the basis of Error Display on Remote Controller and Remedy for Error.

[2]

Main power breaker trip

Refer to "(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is
tripped".

[3]

Main power earth leakage breaker trip

Refer to "(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage
breaker is tripped".

[4]

Only the compressor does not operate.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2) [4] if the compressor is in operation.

[5]

The compressor vibrates violently at all times or makes an abnormal sound.

See (2)-[4].

[6]

Only the fan motor does not operate.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2)[6] if the fan motor is in operation.

[7]

The fan motor shakes violently at all times or makes an abnormal
sound.

Check the inverter frequency on the LED monitor and proceed to (2)[6] if the fan motor is in operation.

[8]

Noise is picked up by the peripheral device

<1> Check that power supply wiring of the peripheral device does not
run close to the power supply wiring of the outdoor unit.
<2> Check if the inverter output wiring is not running parallel to the
power supply wiring and the transmission lines.
<3> Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<4> Meg failure for electrical system other than the inverter
<5> Attach a ferrite core to the inverter output wiring. (Contact the factory for details of the service part settings.)
<6> Provide separate power supply to the air conditioner and other
electric appliances.
<7> If the error occurred suddenly, a ground fault of the inverter output
can be considered. See (2)-[4].
*Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

[9]

Sudden malfunction (as a result of external noise.)

<1> Check that the grounding work is performed properly.
<2>Check that the shielded wire is used as the transmission line when
it is required, and check that the grounding work is performed properly on the shielded wire.
<3>Check that neither the transmission line nor the external connection wiring does not run close to another power supply system or
does not run through the same conduit pipe.
* Contact the factory for cases other than those listed above.

HWE08040

- 253 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(2) Inverter output related troubles
Items to be checked
[1]
Check the
INV board error detection
circuit.

[2]
Check for
compressor
ground fault
or coil error.

HWE08040

Phenomena

Remedy

(1)

Disconnect the invert- 1)
er output wire from
the terminals of the
INV board (SC-U,
SC-V, SC-W).

Overcurrent error
Error code: 4250
Detail code: No. 101, 104, 105,
106, and 107

Replace the INV board.

(2)

Put the outdoor unit
into operation.

2)

Logic error
Error code: 4220
Detail code: No. 111

Replace the INV board.

3)

ACCT sensor circuit failure
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.117

Replace the INV board.

4)

IPM open
Error code: 5301
Detail code: No.119

Normal

1)

Compressor Meg failure
Error if less than 1 Mohm.

Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in the compressor.
If there is none, replace the compressor.

2)

Compressor coil resistance failure
Coil resistance value of 1 ohm
(20°C [68°F]): - P96models
Coil resistance value of 0.6 ohm
(20°C [68°F]): P120 model

Replace the compressor.

Disconnect the compressor
wiring, and check the compressor Meg, and coil resistance.

- 254 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
Items to be checked
[3]
Check whether
the inverter is
damaged.
(No load)

Phenomena

Remedy

(1)

Disconnect the inverter
output wire from the terminals of the INV board
(SC-U, SC-V, SC-W).

1)

Inverter-related problems are detected.

Connect the short-circuit connector to CN6, and go to section [1].

(2)

Disconnect the short-circuit connector from CN6
on the INV board.

2)

Inverter voltage is not output at the Replace the INV board.
terminals (SC-U, SC-V, and SC-W)

(3)

Put the outdoor unit into 3)
operation.
Check the inverter output
voltage after the inverter
output frequency has sta- 4)
bilized.

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

There is no voltage imbalance between the wires.

Normal
*Reconnect the short-circuit
connector to CN6 after checking the voltage.

[4]
Check whether
the inverter is
damaged.
(During compressor operation)

Put the outdoor unit into operation.
Check the inverter output voltage after the inverter output
frequency has stabilized.

1)

There is an voltage imbalance between the wires.
Greater than 5% imbalance or 5V

Replace the INV board.

[5]
Check the fan
motor ground
fault or the
winding.

Remove the wire for the outdoor fan motor, and check the
fan motor megger and the
winding resistance.

1)

Fan motor megger failure
Failure when the megger is 1Mohm
or less.

Replace the fan motor.

2)

Fan motor disconnection
Standard: The winding resistance
is approximately several ohm.
(It varies depending on the temperature, or while the inner thermo is
operating, it will be ohm)

[6]
Check the FAN
board failure.

(1)

Check the fan output wir- Connector contact failure
ing.
Board side (CNINV)
Fan motor side

Connect the connector.

(2)

Check the connector CN- Cnnector contact failure
VDC connection.

Connect the connector.

(3)

Check the FAN board
failure.

HWE08040

1)

The voltage imbalance among
Replace the FAN board.
each motor wiring during operation
(The voltage imbalance is greater
than the larger of the values represented by 5% or 5 V.)

2)

The same error occurs even after
the operation is restarted.

- 255 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(3) Trouble treatment when the main power breaker is tripped
Items to be checked

Phenomena

Remedy

[1]

Check the breaker capacity.

Use of a non-specified breaker

Replace it with a specified breaker.

[2]

Perform Meg check between the
terminals on the power terminal
block TB1.

Zero to several ohm, or Meg
failure

[3]

Turn on the power again and
check again.

1) Main power breaker trip

Check each part and wiring.
*Refer to (5) "Simple checking Procedures
for individual components of main inverter
circuit".
IGBT module
Rush current protection resistor
Electromagnetic relay
DC reactor

Turn on the outdoor unit and check
that it operates normally.

1) Operates normally without
tripping the main breaker.

[4]

2) No remote control display

2) Main power breaker trip

a) The wiring may have been short-circuited. Search for the wire that short-circuited, and repair it.
b) If item a) above is not the cause of the
problem, refer to (2)-[1]-[6].

(4) Trouble treatment when the main power earth leakage breaker is tripped
Items to be checked

Phenomena

Remedy

[1]

Check the earth leakage breaker
capacity and the sensitivity current.

Use of a non-specified earth
leakage breaker

Replace with a regulation earth leakage
breaker.

[2]

Check the resistance at the power
supply terminal block with a megger.

Failure resistance value

Check each part and wiring.
*Refer to (5) "Simple checking Procedures
for individual components of main inverter
circuit".
IGBT module
Rush current protection resistor
Electromagnetic relay
DC reactor

[3]

Disconnect the compressor wirings and check the resistance of
the compressor with a megger.

Failure compressor if the insu- Check that there is no liquid refrigerant in
lating resistance value is not in the compressor. If there is none, replace
specified range.
the compressor.
Failure when the insulating resistance value is 1 Mohm or
less.

[4]

Disconnect the fan motor wirings
and check the resistance of the fan
motor with a megger.

Failure fan motor if the insulat- Replace the fan motor.
ing resistance value is not in
specified range.
Failure when the insulating resistance value is 1 Mohm or
less.

The insulation resistance could go down to close to 1Mohm after installation or when the power is kept off for an extended
period of time because of the accumulation of refrigerant in the compressor. If the earth leakage breaker is triggered, please
use the following procedure to take care of this.
Disconnect the wires from the compressor's terminal block.
If the resistance is less than 1 Mohm, switch on the power for the outdoor unit with the wires still disconnected.
Leave the power on for at least 12 hours.
Check that the resistance has recovered to 1 Mohm or greater.
Earth leakage current measurement method
For easy on-site measurement of the earth leakage current, enable the filter with a measurement instrument that has filter
functions as below, clamp all the power supply wires, and measure.
Recommended measurement instrument: CLAMP ON LEAK HiTESTER 3283 made by HIOKI E.E. CORPORATION
When measuring one device alone, measure near the device's power supply terminal block.

HWE08040

- 256 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(5) Simple checking procedure for individual components of main inverter circuit
Before inspecting the inside of the control box, turn off the power, keep the unit off for at least 10 minutes, and confirm that
the voltage between FT-P and FT-N on INV Board has dropped to DC20V or less.
Part name
IGBT module

Judgment method
See "Troubleshooting for IGBT Module ". ( 9 [4] - 6 - (6) )

Rush current pro- Measure the resistance between terminals R1 and R5: 22 ohm
tection resistor
R1, R5
Electromagnetic
relay
72C

10%

This electromagnetic relay is rated at DC12V and is driven by a coil.
Check the resistance between terminals
Upper

1

2

3

4

Contact

6

DC reactor DCL

Check point
Coil

Installation
direction

Between Terminals 5 and 6

Checking criteria(W)
Not to be short-circuited
(Center value 75 ohm)

Between Terminals 1 and 2
Between Terminals 3 and 4

5

Measure the resistance between terminals: 1ohm or lower (almost 0 ohm)
Measure the resistance between terminals and the chassis:

(6) Troubleshooting for IGBT Module
Measure the resistances between each pair of terminals on the IGBT with a tester, and use the results for troubleshooting.
The terminals on the INV board are used for the measurement.
1) Notes on measurement
Check the polarity before measuring. (On the tester, black normally indicates plus.)
Check that the resistance is not open ( ohm) or not shorted (to 0 ohm).
The values are for reference, and the margin of errors is allowed.
The result that is more than double or half of the result that is measured at the same measurement point is not allowed.
Disconnect all the wiring connected the INV board, and make the measurement.
2) Tester restriction
Use the tester whose internal electrical power source is 1.5V or greater
Use the dry-battery-powered tester.
(The accurate diode-specific resistance cannot be measured with the button-battery-powered card tester, as the applied voltage is low.)
Use a low-range tester if possible. A more accurate resistance can be measured.

HWE08040

- 257 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
Judgment value (reference)
Black ( + )

Red (-)

SC-P1

FT-N

SC-P1

-

-

FT-N

-

-

SC-L1

SC-L2

SC-L3

5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

SC-L1

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-L2

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-L3

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-V

SC-W

Black ( + )

Red (-)

SC-P2

FT-N

SC-P2

-

-

FT-N

-

-

SC-U
5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

5 - 200 ohm

SC-U

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-V

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

SC-W

5 - 200 ohm

-

-

-

INV board external diagram
SC-P2 SC-P1

FT-N

SC-V

SC-L1
SC-L2

SC-W

SC-L3

SC-U

HWE08040

- 258 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]

-7- Control Circuit (THMU-A)
(1) Control power source function block
1) PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A
Power source system (AC 208 / 230 V)
Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

Noise filter
Noise filter

TB1
AC 208 / 230 V
Terminal block for
power source

INV board
Rectifier

Fuse

72C

Smoothing capacitor

DCL

Inverter

Compressor

Inverter drive
circuit

17V Power supply

Surge protection
Microcomputer

Fan board

Control board
Fuse

72C
Solenoid valve
4-way valve
CH11

Relay, LEV
Drive circuit

LEV

Smoothing capacitor

Inverter reset
circuit
Microcomputer

Inverter
Fuse

63H1

Inverter drive
circuit

18 V Power supply

5 V Power supply
5 V Power supply

12V Power supply

DC / DC converter

Microcomputer

Heat
exchanger
fan

Outdoor unit

5 V Power supply

M-NET board
Fuse

Detection circuit for
the power supply to
the transmission line

TB7
Terminal block for
transmission line
for centralized control
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

Relay drive circuit

CN40

30 V Power supply

TB3
Indoor/outdoor
transmission block
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)
M-NET
transmission line
(Non-polar 2 wire)
AC Power source
AC 208 / 230 V

Relay

TB2

Terminal block for
power source
TB15

Indoor unit

Terminal block
for MA remote
TB5 controller

To next unit
(Indoor unit)

DC / DC
converter

MA remote controller wiring
(Non-polar 2 wire)

Terminal block
for transmission
line connection
DC 17 ~ 30 V

A, B

DC 17 ~ 30 V

M-NET remote
controller

A, B

DC 9 ~ 12 V

MA remote
controller

* MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together.
(Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

HWE08040

- 259 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
2) PUHY-P120THMU-A
Power source system (AC 208 / 230 V)
Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

Noise filter
72C

Rectifier

Inverter

Smoothing capacitor

DCL

INV board
15V Power supply

Fuse

Fuse
Surge protection

Fuse
72C
Solenoid valve
4-way valve
CH11

Inverter drive
circuit

DC / DC
converter

Microcomputer

12 V Power supply

5 V Power supply

Fan board

Control board

Relay, LEV
Drive circuit

Inverter

Inverter reset
circuit
Microcomputer

Fuse

63H1

Inverter drive
circuit

18 V Power supply

5 V Power supply

LEV

5 V Power supply
12V Power supply

Compressor

Microcomputer

Heat
exchanger
fan

Outdoor unit

Noise filter

TB1
AC 208 / 230 V
Terminal block for
power source

DC / DC converter

M-NET board
Fuse

Detection circuit for
the power supply to
the transmission line

TB7
Terminal block for
transmission line
for centralized control
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

Relay drive circuit

DC / DC
converter

CN40
30 V Power supply

TB3
Indoor/outdoor
transmission block
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

Relay

TB2
AC Power source
AC 208 / 230 V

Terminal block for
power source
TB15
Terminal block
for MA remote
TB5 controller

To next unit
(Indoor unit)

Indoor unit

MA remote controller wiring
(Non-polar 2 wire)

Terminal block
for transmission
line connection
DC 17 ~ 30 V

A, B

DC 17 ~ 30 V

M-NET remote
controller

A, B

DC 9 ~ 12 V

MA remote
controller

* MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together.
(Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

HWE08040

- 260 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
(2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of outdoor unit
1) PUHY-P72, P96THMU-A
Check the voltage at the indoor/outdoor
transmission terminal block (TB3) of outdoor unit.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES
Check whether the transmission line is disconnected,
check for contact failure, and repair the problem.

NO
Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

NO

Check if the indoor/outdoor transmission line is not
short-circuited, and repair the problem.

Check whether the male connector is connected to
the female power supply connector (CN40).

NO

Connected

YES
Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

DC24 ~ 30V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power
supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),
and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
NO
Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES Fix the wiring and connector

Is there a wiring
error or a connector
disconnection?

disconnection.

YES

Check for shorted transmission
line for centralized control.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CNS2 on the control board.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES
Replace the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power
supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),
and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
Is there a connector
disconnection?

YES

Fix the connector disconnection.

NO
Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins
of the CNIT on the control board.
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of
the CNDC on the INV board.

DC265 ~ 357V

NO

YES

Is the voltage
measurement between
4.5 and 5.2 VDC?

YES
Replace the M-NET board

Replace the M-NET board

NO
Check the voltage between SC-P1 and TB-N on the INV board.

DC265 ~ 357V

YES
Check the inrush current resistance (R1).

NO
NO

Check the voltages among SC-R, SC-S, and
SC-T on the INV board.

22

10%

YES
AC188 ~ 253V

Replace the inrush current
limiting resistor.
Replace the INV board.

YES
Replace the INV board.

NO
Check the voltages among TB21, TB22, and
TB23 on the noise filter.

YES
AC188 ~ 253V

NO

Check the wiring between the noise filter and the
INV board as well as screw tightness, and fix any
problems found.

Check the voltage at the power supply terminal block TB1.

YES
AC188 ~ 253V

Replace the noise filter.

NO
Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power
supply problems found.

Turn on the
power again.

HWE08040

- 261 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [THMU-A]
2) PUHY-P120THMU-A
Check the voltage at the indoor/outdoor
transmission terminal block (TB3) of outdoor unit.

YES
DC 24 ~ 30 V
NO

Check whether the transmission line is disconnected,
check for contact failure, and repair the problem.

Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission
line from TB3.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Check if the indoor/outdoor transmission line is not
short-circuited, and repair the problem.

NO
Check whether the male connector is connected to
the female power supply connector (CN40).

NO

Connected

YES
Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power
supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),
and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO

Is there a wiring
error or a connector
disconnection?

DC24 ~ 30V

NO
Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES

YES

Fix the wiring and connector
disconnection.
Check for shorted transmission
line for centralized control.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CNS2 on the control board.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES

Replace the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

DC24 ~ 30V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power
supply board for the transmission line (CN102 and CNIT),
and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
Is there a connector
disconnection?

YES

Fix the connector disconnection.

NO
Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins
of the CNIT on the control board.
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of
the CNDC3 on the INV board.

NO

Is the voltage
measurement between
4.5 and 5.2 VDC?

YES
Replace the M-NET board

YES
DC265 ~ 357V

Replace the M-NET board

NO
Check the voltage between TB31 and TB42 on the noise filter.

DC265 ~ 357V

YES
Replace the INV board.

NO
Check the voltage between the + and – terminals
on the diode stack.

DC265 ~ 357V

YES
Replace the noise filter.

NO
Check the voltages among TB21, TB22, and
TB23 on the noise filter.

YES
AC188 ~ 253V

Replace the diode stack.

NO
Check the voltage at the power supply terminal block TB1.

AC188 ~ 253V

YES

Replace the noise filter.

NO
Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power
supply problems found.

Turn on the
power again.

HWE08040

- 262 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]

-6- Control Circuit (YHMU-A)
(1) Control power source function block
1) PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A
Power source system (AC 380 / 415 V)
Control system (DC 5 ~ 30 V)

INV board
Rectifier

Noise filter
Noise filter

TB1
AC 460V
Terminal block for
power source

72C

DCL

Smoothing capacitor

Fuse

Inverter

Compressor

Inverter drive
circuit

17V Power supply
Rectifier

Surge protection

Microcomputer

5 V Power supply

Fuse
Trans Box

Inverter
Fuse

Solenoid valve
4-way valve
CH11

Relay, LEV
Drive circuit

72C, LEV

Fuse

Inverter reset
circuit
Microcomputer

63H1
Inverter drive
circuit

18 V Power supply

5 V Power supply
5 V Power supply

12V Power supply

DC / DC converter

Microcomputer

Heat
exchanger
fan

Oudoor
Outdoorunit
unit

Fan board
Control board

M-NET board
Detection circuit for
the power supply to
the transmission line

TB7
Terminal block for
transmission line
for centralized control
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)

Relay drive circuit

CN40

TB3
Indoor/outdoor
transmission block
(DC 24 ~ 30 V)
M-NET
transmission line
(Non-polar 2 wire)
AC Power source
AC 220 / 240 V

30 V Power supply
Relay

TB2

Terminal block for
power source
TB15

Indoor unit

Terminal block
for MA remote
TB5 controller

To next unit
(Indoor unit)

DC / DC
converter

MA remote controller wiring
(Non-polar 2 wire)

Terminal block
for transmission
line connection
DC 17 ~ 30 V

A, B

DC 17 ~ 30 V

M-NET remote
controller

A, B

DC 9 ~ 12 V

MA remote
controller

* MA remote controllers and M-NET remote controllers cannot be used together.
(Both the M-NET and MA remote controller can be connected to a system with a system controller.)

HWE08040

- 263 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ] [YHMU-A]
(2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of outdoor unit
1) PUHY-P72, P96, P120YHMU-A
Check the voltage at the indoor/outdoor
transmission terminal block (TB3) of outdoor unit.

YES
DC 24 ~ 30 V
NO

Check whether the transmission line is disconnected,
check for contact failure, and repair the problem.

Check the voltage at TB3 after removing transmission line from TB3.

YES
DC 24 ~ 30 V
NO

Check if the indoor/outdoor transmission line is not
short-circuited, and repair the problem.

Check whether the male connector is connected to
the female power supply connector (CN40).

NO

Connected

YES
Check voltage of terminal block for centralized control (TB7).

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the
transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
NO
Check voltage of TB7 by removing transmission line from TB7.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Is there a wiring
error or a connector
disconnection?

Fix the wiring and connector disconnection.

YES

Check for shorted transmission line or power feed
collision for centralized control.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CNS2 on the control board.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Replace the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.2 pins of the
CN102 on the power supply board for the transmission line.

DC 24 ~ 30 V

YES

Check the wiring between the control board and power supply board for the
transmission line (CN102 and CNIT), and check for proper connection of connectors.

NO
YES

Is there a connector
disconnection?

Fix the connector disconnection.

NO
Check the voltage between No.5 and No.2 pins of the CNIT
on the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of
the noise filter CN4.

YES

Is the voltage
measurement between
4.5 and 5.2 VDC?

Replace the M-NET board

YES
DC270 ~ 356V

Replace the control board.

NO
Check the voltage between No.1 and No.3 pins of
the noise filter CN5.

DC270 ~ 356V

YES
Replace the M-NET board

NO
Check the noise filter fuse F4 .

Fuse F4 on the noise filter board is blown.

YES

NO

Disconnect the noise filters CN4 and CN5, and then replace fuse F4 on the noise filter
board, then turn the power on.
Fuse F4 on the
noise filter board is blown.

YES
Replace the noise filter.

NO
Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on.
Fuse F4 on the
noise filter board is blown.

YES
Replace the control board.

NO

Check fuse F5.

Replace the M-NET board

YES
Fuse F5 is blown.

Pull out CN4 and CN5 on the noise filter, replace fuse F5, and turn on the power.

YES

NO

Replace the noise filter.

Fuse F5 is blown.

Check the voltages among TB22 and TB23 on the
noise filter

NO
Connect the noise filter CN4, and then turn the power on.

YES
Fuse F5 is blown.

Replace the control board.

NO
Replace the M-NET board

YES
AC414 ~ 506V

Replace the noise filter.

NO
Check the voltage between L2 and L3 at the power supply
terminal block TB1.

AC414 ~ 506V

NO

YES
Replace the noise filter.
Check and fix any power supply wiring and main power supply problems found.

Turn on the
power again.

HWE08040

- 264 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[5] Refrigerant Leak
1.
1)
2)
3)

7)
8)
9)

Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Cooling season)
Mount a pressure gauge on the service check joint (CJ2) on the low-pressure side.
Stop all the indoor units, and close the liquid service valve (BV2) inside the outdoor unit while the compressor is being stopped.
Stop all the indoor units; turn on SW2-4 on the outdoor unit control board while the compressor is being stopped.(Pump down
mode will start, and all the indoor units will run in cooling test run mode.)
In the pump down mode (SW2-4 is ON), all the indoor units will automatically stop when the low pressure (63LS) reaches
0.383MPa [55psi] or less or 15 minutes have passed after the pump mode started. Stop all the indoor units and compressors
when the pressure indicated by the pressure gauge, which is on the check joint (CJ2) for low-pressure service, reaches
0.383MPa [55psi] or 20 minutes pass after the pump down operation is started.
Close the gas service valve (BV1) inside the outdoor unit.
Collect the refrigerant that remains in the extended pipe for the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into the atmosphere
when it is collected.
Repair the leak.
After repairing the leak, vacuum the extension pipe and the indoor unit.
To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the outdoor unit and turn off SW2-4.

2.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Leak spot: In the case of outdoor unit (Cooling season)
Run all the indoor units in the cooling test run mode.
To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the outdoor control board is ON.
Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the cooling mode.
Check that all the indoor units are performing a cooling operation.

4)

5)
6)

(2) Check the values of Tc and TH6.
(To display the values on the LED screen, use the self-diagnosis switch (SW1) on the outdoor unit control board.)
1) When Tc-TH6 is 10°C [18°F] or more : See the next item (3).
2) When Tc-TH6 is less than 10°C [18°F] : After the compressor stops, collect the refrigerant inside the system, repair the leak,
perform evacuation, and recharge new refrigerant. (Leak spot: 4. In the case of outdoor unit, handle in the same way as heating season.)
Tc self-diagnosis switch

TH6 self-diagnosis switch

SW1

SW1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ON

ON

(3) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.
1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the outdoor control board is ON.
2) Check that all the indoor units are being stopped.
(4) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2).
(5) To prevent the liquid seal, extract small amount of refrigerant from the check joint of the liquid service valve (BV2),
as the liquid seal may cause a malfunction of the unit.
In the cooling cycle, the section between check valve CV1 and LEV 2a/b will form a closed circuit.
Open LEV1 before recovering the refrigerant or evacuating the system.
(6) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the outdoor unit.Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere
when it is collected.
(7) Repair the leak.
(8) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation inside the outdoor unit.
(9) To adjust refrigerant amount, open the service valves (BV1 and BV2) inside the outdoor unit.
When the power to the outdoor/indoor unit must be turned off to repair the leak after closing the service valves specified in
the item 4, turn the power off in approximately one hour after the outdoor/indoor units stop.
1) When 30 minutes have passed after the item 4 above, the indoor unit lev turns from fully closed to slightly open to prevent the
refrigerant seal.
LEV2a and LEV2b open when the outdoor unit remains stopped for 15 minutes to allow for the collection of refrigerant in the
outdoor unit heat exchanger and to enable the evacuation of the outdoor unit heat exchanger.
If the power is turned of in less than 5 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the outdoor
unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation.
2) Therefore, if the power source is turned off within 30 minutes, the lev remains fully closed and the refrigerant remains sealed.
When only the power for the indoor unit is turned off, the indoor unit LEV turns from faintly open to fully closed.
HWE08040

- 265 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]
3.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Leak spot: In the case of extension pipe for indoor unit (Heating season)
Run all the indoor units in heating test run mode.
To run the indoor unit in test run mode, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the outdoor control board is ON.
Change the setting of the remote controller for all the indoor units to the heating mode.
Check that all the indoor units are performing a heating operation.

(2) Stop all the indoor units, and stop the compressor.
1) To stop all the indoor units and the compressors, turn SW3-2 from ON to OFF when SW3-1 on the outdoor control board is ON.
2) Check that all the indoor units are stopped.
(3) Close the service valves (BV1 and BV2).
(4) Collect the refrigerant that remains inside the indoor unit. Do not discharge refrigerant into air into the atmosphere
when it is collected.
(5) Repair the leak.
(6) After repairing the leak, perform evacuation of the extension pipe for the indoor unit, and open the service valves
(BV1 and BV2) to adjust refrigerant.
4. Leak spot: In the case of outdoor unit (Heating season)
1) Collect the refrigerant in the entire system (outdoor unit, extended pipe and indoor unit).Do not discharge refrigerant into the
atmosphere when it is collected.In the cooling cycle, the section between check valve CV1 and LEV 2a/b will form a
closed circuit.Open LEV1 before recovering the refrigerant or evacuating the system.
2) Repair the leak.
3) After repairing the leak, replace the dryer with the new one, and perform evacuation of the entire system, and calculate the
standard amount of refrigerant to be added (for outdoor unit, extended pipe and indoor unit), and charge the refrigerant.
Refer to "VIII [4] 3. "
If the indoor or outdoor units need to be turned off for repairing leaks during Step 1) above, turn off the power approximately
1 hour after the units came to a stop.
If the power is turned off in less than 15 minutes, LEV2a and LEV2b may close, trapping high-pressure refrigerant in the outdoor unit heat exchanger and creating a highly dangerous situation.

HWE08040

- 266 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[6] Compressor Replacement Instructions
[Compressor replacement procedures]
Follow the procedures below (Steps 1 through 6) to remove the compressor components and replace the compressor.
Reassemble them in the reverse order after replacing the compressor.

Service panel

Control box

Compressor cover
(front)

1. Remove both the top and bottom service panels
(front panels).

2. Remove the control box and the compressor
cover (front).

Transformer *1
box

Frame
Electric
wiring

3. Remove the wires that are secured to the frame,
and remove the frame.

*1 Remove the transformer box from the P72, P96, and P120YHMU-A models.

HWE08040

- 267 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

Compressor covers
(right and left)
(The inside of the compressor
cover is lined with sound
insulation material.)

Compressor cover
(top)

Crankcase heater

4. Remove the compressor cover (top).

5. Remove the compressor wires, compressor covers
(right and left), and crankcase heater.

Protection for the
sealing material

Suction piping

Protection for the
compressor cover
6. Place protective materials on the insulation lining of
the compressor cover and on the sealing material
on the compressor suction pipe to protect them from
the torch flame, debraze the pipe, and replace the
compressor.

HWE08040

- 268 -

GB

[ IX Troubleshooting ]

[7] Troubleshooting Using the Outdoor Unit LED Error Display
If the LED error display appear as follows while all the SW1 switches are set to OFF, check the items under the applicable item
numbers below.
1. Error code appears on the LED display.
Refer to IX [2] Responding to Error Display on the Remote Controller.
2. LED is blank.
Take the following troubleshooting steps.
(1) If the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC on the control board is outside the range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC,
refer to IX [4] -7- (2) Troubleshooting transmission power circuit of outdoor unit.
(2) If the LED error display becomes lit when the power is turned on with all the connectors on the control board except
CNDC disconnected, there is a problem with the wiring to those connectors or with the connectors themselves.
(3) If nothing appears on the display under item (2) above AND the voltage between pins 1 and 3 of CNDC is within the
range between 220 VDC and 380 VDC, control board failure is suspected.
3.
(1)
1)
2)
3)

Only the software version appears on the LED display.
Only the software version appears while the transmission cables to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected.
Wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board.(CNIT, CNS2, CN102)
If item 1) checks out OK, the transmission line power supply board failure is suspected.
If items 1) and 2) check out OK, control board failure is suspected.

(2) If the LED display appears as noted in "X [1] 2. LED display at Initial setting"(page 273) while the transmission cables
to TB3 and TB7 are disconnected, failure with the transmission cable or the connected equipment is suspected.

HWE08040

- 269 -

GB

- 270 -

X LED Monitor Display on the Outdoor Unit Board
[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor ............................................................... 273

HWE08040

- 271 -

GB

- 272 -

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Outdoor Unit Board ]
X LED Monitor Display on the Outdoor Unit Board

[1] How to Read the LED on the Service Monitor
1. How to read the LED
By setting the DIP SW 1-1 through 1-10 (Switch number 10 is represented by 0), the operating condition of the unit can be
monitored on the service monitor. (Refer to the table on the following pages for DIP SW settings.)
The service monitor uses 4-digit 7-segment LED to display numerical values and other types of information.
7SEG LED
SW1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 10

ON

SW1-10 is represented as “0” in the table.

Pressure and temperature are examples of numerical values, and operating conditions and the on-off status of solenoid valve
are examples of flag display.
1) Display of numerical values
Example: When the pressure data sensor reads 18.8kg/cm2 (Item No. 58)
The unit of pressure is in kg/cm2
 Use the following conversion formula to convert the displayed value into
a value in SI unit.
Value in SI unit (MPa) = Displayed value (kg/cm2) x 0.098
2) Flag display
Example: When 21S4a, 21S4b, SV1a are ON. (Item No. 3)
Upper
Lower

LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8

Example: 3-minutes restart mode (Item No. 14)

LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8

2. LED display at initial setting
From power on until the completion of initial settings, the following information will be displayed on the monitor screen.
(Displays No. 1 through No. 4 in order repeatedly.)
No

Item

Display

Remarks

Software version
1

[0103] : Version 1.03

Refrigerant type
2

[ 410] : R410A

Model and capacity

[H-20] : Cooling/Heating 20 HP
For the first few minutes after power on, the capacity of
each outdoor unit is displayed. Thereafter, the combined capacity is displayed.

3

Communication address
4

[ 51] : Address 51

After the initial settings have been completed, the information on these items can be checked by making the switch setting
that corresponds to No. 517 in the LED display table.
Only item No. 1 "Software Version" appears on the display if there is a wiring failure between the control board and the transmission line power supply board or if the circuit board has failed.
HWE08040

- 273 -

GB

[ X LED Monitor Display on the Outdoor Unit Board ]
3. Time data storage function
The outdoor unit has a simple clock function that enables the unit to calculate the current time with an internal timer by receiving the time set by the system controller, such as G(B)-50A.
If an error (including a preliminary error) occurs, the error history data and the error detection time are stored into the service
memory.
The error detection time stored in the service memory and the current time can be seen on the service LED.
1) Use the time displayed on the service LED as a reference.
2) The date and the time are set to "00" by default. If a system controller that sets the time, such as G(B)-50A is not connected,
the elapsed time and days since the first power on will be displayed.
If the time set on a system controller is received, the count will start from the set date and the time.
3) The time is not updated while the power of the indoor unit is turned off. When the power is turned off and then on again, the
count will resume from the time before the power was turned off. Thus, the time that differs the actual time will be displayed.
(This also applies when a power failure occurs.)
The system controller, such as G(B)-50A, adjusts the time once a day. When the system controller is connected, the time will
be automatically updated to the correct current time after the time set by the system controller is received. (The data stored
into the memory before the set time is received will not be updated.)
(1) Reading the time data:
1) Time display
Example: 12 past 9

* Disappears if the time data is deviated due to a power failure, or if a
system controller that sets the time is not connected.
2) Date display
When the main controller that can set the time is connected
Example: May 10, 2003

Alternate display

Alternate display of year and month, and date
* Appears between the year and the month, and nothing appears
when the date is displayed.

When the main controller that can set the time is not connected
Example: 52 days after power was turned on

Alternate display

Day count

* Appears between the year and the month, and nothing
appears when the date is displayed.

HWE08040

- 274 -

GB

HWE08040

- 275 -

0110000000

1110000000

0001000000

1001000000

0101000000

7

8

9

10

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

LD4
72C

LD5

LD6

SV5c

SV5b

21S4c

SV1a

0000 to 9999

21S4b

CH11

0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

0000 to 9999 (Address and error codes highlighted)

LD3

Contact point demand
capacity

Emergency
operation

LD2

0000 to 9999

Retry operation

21S4a

Comp in operation

LD1

Display

Communication demand capacity

Special control

Relay output display
3

Relay output display
2

Check (error) display 3
(Including IC and BC)

Check (error) display 2
OC/OS error

Check (error) display 1
OC/OS error

Relay output display 1
Lighting

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1010000000

6

1100000000

3

5

0100000000

2

0010000000

1000000000

1

4

0000000000

1234567890

SW1

0

No.

Current data

LED monitor display

XLED monitor display on the outdoor unit board

Communication error between the
OC and OS

SV9

OC

LD7

Communication error
3-minute restart delay
mode

Power supply for indoor
transmission line

CPU in operation

LD8

B

B

B

A

A

B

A

B

A

OC

B

A

A

A

B

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

If not demanded controlled, "----" [ % ] appears on the display.

If not demanded controlled, "----" [ % ] appears on the display.

If no errors are detected,
"----" appears on the display.

Display of the latest preliminary error
If no preliminary errors
are detected, "----" appears on the display.

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 276 -

0011000000

1011000000

0111000000

1111000000

0000100000

1000100000

0100100000

1100100000

0010100000

1010100000

0110100000

1110100000

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

Indoor unit
Operation
mode

Indoor unit
check

Unit No. 49

Bottom

Top

Unit No. 33
Unit No. 41

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 25

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 9
Unit No. 17

Bottom

Top

Unit No. 1

Unit No. 49

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 41

Unit No. 33

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 25

Bottom

Unit No. 9
Unit No. 17

Top

Unit No. 1

Contact
point demand

LD1

Bottom

Top

OC/OS identification

Outdoor unit operation
status

External signal
(Open input contact
point)

External signal
(Open input contact
point)

Item

Unit No. 50

Unit No. 42

Unit No. 34

Unit No. 26

Unit No. 18

Unit No. 10

Unit No. 2

Unit No. 50

Unit No. 42

Unit No. 34

Unit No. 26

Unit No. 18

Unit No. 10

Unit No. 2

Low-noise
mode
(Capacity
priority )

LD2

Unit No.43

Unit No. 35

Unit No. 27

Unit No. 19

Unit No. 11

Unit No. 3

Unit No.43

Unit No. 35

Unit No. 27

Unit No. 19

Unit No. 11

Unit No. 3

3-minutes
restart mode

Snow sensor

LD3

Preliminary
error

Coolingheating
changeover
(Heating)

LD5

Unit No. 44

Unit No. 36

Unit No. 28

Unit No. 20

Unit No. 12

Unit No. 4

Unit No. 44

Unit No. 36

Unit No. 28

Unit No. 20

Unit No. 12

Unit No. 4

Unit No. 45

Unit No. 37

Unit No. 29

Unit No. 21

Unit No. 13

Unit No. 5

Unit No. 45

Unit No. 37

Unit No. 29

Unit No. 21

Unit No. 13

Unit No. 5

OC/OS-1/OS-2

Compressor
in operation

Coolingheating
changeover
(Cooling)

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101000000

1234567890

SW1

11

No.

Current data

Unit No. 46

Unit No. 38

Unit No. 30

Unit No. 22

Unit No. 14

Unit No. 6

Unit No. 46

Unit No. 38

Unit No. 30

Unit No. 22

Unit No. 14

Unit No. 6

Error

LD6

Unit No47

Unit No. 39

Unit No. 31

Unit No. 23

Unit No. 15

Unit No. 7

Unit No47

Unit No. 39

Unit No. 31

Unit No. 23

Unit No. 15

Unit No. 7

3-minutes
restart after
instantaneous power
failure

LD7

Unit No. 48

Unit No. 40

Unit No. 32

Unit No. 24

Unit No. 16

Unit No. 8

Unit No. 48

Unit No. 40

Unit No. 32

Unit No. 24

Unit No. 16

Unit No. 8

Preliminary
low pressure error

Low-noise
mode
(Quiet priority)

LD8

B

B

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Lit during cooling
Lit during heating
Unlit while the unit is
stopped or in the fan
mode

The lamp that corresponds to the unit that
came to an abnormal stop
lights.
The lamp goes off when
the error is reset.
Each unit that comes to
an abnormal unit will be
given a sequential number in ascending order
starting with 1.

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 277 -

0010010000

1010010000

0110010000

1110010000

0001010000

1001010000

0101010000

1101010000

0011010000

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

Outdoor unit control
mode
Stop

Permissible
stop

Unit No. 49

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 41

Bottom

Unit No. 33

Top

Unit No. 17
Unit No. 25

Top

Bottom

Unit No. 9

Unit No. 1

LD1

Bottom

Top

Outdoor unit Operation
mode

Indoor unit
thermostat

Item

Refrigerant
recovery

Thermo OFF

Standby

Unit No. 50

Unit No. 42

Unit No. 34

Unit No. 26

Unit No. 18

Unit No. 10

Unit No. 2

LD2

Abnormal
stop

Cooling

Unit No.43

Unit No. 35

Unit No. 27

Unit No. 19

Unit No. 11

Unit No. 3

LD3

Scheduled
control

Unit No. 44

Unit No. 36

Unit No. 28

Unit No. 20

Unit No. 12

Unit No. 4

LD4

LD5

Initial start
up

Heating

Unit No. 45

Unit No. 37

Unit No. 29

Unit No. 21

Unit No. 13

Unit No. 5

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1100010000

1111100000

31

35

0111100000

30

0100010000

1011100000

29

1000010000

0011100000

28

34

1101100000

27

33

0101100000

26

0000010000

1001100000

25

32

0001100000

1234567890

SW1

24

No.

Current data

Defrost

Unit No. 46

Unit No. 38

Unit No. 30

Unit No. 22

Unit No. 14

Unit No. 6

LD6

Oil balance

Unit No47

Unit No. 39

Unit No. 31

Unit No. 23

Unit No. 15

Unit No. 7

LD7

Low frequency oil
recovery

Unit No. 48

Unit No. 40

Unit No. 32

Unit No. 24

Unit No. 16

Unit No. 8

LD8

A

A

B

B

OC

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Lit when thermostat is on
Unlit when thermostat is
off

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 278 -

1111110000

0000001000

1000001000

0100001000

1100001000

0010001000

1010001000

0110001000

1110001000

64

65

66

67

68

69

70

71

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

Low-pressure sensor
data

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

-99.9 to 999.9

LD3

High-pressure sensor
data

LD2

-99.9 to 999.9

LD1

Display

THBOX

THHS1

TH5

TH2

TH6

TH7

TH3

TH4

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0111110000

63

56

62

1110110000

0001110000

55

1011110000

0110110000

54

61

1010110000

53

0011110000

0010110000

52

60

1100110000

51

1101110000

0100110000

50

59

1000110000

49

0101110000

0000110000

48

58

1111010000

47

1001110000

0111010000

46

57

1011010000

1234567890

SW1

45

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [kgf/cm2]

The unit is [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 279 -

0101101000

1101101000

0011101000

1011101000

91

92

93

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

All AK (OC+OS)

COMP operating frequency

COMP frequency

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD3

Total frequency of each
unit

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

Total frequencies
(OC+OS)

Te

Tc

Target Te

Target Tc

Qjh

Qjc

Qj

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001101000

90

1100101000

83

89

0100101000

82

0001101000

1000101000

81

88

0000101000

80

1110101000

1111001000

79

87

0111001000

78

0110101000

1011001000

77

86

0011001000

76

1010101000

1101001000

75

85

0101001000

74

0010101000

1001001000

73

84

0001001000

1234567890

SW1

72

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

A

A

A

B

A

A

B

B

B

B

B

OC

A

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [rps]
Output frequency of the
inverter depends on the
type of compressor and
equals the integer multiples (x1, x2 etc.) of the
operating frequency of
the compressor

Control data [ Hz ]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 280 -

0011011000

1011011000

108

109

LD5

0000 to 9999

LD4

Number of times the
unit went into the mode
to remedy wet vapor
suction

COMP bus voltage

COMP operating current (DC)

LEV2

LEV1

0000 to 9999

00.0 to 999.9

00.0 to 999.9

60 to 1400

0 to 480

0000 to 9999

LD3

Fan inverter output frequency

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

FAN

AK

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0010111000

1101011000

107

116

0101011000

106

1100111000

1001011000

105

115

0001011000

104

0100111000

1110011000

103

114

0110011000

102

1000111000

1010011000

101

0000111000

0010011000

100

113

1100011000

99

112

0100011000

98

0111011000

1000011000

97

1111011000

0000011000

96

111

1111101000

95

110

0111101000

1234567890

SW1

94

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ V ]

Peak value [A]

Outdoor LEV opening
(Fully open: 1400)

Outdoor LEV opening
(Fully open: 480)

Twice the actual output
frequency

Fan output [ % ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 281 -

1000000100

0100000100

1100000100

0010000100

1010000100

0110000100

1110000100

0001000100

1001000100

0101000100

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

Integrated operation
time of compressor (for
rotation purpose)
0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

Abnormal Td
rise

COMP number of startstop events
Lower 4 digits

Low-pressure drop

0000 to 9999

High-pressure drop

LD5

COMP number of startstop events
Upper 4 digits

Backup mode
Abnormal
pressure rise

LD4

0000 to 9999

LD3

COMP Operation time
Lower 4 digits

LD2
0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

COMP Operation time
Upper 4 digits

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0000000100

0011111000

124

128

1101111000

123

1111111000

0101111000

122

127

1001111000

121

0111111000

0001111000

120

126

1110111000

119

1011111000

0110111000

118

125

1010111000

1234567890

SW1

117

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ h ]

Count-up at start-up
The unit is [Time]

Stays lit for 90 seconds
after the completion of
backup control

The unit is [ h ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 282 -

1011100100

0111100100

1111100100

0000010100

1000010100

0100010100

1100010100

0010010100

1010010100

0110010100

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0011100100

0110100100

150

1101100100

1010100100

149

156

0010100100

148

155

1100100100

147

0101100100

0100100100

146

154

1000100100

145

1001100100

0000100100

144

0001100100

1111000100

143

153

0111000100

142

152

1011000100

141

1110100100

0011000100

140

151

1101000100

1234567890

SW1

139

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1
Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

0001010100

1001010100

0101010100

1101010100

0011010100

1011010100

0111010100

1111010100

0000110100

1000110100

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1110010100

1234567890

SW1

167

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1
Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

- 283 -

HWE08040

- 284 -

0010001100

1010001100

0110001100

1110001100

0001001100

196

197

198

199

200

LD5

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

LD4

Error details of inverter

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

0000 to 9999

LD3

Error details of inverter (0001-0120)

LD2

Error history of inverter
(At the time of last data
backup before error)

LD1

Display

Error details of inverter

Error history 10

Error details of inverter

Error history 9

Error details of inverter

Error history 8

Error details of inverter

Error history 7

Error details of inverter

Error history 6

Error details of inverter

Error history 5

Error details of inverter

Error history 4

Error details of inverter

Error history 3

Error details of inverter

Error history 2

Error details of inverter

Error history 1

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0100001100

1000001100

193

1100001100

0000001100

192

194

1111110100

191

195

0111110100

190

0011110100

1011110100

188

189

1001110100

185

0101110100

0001110100

184

1101110100

1110110100

183

186

0110110100

182

187

0010110100

1010110100

180

1100110100

179

181

0100110100

1234567890

SW1

178

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

OC

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Address and error codes
highlighted
If no errors are detected,
"---- " appears on the display.
Preliminary error information of the OS does not
appear on the OC.
Neither preliminary error
information of the OC nor
error information of the IC
appears on the OS.

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 285 -

0101001100

1101001100

0011001100

1011001100

0111001100

1111001100

0000101100

1000101100

0100101100

1100101100

0010101100

1010101100

0110101100

1110101100

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

Relay output display
3
Lighting

Relay output display
2
Lighting

Bottom

Top

Bottom

Top

Relay output display 1
Lighting

Outdoor unit control
mode

Outdoor unit Operation
mode

OC/OS identification

Outdoor unit operation
status

Item

21S4a

Comp in operation

Stop

Permissible
stop

LD1

Refrigerant
recovery

Thermo OFF

Standby

LD2

21S4b

CH11

Abnormal
stop

Cooling

3-minutes
restart mode

LD3

Preliminary
error

LD5

SV5c

SV5b

Scheduled
control

21S4c

SV1a

72C

Initial start
up

Heating

OC/OS-1/OS-2

Compressor
in operation

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001001100

1234567890

SW1

201

No.

Error history

Defrost

Error

LD6

SV9

OC

Oil balance

3-minutes
restart after
instantaneous power
failure

LD7

Lit while
power to the
indoor units
is being supplied

Always lit

Low frequency oil
recovery

Preliminary
low pressure error

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 286 -

0101011100

1101011100

0011011100

1011011100

0111011100

1111011100

0000111100

1000111100

0100111100

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

Low-pressure sensor
data

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

-99.9 to 999.9

LD3

High-pressure sensor
data

LD2

-99.9 to 999.9

LD1

Display

THBOX

THHS1

TH5

TH2

TH6

TH7

TH3

TH4

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001011100

234

227

233

0100011100

1100011100

226

0001011100

1000011100

225

232

0000011100

224

1110011100

1111101100

223

231

0111101100

222

0110011100

1011101100

221

230

0011101100

220

1010011100

1101101100

219

229

0101101100

218

0010011100

1001101100

217

228

0001101100

1234567890

SW1

216

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [kgf/cm2]

The unit is [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 287 -

1101000010

267

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

0000 to 9999
0000 to 9999

Fan inverter output frequency

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

FAN

AK

All AK (OC+OS)

COMP operating frequency

COMP frequency

0000 to 9999

LD3

Total frequency of each
unit

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

Total frequencies
(OC+OS)

Te

Tc

Target Te

Target Tc

Qjh

Qjc

Qj

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0101000010

0110000010

262

266

1010000010

261

1001000010

0010000010

260

265

1100000010

259

1110000010

0100000010

258

0001000010

1000000010

257

264

0000000010

256

263

1111111100

255

0111111100

0101111100

250

1011111100

1001111100

249

254

0001111100

248

253

1110111100

247

1101111100

0110111100

246

0011111100

1010111100

245

252

0010111100

244

251

1100111100

1234567890

SW1

243

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

B

A

A

A

B

A

A

B

B

B

B

B

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Twice the actual output
frequency

Fan inverter output [ % ]

The unit is [rps]

Control data [ Hz ]

The unit is [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 288 -

0011100010

1011100010

0111100010

1111100010

0000010010

1000010010

0100010010

1100010010

0010010010

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

60 to 1400

0 to 480

LD5

00.0 to 999.9

00.0 to 999.9

LD4

0000 to 9999

LD3

COMP Operation time
Lower 4 digits

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

COMP Operation time
Upper 4 digits

COMP bus voltage

COMP operating current (DC)

LEV2

LEV1

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101100010

0110100010

278

284

1010100010

277

283

0010100010

276

0101100010

1100100010

275

282

0100100010

274

1001100010

1000100010

273

0001100010

0000100010

272

281

1111000010

271

280

0111000010

270

1110100010

1011000010

269

279

0011000010

1234567890

SW1

268

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ h ]

The unit is [ V ]

Outdoor unit LEV opening
(Fully open: 1400)

Outdoor unit LEV opening
(Fully open: 480)

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

0110010010

1110010010

0001010010

1001010010

0101010010

1101010010

0011010010

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

LD4

LD5

Integrated operation
time of compressor (for
rotation purpose)
0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD3

COMP number of startstop events
Lower 4 digits

LD2

0000 to 9999

LD1

Display

COMP number of startstop events
Upper 4 digits

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1010010010

1234567890

SW1

293

No.

Error history

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

A

A

OC

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ h ]

Count-up at start-up
The unit is [Time]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

- 289 -

HWE08040

- 290 -

0111010010

1111010010

0000110010

1000110010

0100110010

1100110010

0010110010

1010110010

0110110010

1110110010

0001110010

1001110010

0101110010

1101110010

0011110010

1011110010

0111110010

1111110010

0000001010

1000001010

0100001010

1100001010

0010001010

1010001010

0110001010

1110001010

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

Start-up unit

Power supply unit

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address

OC/OS-1/OS-2 <-> Address

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011010010

1234567890

SW1

301

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 291 -

0101101010

1101101010

0011101010

1011101010

0111101010

346

347

348

349

350

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001101010

1100101010

339

0001101010

0100101010

338

345

1000101010

337

344

0000101010

336

1110101010

1111001010

335

343

0111001010

334

0110101010

1011001010

333

1010101010

0011001010

332

342

1101001010

331

341

0101001010

330

0010101010

1001001010

329

340

0001001010

1234567890

SW1

328

No.

Current data

LD6

LD7

LD8

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1
Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 292 -

0000011010

1000011010

0100011010

1100011010

0010011010

1010011010

0110011010

1110011010

0001011010

1001011010

0101011010

1101011010

0011011010

1011011010

0111011010

1111011010

352

353

354

355

356

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

364

365

366

367

IC17 Address/capacity code

IC16 Address/capacity code

IC15 Address/capacity code

IC14 Address/capacity code

IC13 Address/capacity code

IC12 Address/capacity code

IC11 Address/capacity code

IC10 Address/capacity code

IC9 Address/capacity code

IC8 Address/capacity code

IC7 Address/capacity code

IC6 Address/capacity code

IC5 Address/capacity code

IC4 Address/capacity code

IC3 Address/capacity code

IC2 Address/capacity code

IC1 Address/capacity code

Item
LD1

LD3

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD2

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1111101010

1234567890

SW1

351

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD6

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Displayed alternately every 5 seconds

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 293 -

0100000110

1100000110

0010000110

1010000110

0110000110

1110000110

0001000110

1001000110

0101000110

1101000110

386

387

388

389

390

391

392

393

394

395

IC45 Address/capacity code

IC44 Address/capacity code

IC43 Address/capacity code

IC42 Address/capacity code

IC41 Address/capacity code

IC40 Address/capacity code

IC39 Address/capacity code

IC38 Address/capacity code

IC37 Address/capacity code

IC36 Address/capacity code

IC35 Address/capacity code

IC34 Address/capacity code

IC33 Address/capacity code

IC32 Address/capacity code

IC31 Address/capacity code

IC30 Address/capacity code

IC29 Address/capacity code

IC28 Address/capacity code

IC27 Address/capacity code

IC26 Address/capacity code

IC25 Address/capacity code

IC24 Address/capacity code

IC23 Address/capacity code

IC22 Address/capacity code

IC21 Address/capacity code

IC20 Address/capacity code

IC19 Address/capacity code

IC18 Address/capacity code

Item
LD1

LD3

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD2

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1000000110

1101111010

379

0000000110

0101111010

378

385

1001111010

377

384

0001111010

376

1111111010

1110111010

375

383

0110111010

374

0111111010

1010111010

373

1011111010

0010111010

372

382

1100111010

371

381

0100111010

370

0011111010

1000111010

369

380

0000111010

1234567890

SW1

368

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD6

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

Displayed alternately every 5 seconds

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

0010100110

1010100110

0110100110

1110100110

404

405

406

407

- 294 -

IC4 Suction temperature

IC3 Suction temperature

IC2 Suction temperature

IC1 Suction temperature

IC50 Address/capacity code

IC49 Address/capacity code

IC48 Address/capacity code

IC47 Address/capacity code

IC46 Address/capacity code

Item
LD1

LD3

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD2

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101100110

1100100110

403

411

0100100110

402

0101100110

1000100110

401

1001100110

0000100110

400

410

1111000110

399

409

0111000110

398

0001100110

1011000110

397

408

0011000110

1234567890

SW1

396

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD6

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Displayed alternately every 5 seconds

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 295 -

0111010110

1111010110

0000110110

1000110110

0100110110

1100110110

430

431

432

433

434

435

IC28 Suction temperature

IC27 Suction temperature

IC26 Suction temperature

IC25 Suction temperature

IC24 Suction temperature

IC23 Suction temperature

IC22 Suction temperature

IC21 Suction temperature

IC20 Suction temperature

IC19 Suction temperature

IC18 Suction temperature

IC17 Suction temperature

IC16 Suction temperature

IC15 Suction temperature

IC14 Suction temperature

IC13 Suction temperature

IC12 Suction temperature

IC11 Suction temperature

IC10 Suction temperature

IC9 Suction temperature

IC8 Suction temperature

IC7 Suction temperature

IC6 Suction temperature

IC5 Suction temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011010110

1110010110

423

0011010110

0110010110

422

429

1010010110

421

428

0010010110

420

1101010110

1100010110

419

427

0100010110

418

0101010110

1000010110

417

1001010110

0000010110

416

426

1111100110

415

425

0111100110

414

0001010110

1011100110

413

424

0011100110

1234567890

SW1

412

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 296 -

1101001110

0011001110

1011001110

0111001110

1111001110

459

460

461

462

463

IC6 Liquid pipe temperature

IC5 Liquid pipe temperature

IC4 Liquid pipe temperature

IC3 Liquid pipe temperature

IC2 Liquid pipe temperature

IC1 Liquid pipe temperature

IC50 Suction temperature

IC49Suction temperature

IC48 Suction temperature

IC47 Suction temperature

IC46 Suction temperature

IC45 Suction temperature

IC44 Suction temperature

IC43 Suction temperature

IC42 Suction temperature

IC41 Suction temperature

IC40 Suction temperature

IC39 Suction temperature

IC38 Suction temperature

IC37 Suction temperature

IC36 Suction temperature

IC35 Suction temperature

IC34 Suction temperature

IC33 Suction temperature

IC32 Suction temperature

IC31 Suction temperature

IC30 Suction temperature

IC29 Suction temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001001110

0001001110

456

0101001110

1110001110

455

458

0110001110

454

457

1010001110

1111110110

447

0010001110

0111110110

446

453

1011110110

445

452

0011110110

444

1100001110

1101110110

443

451

0101110110

442

0100001110

1001110110

441

1000001110

0001110110

440

450

1110110110

439

449

0110110110

438

0000001110

1010110110

437

448

0010110110

1234567890

SW1

436

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 297 -

0100011110

1100011110

0010011110

1010011110

0110011110

1110011110

0001011110

1001011110

0101011110

1101011110

482

483

484

485

486

487

488

489

490

491

IC34 Liquid pipe temperature

IC33 Liquid pipe temperature

IC32 Liquid pipe temperature

IC31 Liquid pipe temperature

IC30 Liquid pipe temperature

IC29 Liquid pipe temperature

IC28 Liquid pipe temperature

IC27 Liquid pipe temperature

IC26 Liquid pipe temperature

IC25 Liquid pipe temperature

IC24 Liquid pipe temperature

IC23 Liquid pipe temperature

IC22 Liquid pipe temperature

IC21 Liquid pipe temperature

IC20 Liquid pipe temperature

IC19 Liquid pipe temperature

IC18 Liquid pipe temperature

IC17 Liquid pipe temperature

IC16 Liquid pipe temperature

IC15 Liquid pipe temperature

IC14 Liquid pipe temperature

IC13 Liquid pipe temperature

IC12 Liquid pipe temperature

IC11 Liquid pipe temperature

IC10 Liquid pipe temperature

IC9 Liquid pipe temperature

IC8 Liquid pipe temperature

IC7 Liquid pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1000011110

1101101110

475

0000011110

0101101110

474

481

1001101110

473

480

0001101110

472

1111101110

1110101110

471

479

0110101110

470

0111101110

1010101110

469

1011101110

0010101110

468

478

1100101110

467

477

0100101110

466

0011101110

1000101110

465

476

0000101110

1234567890

SW1

464

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 298 -

0111111110

1111111110

510

511

IC50 Liquid pipe temperature

IC49 Liquid pipe temperature

IC48 Liquid pipe temperature

IC47 Liquid pipe temperature

IC46 Liquid pipe temperature

IC45 Liquid pipe temperature

IC44 Liquid pipe temperature

IC43 Liquid pipe temperature

IC42 Liquid pipe temperature

IC41 Liquid pipe temperature

IC40 Liquid pipe temperature

IC39 Liquid pipe temperature

IC38 Liquid pipe temperature

IC37 Liquid pipe temperature

IC36 Liquid pipe temperature

IC35 Liquid pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011111110

1110111110

503

0011111110

0110111110

502

509

1010111110

501

508

0010111110

500

1101111110

1100111110

499

507

0100111110

498

0101111110

1000111110

497

1001111110

0000111110

496

506

1111011110

495

505

0111011110

494

0001111110

1011011110

493

504

0011011110

1234567890

SW1

492

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

0110000001

1110000001

0001000001

1001000001

0101000001

518

519

520

521

522

OC address

Version/Capacity

OS address

BC/BS/TU address

RC address

IC/FU address

Self-address

Item
LD1

LD4

LD5

LD6

Count-up display of number of connected units

Count-up display of number of connected units

Count-up display of number of connected units

Count-up display of number of connected units

Alternate display of self address and unit model

LD3

LD7

OC address display

S/W version -> Refrigerant type -> Model and capacity -> Communication address

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0010000001

1100000001

515

1010000001

0100000001

514

517

1000000001

513

516

0000000001

1234567890

SW1

512

No.

Setting data

LD8

A

B

B

B

A

OC

B

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

- 299 -

HWE08040

- 300 -

1000100001

0100100001

1100100001

0010100001

1010100001

0110100001

1110100001

0001100001

1001100001

0101100001

1101100001

0011100001

1011100001

0111100001

1111100001

0000010001

1000010001

0100010001

1100010001

0010010001

1010010001

529

530

531

532

533

534

535

536

537

538

539

540

541

542

543

544

545

546

547

548

549

IC27 Gas pipe temperature

IC26 Gas pipe temperature

IC25 Gas pipe temperature

IC24 Gas pipe temperature

IC23 Gas pipe temperature

IC22 Gas pipe temperature

IC21 Gas pipe temperature

IC20 Gas pipe temperature

IC19 Gas pipe temperature

IC18 Gas pipe temperature

IC17 Gas pipe temperature

IC16 Gas pipe temperature

IC15 Gas pipe temperature

IC14 Gas pipe temperature

IC13 Gas pipe temperature

IC12 Gas pipe temperature

IC11 Gas pipe temperature

IC10 Gas pipe temperature

IC9 Gas pipe temperature

IC8 Gas pipe temperature

IC7 Gas pipe temperature

IC6 Gas pipe temperature

IC5 Gas pipe temperature

IC4 Gas pipe temperature

IC3 Gas pipe temperature

IC2 Gas pipe temperature

IC1 Gas pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1111000001

0111000001

526

0000100001

1011000001

525

528

0011000001

524

527

1101000001

1234567890

SW1

523

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 301 -

1110010001

0001010001

1001010001

0101010001

1101010001

0011010001

1011010001

0111010001

1111010001

0000110001

1000110001

0100110001

1100110001

0010110001

1010110001

0110110001

1110110001

0001110001

1001110001

0101110001

1101110001

0011110001

551

552

553

554

555

556

557

558

559

560

561

562

563

564

565

566

567

568

569

570

571

572

IC50 Gas pipe temperature

IC49 Gas pipe temperature

IC48 Gas pipe temperature

IC47 Gas pipe temperature

IC46 Gas pipe temperature

IC45 Gas pipe temperature

IC44 Gas pipe temperature

IC43 Gas pipe temperature

IC42 Gas pipe temperature

IC41 Gas pipe temperature

IC40 Gas pipe temperature

IC39 Gas pipe temperature

IC38 Gas pipe temperature

IC37 Gas pipe temperature

IC36 Gas pipe temperature

IC35 Gas pipe temperature

IC34 Gas pipe temperature

IC33 Gas pipe temperature

IC32 Gas pipe temperature

IC31 Gas pipe temperature

IC30 Gas pipe temperature

IC29 Gas pipe temperature

IC28Gas pipe temperature

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0110010001

1234567890

SW1

550

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [°C]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 302 -

0111110001

1111110001

0000001001

1000001001

0100001001

1100001001

0010001001

1010001001

0110001001

1110001001

0001001001

1001001001

0101001001

1101001001

0011001001

1011001001

0111001001

1111001001

0000101001

1000101001

0100101001

1100101001

0010101001

1010101001

0110101001

1110101001

574

575

576

577

578

579

580

581

582

583

584

585

586

587

588

589

590

591

592

593

594

595

596

597

598

599

IC27SH

IC26SH

IC25SH

IC24SH

IC23SH

IC22SH

IC21SH

IC20SH

IC19SH

IC18SH

IC17SH

IC16SH

IC15SH

IC14SH

IC13SH

IC12SH

IC11SH

IC10SH

IC9SH

IC8SH

IC7SH

IC6SH

IC5SH

IC4SH

IC3SH

IC2SH

IC1SH

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011110001

1234567890

SW1

573

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 303 -

0101011001

1101011001

0011011001

1011011001

0111011001

618

619

620

621

622

IC50SH

IC49SH

IC48SH

IC47SH

IC46SH

IC45SH

IC44SH

IC43SH

IC42SH

IC41SH

IC40SH

IC39SH

IC38SH

IC37SH

IC36SH

IC35SH

IC34SH

IC33SH

IC32SH

IC31SH

IC30SH

IC29SH

IC28SH

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001011001

1100011001

611

0001011001

0100011001

610

617

1000011001

609

616

0000011001

608

1110011001

1111101001

607

615

0111101001

606

0110011001

1011101001

605

1010011001

0011101001

604

614

1101101001

603

613

0101101001

602

0010011001

1001101001

601

612

0001101001

1234567890

SW1

600

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 304 -

0000111001

1000111001

0100111001

1100111001

0010111001

1010111001

0110111001

1110111001

0001111001

1001111001

0101111001

1101111001

0011111001

1011111001

0111111001

1111111001

0000000101

1000000101

0100000101

1100000101

0010000101

1010000101

0110000101

1110000101

0001000101

1001000101

624

625

626

627

628

629

630

631

632

633

634

635

636

637

638

639

640

641

642

643

644

645

646

647

648

649

IC27SC

IC26SC

IC25SC

IC24SC

IC23SC

IC22SC

IC21SC

IC20SC

IC19SC

IC18SC

IC17SC

IC16SC

IC15SC

IC14SC

IC13SC

IC12SC

IC11SC

IC10SC

IC9SC

IC8SC

IC7SC

IC6SC

IC5SC

IC4SC

IC3SC

IC2SC

IC1SC

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1111011001

1234567890

SW1

623

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 305 -

0011100101

1011100101

0111100101

1111100101

0000010101

1000010101

0100010101

1100010101

668

669

670

671

672

673

674

675

IC50SC

IC49SC

IC48SC

IC47SC

IC46SC

IC45SC

IC44SC

IC43SC

IC42SC

IC41SC

IC40SC

IC39SC

IC38SC

IC37SC

IC36SC

IC35SC

IC34SC

IC33SC

IC32SC

IC31SC

IC30SC

IC29SC

IC28SC

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

-99.9 to 999.9

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1101100101

1010100101

661

0101100101

0010100101

660

667

1100100101

659

666

0100100101

658

1001100101

1000100101

657

665

0000100101

656

0001100101

1111000101

655

1110100101

0111000101

654

664

1011000101

653

663

0011000101

652

0110100101

1101000101

651

662

0101000101

1234567890

SW1

650

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)*1

The unit is [ °C ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

1010010101

0110010101

1110010101

0001010101

1001010101

0101010101

1101010101

0011010101

1011010101

0111010101

1111010101

677

678

679

680

681

682

683

684

685

686

687

Fan board S/W version

INV board S/W version

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0.00 to 99.99

0.00 to 99.99

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0010010101

1234567890

SW1

676

No.

Setting data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

OC

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

- 306 -

HWE08040

- 307 -

Time of error detection 6-2

Time of error detection 6

Time of error detection 5-2

Time of error detection 5

Time of error detection 4-2

Time of error detection 4

Time of error detection 3-2

Time of error detection 3

Time of error detection 2-2

Time of error detection 2

Time of error detection 1-2

Time of error detection 1

Current time -2

Current time

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011110101

701

0001110101

696

0011110101

1110110101

695

700

0110110101

694

1101110101

1010110101

693

699

0010110101

692

0101110101

1100110101

691

698

0100110101

690

1001110101

1000110101

689

697

0000110101

1234567890

SW1

688

No.

Setting data

LD6

LD7

LD8
A

OC
A

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

0010001101

1010001101

0110001101

708

709

710

- 308 -

Time of last data backup before error -2

Time of last data backup before error

Time of error detection 10-2

Time of error detection 10

Time of error detection 9-2

Time of error detection 9

Time of error detection 8-2

Time of error detection 8

Time of error detection 7-2

Time of error detection 7

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

00.00 to 99.12/1 to 31

00:00 to 23:59

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1001001101

1100001101

707

713

0100001101

706

0001001101

1000001101

705

712

0000001101

704

1110001101

1111110101

703

711

0111110101

1234567890

SW1

702

No.

Setting data

LD6

LD7

LD8
A

OC
A

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Year and month, and date
alternate display

Hour: minute

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 309 -

1101001101

0011001101

1011001101

0111001101

1111001101

0000101101

1000101101

0100101101

1100101101

0010101101

1010101101

0110101101

1110101101

0001101101

1001101101

0101101101

1101101101

0011101101

1011101101

0111101101

1111101101

0000011101

1000011101

0100011101

1100011101

0010011101

715

716

717

718

719

720

721

722

723

724

725

726

727

728

729

730

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

738

739

740

IC27 LEV opening

IC26 LEV opening

IC25 LEV opening

IC24 LEV opening

IC23 LEV opening

IC22 LEV opening

IC21 LEV opening

IC20 LEV opening

IC19 LEV opening

IC18 LEV opening

IC17 LEV opening

IC16 LEV opening

IC15 LEV opening

IC14 LEV opening

IC13 LEV opening

IC12 LEV opening

IC11 LEV opening

IC10 LEV opening

IC9 LEV opening

IC8 LEV opening

IC7 LEV opening

IC6 LEV opening

IC5 LEV opening

IC4 LEV opening

IC3 LEV opening

IC2 LEV opening

IC1 LEV opening

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0101001101

1234567890

SW1

714

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Fully open: 2000

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 310 -

1110111101

0001111101

1001111101

0101111101

1101111101

0011111101

1011111101

0111111101

1111111101

0000000011

759

760

761

762

763

764

765

766

767

768

IC5 Operation mode

IC4 Operation mode

IC3Operation mode

IC2 Operation mode

IC1 Operation mode

IC50 LEV opening

IC49 LEV opening

IC48 LEV opening

IC47 LEV opening

IC46 LEV opening

IC45 LEV opening

IC44 LEV opening

IC43 LEV opening

IC42 LEV opening

IC41 LEV opening

IC40 LEV opening

IC39 LEV opening

IC38 LEV opening

IC37 LEV opening

IC36 LEV opening

IC35 LEV opening

IC34 LEV opening

IC33 LEV opening

IC32 LEV opening

IC31 LEV opening

IC30 LEV opening

IC29 LEV opening

IC28 LEV opening

Item
LD1

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

LD6

LD7

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0110111101

0000111101

752

1010111101

1111011101

751

758

0111011101

750

757

1011011101

749

0010111101

0011011101

748

756

1101011101

747

1100111101

0101011101

746

0100111101

1001011101

745

755

0001011101

744

754

1110011101

743

1000111101

0110011101

742

753

1010011101

1234567890

SW1

741

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Fully open: 2000

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 311 -

1100100011

0010100011

1010100011

0110100011

1110100011

0001100011

1001100011

0101100011

1101100011

0011100011

787

788

789

790

791

792

793

794

795

796

IC33 Operation mode

IC32 Operation mode

IC31 Operation mode

IC30 Operation mode

IC29 Operation mode

IC28 Operation mode

IC27 Operation mode

IC26 Operation mode

IC25 Operation mode

IC24 Operation mode

IC23 Operation mode

IC22 Operation mode

IC21 Operation mode

IC20 Operation mode

IC19 Operation mode

IC18 Operation mode

IC17 Operation mode

IC16 Operation mode

IC15 Operation mode

IC14 Operation mode

IC13 Operation mode

IC12 Operation mode

IC11 Operation mode

IC10 Operation mode

IC9 Operation mode

IC8 Operation mode

IC7 Operation mode

IC6 Operation mode

Item
LD1

LD3

LD4

LD5

LD6

LD7

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0100100011

0011000011

780

1000100011

1101000011

779

786

0101000011

778

785

1001000011

777

0000100011

0001000011

776

784

1110000011

775

1111000011

0110000011

774

0111000011

1010000011

773

783

0010000011

772

782

1100000011

771

1011000011

0100000011

770

781

1000000011

1234567890

SW1

769

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1
Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

1010010011

0110010011

1110010011

0001010011

805

806

807

808

- 312 -

1111010011

0000110011

1000110011

0100110011

1100110011

0010110011

1010110011

0110110011

1110110011

0001110011

814

815

816

817

818

819

820

821

822

823

824

IC11 filter

IC10 filter

IC9 filter

IC8 filter

IC7 filter

IC6 filter

IC5 filter

IC4 filter

IC3 filter

IC2 filter

IC1 filter

IC50 Operation mode

IC49 Operation mode

IC48 Operation mode

IC47 Operation mode

IC46 Operation mode

IC45 Operation mode

IC44 Operation mode

IC43 Operation mode

IC42 Operation mode

IC41 Operation mode

IC40 Operation mode

IC39 Operation mode

IC38 Operation mode

IC37 Operation mode

IC36 Operation mode

IC35 Operation mode

IC34 Operation mode

Item
LD1

LD3

LD4

LD5

LD6

LD7

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 : Stop 0001 : Ventilation 0002 : Cooling 0003 : Heating 0004 : Dry

LD2

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1011010011

0111010011

813

0011010011

0010010011

804

812

1100010011

803

1101010011

0100010011

802

0101010011

1000010011

801

811

0000010011

800

810

1111100011

799

1001010011

0111100011

798

809

1011100011

1234567890

SW1

797

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD8

B

B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Hours since last maintenance [ h ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 313 -

1101001011

0011001011

1011001011

0111001001

1111001011

0000101011

1000101011

0100101011

1100101011

0010101011

843

844

845

846

847

848

849

850

851

852

IC39 filter

IC38 filter

IC37 filter

IC36 filter

IC35 filter

IC34 filter

IC33 filter

IC32 filter

IC31 filter

IC30 filter

IC29 filter

IC28 filter

IC27 filter

IC26 filter

IC25 filter

IC24 filter

IC23 filter

IC22 filter

IC21 filter

IC20 filter

IC19 filter

IC18 filter

IC17 filter

IC16 filter

IC15 filter

IC14 filter

IC13 filter

IC12 filter

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0101001011

0010001011

836

1001001011

1100001011

835

842

0100001011

834

841

1000001011

833

0001001011

0000001011

832

840

1111110011

831

1110001011

0111110011

830

0110001011

1011110011

829

839

0011110011

828

838

1101110011

827

1010001011

0101110011

826

837

1001110011

1234567890

SW1

825

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Hours since last maintenance [ h ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

0110101011

1110101011

0001101011

1001101011

0101101011

1101101011

0011101011

1011101011

0111101011

1111101011

854

855

856

857

858

859

860

861

862

863

IC50 filter

IC49 filter

IC48 filter

IC47 filter

IC46 filter

IC45 filter

IC44 filter

IC43 filter

IC42 filter

IC41 filter

IC40 filter

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD5

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

0000 to 9999

LD4

Display

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

1010101011

1234567890

SW1

853

No.

Data on indoor unit system

LD6

LD7

LD8
B

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B)* 1

Hours since last maintenance [ h ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

- 314 -

HWE08040

- 315 -

1111011011

0000111011

1000111011

0100111011

1100111011

0010111011

1010111011

0110111011

880

881

882

883

884

885

886

0 to 254

0 to 254

INV board
Reset counter

Fan board
Reset counter

0 to 254

Control board
Reset counter

-99.9 to 999.9

LD5

Power factor phase angle 1

LD4

-99.9 to 999.9

LD3

W-phase current effective value 1

LD2

-99.9 to 999.9

LD1

Display

U-phase current effective value 1

Item

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0111011011

879

1001011011

873

878

0001011011

872

1011011011

1110011011

871

877

0110011011

870

0011011011

1010011011

869

1101011011

0010011011

868

876

1100011011

867

875

0100011011

866

0101011011

1000011011

865

874

0000011011

1234567890

SW1

864

No.

Other types of data

LD6

LD7

LD8

A

A

A

A

A

A

OC

A

A

A

A

A

A

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1

The unit is [ time ]

The unit is [ time ]

The unit is [ deg ]

The unit is [ A ]

Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

HWE08040

- 316 -

1001000111

0101000111

1101000111

0011111111

1011111111

0111111111

1111111111

905

906

907

1020

1021

1022

1023

Item
LD1

LD2

LD3

LD4

Display
LD5

*1 A: The condition of either OC or OS is displayed individually. B: The condition of the entire refrigerant system is displayed.

0001000111

0100000111

898

1110000111

1000000111

897

904

0000000111

896

903

1111111011

895

0110000111

0111111011

894

902

1011111011

893

1010000111

0011111011

892

0010000111

1101111011

891

901

0101111011

890

900

1001111011

889

1100000111

0001111011

888

899

1110111011

1234567890

SW1

887

No.

Other types of data

LD6

LD7

LD8

OC

OS

Unit
(A, B) *1
Remarks

[ X LED monitor display on the outdoor unit board ]

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseThumbs
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
GTS PDFX Version                : PDF/X-1:2001
GTS PDFX Conformance            : PDF/X-1a:2001
Trapped                         : False
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2008:08:08 14:11:12+09:00
Modify Date                     : 2008:10:13 09:53:18-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:10:13 09:53:18-04:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2
Document ID                     : uuid:816F222AF664DD11ACA0F23EB0903B1F
Instance ID                     : uuid:93777777-84bd-4fff-a2fc-f2c91b7f40bc
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:9234e161-bbb5-4d10-a6a9-1ecee0249ae6
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:7F6F222AF664DD11ACA0F23EB0903B1F
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : introduction1.fm
Creator                         : idobatak
Page Count                      : 326
Author                          : idobatak

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Mitsubishi PUHY P72 Introduction1 User Manual To The 4e424e6c 585f 4429 A7f9 0d15620fc7c9

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation